Home

ZM-71SE instruction Manual (Operation Version)

1. O ZM series Check the following items e Wiring between ZM series and personal computer e Settings of baud rate and COM port e PLC I F driver onthe ZM series side UNIPLC20 If the error is not recovered after checking the above items re start the simulator Received Code 01 Communication error suchas a parity error Received Code 02 Command error unregistered commands A communication error arises between ZM R d Code 03 Format error characters innonconforming series and the computer Check if there are wens i formats any adverse effects due to noise etc Memory address error unacceptable memory type address When sending a communication request to Check I F driver a personal computer simulator there is no reply froma personal computer H 3 CG v O Select Memory Setting from the File menu and specify the correct memory address used for the ZM series Received Code 05 8 31 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor ZM MDD Transfer Utility Outline The ZM MDD transfer utility is a utility program that is used to update the ZM MDD program L What is ZM MDD xX The ZM MDD used to change the programmer port into two ports with Mitsubishi A series QnA series or FX series CPU This is useful when you would like to connect LCD control terminal directly to the CPU of the A ser
2. It is not possible to change the placed text When correcting the text delete it or o cancel it by the Undo icon 4 44 Chapter 4 Registration Items Paint Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pattern Drawing Pattern Text Foreground D ee E rant a ME bk Frame Background x Ken Foreground Select a color to be displayed by clicking 0 Y gt Background Select a color to be displayed by right clicking O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Paint Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color and a background color 2 Inthe Pattern Edit window click the mouse The enclosed area is painted in the color for Foreground 4 45 Chapter4 Registration Items Square Select Area Icon This icon is used when specifying a pattern area Dragging the mouse over a pattern encloses it The enclosed area becomes a target for copy or deletion Square Select Area Usage 1 Select Square Select Area from the Edit menu or click the Square Select Area icon Edit Display Tranetorm Draw ltem Syste Ky Undo Ctrl teal Heda Rita inde Wierd dh Cut Cla SCH SE w Nip e a Oe o HA Paste Lloyd ie Eopp to Selected Sereen
3. Circle Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pattern Drawing Pattern Text Foreground IN Sg T Paint Background x El BM e Frame Pen Foreground Select a color to be displayed by dragging Background Select a color to be displayed by right dragging or by dragging with the M Paint option checked see the next O Paint Check this when painting circles With a check mark drawn circles are painted in the color for Background O Frame This is active with V Paint checked With a check mark the painted circle is enclosed in a frame The frame is in the color for Foreground O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 4 42 Chapter 4 Registration Items Circle Command Usage 1 Selecta foreground color background color and check or uncheck O Paint and O Frame 2 Inthe Pattern Edit window drag the mouse A circle is drawn with respect to the drag start point as the center Text Icon A font available for use under Windows can be imported as a bitmap Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pattern Drawing Pattern Text PO Ear Foreground w E M 0 Y gt Background Ni Foreground
4. Drag 3 To draw in the color for Background right drag the mouse 4 40 Chapter 4 Registration Items Box Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pattern Drawing Pattern Text Foreground D ee Paint H BM e Frame Background x Pen Foreground Select a color to be displayed by dragging Background Select a color to be displayed by right dragging or by dragging with the M Paint option checked see the next O Paint Check this when painting boxes With a check mark drawn boxes are painted in the color for Background O Frame This is active with V Paint checked With a check mark the painted box is enclosed ina frame The frame is in the color for Foreground O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Box Command Usage 1 Selecta foreground color background color and check or uncheck O Paint and Ol Frame Pattern Drawing Pattern Test Foreground D ee Faint Background kW Frame 4 41 0 Y gt Chapter4 Registration Items 2 In the Pattern Edit window drag the mouse A box is drawn according to the settings
5. PC AE EEE EA EE CERES lejos A S C Ate g a n er RY Oeeeeb g ai DER earn at tee gE en Message H JS K K K aa a a al la al la CO ma ma The commands below are added to the Display menu No Display ltem System Setting Tool AM When this command is selected line PE numbers are displayed wd Status Bar Relay No lg ee AE When this command is selected the e Next allocation of memory used for alarm 44 Skip display is displayed Font Bold Iw Under line Memorize Checked lines are stored in alarm message history records Unchecked Display Environment Change All Display Environment iw No lines are not stored in history records gege Iw Memorize WAY l e AN When this command is selected the e WAN File No column that indicates settings with without W Sound Priority sound output is displayed v EMail WAV File No Latest Information When this command is selected WAV file Display Change numbers are displayed Sound Priority When this command is selected the order of precedence is displayed E Mail When this command is selected the column that indicates settings with without e ma
6. A newly created SIM file Be careful about the following points at the gray sheet e The display type returns to the default whenever transferring the data e Itis impossible to add a new memory e Itis impossible to save the setting value To perform these operations create the white sheet However even with white sheet the setting data in the internal memory s cannot be saved 8 13 Hi 3 v O E Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Changing the Display on a Sheet In an automatically created SIM file s or SIM file s created from an SIV file memory set for different items is jumbled together on one sheet It is possible to display this jumbled memory on a personal computer according to such classifications as item type function etc 1 Goto the View menu and click on Display Sheet 4 menu items will be displayed View Window Help vw Standard Toolbar vw Screen Toolbar w Status Bar Previews Next Overlap Overlap 1 Overlap 2 Display Sheet d vw Display All Display only word devices A Type Display ltem Display Comment Display Display only bit devices Display each item AS A 16 Lines Je Lines 1024 lines 4 2 Click on your preference Only the filtered results will be displayed on your personal computer 3 You can perform the same operation by clicking on the tool bar icons il en a er a O ll E E ESSE y ajaja All Display Select Item Disp
7. e Si SS O D 5 Q O C cr 5 O Printer Setting ES Print Ctrl P Present Window Printing Ctrl Q CF Card Manager ZM Start Simulator File Managing gt Parts Edit Latest File Quit Application 2 The screen is closed Ifthe file has not been saved after changes the following dialog appears and asks whether or not to save the data Click either Yes or No to quit the editor CT xi Ku Will overwrite in F Z2M300data 2m37 1sa 237 1 5 Chapter1 Basic Operation Basic Operation of the Editor This section explains names and operations of bars and menus that are displayed when a screen data file is opened on the ZM 71SE editor Names of Components The following bars are displayed when the screen edit window is opened Title bar 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 ZM 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit Me nu ba tie Edt Display Draw Part Item SystemSetting Tool Window Help Icon bare Om ix 8 5 G e oH Division No Uz fim ee gt t HSB EA TE S Eey e e E lE AR i Tool erc parasitos A D 00 1 L E Screen 0 Edit Status bar fg 451 20 z 100 0 Base Title Bar The title bar contains the following information Product name File name Model na me E 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 ZM 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit l oj x File Edit Display Draw Pa
8. Fart Edit EM ha L i ltem Overlap SS SS Cancel xl Stat Bar Graph Stat Pie Graph Trend Graph Data Sampling Disp Area Calendar Display Area Closed Area Graph 7 35 D uow peue oi Chapter7 Useful Techniques 5 Choose the item for copy and click OK The copy source and target file windows are displayed The source file window is placed above the other El 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 File Manage Switch Copy Target File E Program Files 2M715 PARTS 2Mlest zaP File Edit Display Window Cae meek 0 H 14 e File Manage Switch Source GT Program Files 2M7151PARTS13Dfront 23P Ei 2 Fan RePopSw b SE NS a al File Manage Switch Copy Target wem Program Files 2M7151PARTS ZMTest Z3P ON 2 IEN CrMushsw b Ready 6 Click the part to be copied in the copy source file window The part number is highlighted in red 7 Drag the part to the desired box in the copy target file window If a part has already been registered in the box the message for overwriting confirmation appears El 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 File Manage Switch Copy Source File E Program Files 2M715 PAR1T5 aDiront 2aP File Edit Display Window File Manage Switch Copy Source File E Program Files 2M71S1PARTS 3Dfront 23P Y Copy of Parts in Consecutive Numbers AS 1 Click the first part of the par
9. Points of X Direction Specify the number of points on the X axis in the trend graph 10 is specified in this example Graph Max and Graph Min Specify the maximum and minimum values in the trend graph 100 and 0 are specified respectively in this example Trend Display X lt Back Cancel Word Count Select the number of words for data sampling memory specified in step 4 1 Word is selected in this example Click the Next button 6 Select colors as desired Open each tab window and select a graph color 9 14 Chapter 9 Wizard 7 Across cursor is displayed Click it in the desired position OSA Doa Six FO Division No O enz pn PER RG Woo BE weiste DE M gt BAS t At7iagefaec RII Deep gt Screen 1 Edit i o A DEF Fe S Q C O Q GC O m x A 3 2 D n 9 15 Chapter9 Wizard Deleting Placed Parts When deleting a part placed by the wizard function follow the procedure below Select Undo Wizard from the Edit menu Edit Display Draw Part ltem System Get x gt Undo Lis Cu Heda lit Un do Wizard A Er BHF Es Copy ctr He ES Paste Ctrl Bopp to Selected Screen Undo Haste to Selected Screen Delete Se ott Cony L ove to HOn Move to Bact CI 2 The following message appears ma Ku Das Zenn Po D Error Ces This message always indicates the final
10. Bar Graph Part Edit window 10 The Modify Part window for the bar graph part is displayed Editthe part or change its size APP3 18 I0 Appendix 3 Part Editing Pie Graph Editing Procedure Pie Graph Types The following types of pie graph parts are available Without intemal circle Without internal circle Without internal circle Symmetry Complete Round Asymmetry With intemal circle With intemal circle With internal circle Symmetry Complete Round Asymmetry E wd d Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Pie Graph Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon The pie graph type pull down menu is displayed LI D Oe geb Without Internal Circle Symmetry E 04 E vd E Without Internal Circle Complete Round Without Internal Circle Asymmetry With Internal Circle Symmetry With Internal Circle Complete Round With Internal Circle Asymmetry 3 Choose Without Internal Circle Symmetry for example A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new pie graph part is placed 5 Double click the part The Pie Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window APP3 19
11. Display Environment G Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others 3 nana po M iset Mark Dsp E IY MLE Mark Dep H Q lt Handle Color H m Background 4 19 Chapter4 Registration Items Multi overlap Overlaps are registered in multi overlaps Multi overlap Structure A maximum of 1 024 multi overlaps can be registered One multi overlap is registered per editing window Multi overlap Overlap part Overlap part A maximum of 1 024 multi overaps can be registered Calling a Multi overlap 1 Select Multi Overlap from the Item menu The Multi Overlap dialog is displayed 2 Specify the multi overlap number to be opened and click OK ltem System Setting 1 Screen Graphic Library QUID Data Block Message Multi O verlap wl gt pra Cancel Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Muli anguages Animation 4 20 Chapter 4 Registration Items Multi overlap Editing Placing an Overlap 1 Click the Overlap icon on the tool bar Y File Edit Display Draw Part ltem System Setting Tool Window De loon Sk CB gt Fe ment o SSES EIS SW A ee we b Ea KAS E o g ECH e E roo 2 The Overlap Normal dialog is displayed eT ap Ha fo E tem Select ltem select Menag pooma ES T Use System Bu
12. Division No or F Screen List Screen 1 2 MAIN MENU AUTODEMO Display Draw Part Item System Set Tool Bar D E Status Bar Jump Preview Next y skip UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem em Lis Switch Lamp Display mid A DATA DISPLAY DATA TABLE 10 12 13 seamen we aa ee Bring up the screen to be displayed on the list and double click on the screen The Screen Edit window of the selected screen is displayed Note that the previous Screen Edit window and the Screen List window remain open To check the edit windows currently opened on the editor click the Window menu Clicking the edit window name moves the window to the front IOC Window Cascade Tile Arrange Icons 1 Screen 0 Edit MAIN MENU 2 Screen List Screen V 35creen 3 Edit SW amp LP Screen 0 Edit MAIN MENU Screen List Screen aa Ta SELECTOR SWITCHES OFF STOP AUTO JOG RUN geg Sarees La 1 23 Chapter1 Basic Operation Dragging on the Screen List Window Align the previous Screen Edit wndow and the Screen List window in tiles or cascades 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 F 2M300data 2m371sa 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen List Screen File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window Help Dain NS x 0 7 0 14 5 2 WM S
13. T Output Memory PA Lamp Memory Gutput Action Draw Mode XDR REP Parts Select Function No Function Change 0 o er lt D on a S Si U T O O 3 O 5 fb Cancel 2 When selecting a different part click Parts Select and select the desired switch part 3 Click the Place button in the Switch dialog A dotted box and a mover tool cross cursor appear in the screen edit window Function No Function Change 4 Click the mouse in the desired position The switch is displayed 2 25 Chapter2 Screens Parts Change Ex Lamp Follow the procedure below to replace a placed part with another 1 Double click a part to be replaced Or click the part and the Detail Prop Change icon or TIKOLE Click a part and the Detail Prop Change icon Double click a part 2 Click the Parts Select button The Lamp List window is displayed ooo lain Character Custom OFF on Switch List E Program Files 2M71S51PARTS Parts_e 23P x 0064 0065 LI im E T Select P GE H Cancel Sc 0066 0067 0068 LJ IR 0070 0071 R2 R2 3 When opening a different parts file click the Parts File button and select the desired parts file m E 4 Select the desired part and click the Select button When O Save Setting is checked part change is possible whi
14. cooococconccococcoconononon nono cono cess conos 5 5 Transfer Dialog oos onnee aane cononcono cues cono coran aes 5 10 Screen Data Transfer via ZM 80C cono conan ono 512 Screen Data Transfer on Ethernet cc ccc coco conan ooo 5 14 Screen Data Transfer via CF Card For the ZM 300 Series Only 0 ccc cece sees cece cone conan eats 5 15 Screen Data Transfer via Memory Card ZM 1REC 5 17 Transfer of Other Data 5 21 System Updating EE 5 28 Online EQUINA aunar pone 5 30 Screen Data Transfer via Modem cono conan ono 532 After Screen Data Transfer e DA Connection coco nense cono aunor annn noron cena noron cece eens neces aes 540 Screen Che CK cccec cece neon cece neoon cece oonan cess cence sees case anes ane 540 Chapter 5 Transfer Before Using the ZM Series Before attempting to use the ZM series preliminaries including creation of screen data and its transfer to the ZM senes cable arrangement for connection with the PLC and connection data setting are required Refer to the following for details Preliminary Steps The steps below are required before the use of the ZM series Screen data file editing Ces 2 Operations For screen data files Arrangements e PLC model check e Personal computer e Communication parameters check e ZM71SE ZM series screen editing software e Modular jack MJ 1 2 and backlight setting check gJ OD
15. h O D IA Page 5 12 ZM 300 series IT Page 5 15 IT Page 5 17 c N Screen data transfer to the ZM 2 series card ZM 1REC S Operations Operations Operations D e Transfer with cable ZM 80C e Data writing by CF card e COM port check gt COM port check manager N e Transfer on Ethernet on LAN Arrangements D Ethernet comection check Amangments e Memory card D e CF card e ZM1REC Gu e With ZM 80C e ZM80C ZM series ZM 80C j rei Screen data transfer Screen data transfer ener to the ZM 300 series to the ZM series Ethernet cable ZM 80NU 80NU2 Operations Operations e Data writing to the ZMseries e Data writing to the ZM series Other methods Page 5 30 lt Onirecditina A Zeg aal Arrangements Arrangements e Transfer via modem Ze e CF card e Memory card e ZM 300 series e ZM1REC e Cable with the ZM 1REC e ZMseries Connection to PLC NA Pages 40 Operations For PLC Arrangements e Baudrate and parity check e PLC e PLC ZM 42 43 52 62 72 82 comection cable Start of communication wth PLC 9 1 Chapter5 Transfer Screen Data Check 9 2 Data required for communication with PLC are set in the screen data file and the data is reflected in communications after its transfer to the ZM series Goto System Setting to make the settings Setting for Communications with PLC PLC Type Setting Select the type of the PLC to be connected Following the selection the Comm Parameter dialog is displayed Communica
16. 3 Choose Horizontal Bar Graph for example A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed 5 Double click the part The Stat Bar Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 6 Select the statistic graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 7 The Modify Part window for the statistic graph bar part is displayed Edit the part or change its size 8 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 9 Close the Modify Part window Stat Bar Graph Part Edit window 10 The former edit window is displayed The modified statistic graph bar part appears in the window APP3 23 o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa Appendix 3 Part Editing Statistic Graph Pie Editing Procedure There is only one type of statistic graph pie With Internal Circle Complete Round Unlike pie graphs there are no options such as the sector or other types for statistic graph pie Statistic graph pie part Always equipped with internal circle The procedure for editing statistic graph pie parts is the same as used for statistic graph bar parts See the pre
17. CF card manager CF card reader wnter Connection between CF Card and ZM 300 e With anew ZM 300 just after being unpacked CO O wen D D UO DI er DI 4 DI gt a e With a ZM 300 other than the above Ethernet Informati rmation Trans Speed 10BASE T Stat No 192 168 1 68 PORT 10000 MAC 0050FF000035 Chapter5 Transfer 5 16 L Screen Data Transfer between CF Card and Computer Screen Data Transfer to CF Card 1 Insert a CF card into the CF card reader writer 2 Start up the ZM 71SE software Select CF Card Manager from the File menu 3 Specify the drive in which the CF card is now inserted Click OK The CF card manager starts 4 Select Write to CF Card from the File menu The Write to CF Card dialog is displayed 5 Click the Refer button for File to be Converted Select a file extension Z3 to be written to the CF card 6 Click OK The screen data file is stored as Dsp0000 bin BIN file in the access folder Dsp inthe CF card At the same time files with certain extensions are written to CF card folders in accordance with the screen data file settings For how to store screen data for automatic uploading or other functions of CF card see Chapter 23 CF Card in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Screen Data Transfer from CF Card 1 Insert a CF card into the CF card reader writer 2 Start up the
18. All cells are adjusted to the height of the top left cellin the selected cells 17 Align Character The cells in a table are adjusted so that the largest data item fits into a cell 15 Align width 16 _ _ Align height 17 _ Align character Gut Copy Paste Insert Delete PF Detail Setting 1 34 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Useful Editing Commands This section explains useful editing commands included in the Edit menu of the menu bar orthe tool bar Multi Copy A part or a graphic parts or graphics can be copied multiple times at one time Select a part or a graphic or parts or graphics and click this menu The Multiple Copy dialog is displayed E Dot Line Column Ce Interval Pitch Cunit X Distance 3 Y Distance 3 Quantity x fi Quantity Y fi Order INi tep f e T Display Order INC p f Memory INC FileNo INC Record No INC Ste T Switch Memory ES 1 amp Memory l M Lamp Memory Se E la SI 2 Cancel The following setting items are included Dot Line Column Choose either option for placing copied parts on the screen by dots or by lines columns For more information on the line and column see Chapter 2 Screens page 2 6 Direction When the check box of Memory INC or Order INC is turned on M it determines the direction of placing copied parts When changing the directio
19. E NE WE Q Q O lt D a gt O CL GA SES Place _ Cancel Placing Graphics 1 Inthe Graphic Library List wndow click the desired graphic Graphic Library Group 2 List 0001 000 2 0003 0004 UL To call the graphic click the JUMP button KN 3 27 Chapter3 Drawing Tools 2 Click Place A dotted line box is displayed with the cursor 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The graphic is placed with the GLIB mark at the clicked position Immediately after placement the LIB mark is attached to the cursor Clicking the mouse again places the same graphic on the screen as long as the LIB mark is displayed To cancel graphic placement click the Select icon The LIB mark disappears PE v The reference position of placing a graphic is the offset position on the AS graphic library For more information on the offset see Chapter 4 Registration Items GLIB position on the screen OFF position inthe graphic library A To call a graphic that is called with the graphic call command using another o graphic call command nesting a maximum of eight nests is possible 3 28 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Dot Clicking the Dot icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Bo Circle Tert Faint
20. Ed ZM Editor for Windows Version 2 00 F 2M300data 2m361s5a z37 ZM 38 S 800 600 32K Color List of Memory Address Use 1 19 5 If you would like to see the memory use of the current screen check O Display only Screen n To check the memory use of the entire file do not check this box 6 Click OK The List of Memory Address Use is displayed About a When O Cross reference is not checked is shown for the used memory addresses Double clicking an asterisk mark brings up the screen or dialog to which the memory address is allocated By locating the cursor on an asterisk mark the mouse turns into MEN mark and the corresponding address is indicated on the status bar O x ZO Eile Display Item System Setting Tool Window Help 8 sl PE ELERTE BEAR mt 0 A y EE EEE IEA AAC EAS AE AA Tc E A BES SQ o geb o LN Y OO eRe BOs 311 Memory Address Useswor a 100000 ul6000 u00000 u00032 u00064 u00096 u00128 u00160 u00192 u00224 u00256 u00288 u00320 u00352 u00384 u00416 u00448 u00480 u00512 u00544 u00576 u00608 u00640 u00672 u00704 u00736 u00768 u00800 u00832 u00864 u00896 100928 4 Ready ro L 2 Si i 6 7 8 91011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 A w m i MEM bebe E x E EC x x E E rr E z ofl ee ee Addres
21. Gutput Action Draw Mode XOR REP Parts Select Function No Function Change op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 er o gt a Q D er cr S IMA For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 3 Switch or Chapter 4 Lamp in theZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 2 39 Chapter2 Screens Data Display 2 40 Numerical Data and Character Displays When placing numerical data display parts click the Num Data Display icon When placing character display parts click the Char Display icon The Num Display or Char Display dialog is displayed e t va Num Display ge Se Main Type Char Prop Detail Customize f Division No mo A a Memory u00100 ent Parts Select IA For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter5 Data Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button in either dialog brings up the Num Display List or Char Display List window Select a part and click the Select button The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Message Display Click the Message Display icon The Message Disp dialog is displayed Message Disp Main Char Prop Detail Customize Division No W Memory u00100 Parts Select IA For the description
22. Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Multilanguage Animation 4 4 Chapter 4 Registration Items Graphic Library Editing g Only graphics can be registered in the graphic library parts cannot be registered Use this drawing tool bar for graphic library OO Ete Be t dd r ar DEF Except for the points below the editing procedure using the drawing tool bar is the same as the procedure for screens INE For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Offset Position Setting Outline of Offset Position D o SS O D o 3 si lt Every graphic library screen in the graphic library has a reference position called an offset When a registered graphic is called to the screen it is placed based on the offset position The offset position in the graphic library is equivalent to the graphic call GLIB position in drawing as well as the top left corner in a display area Ex Placement by Graphic Call on the drawing tool bar Offset position inthe graphic library An offset position in the graphic library is shown with an OFF mark 4 5 Chapter4 Registration Items 4 6 To IoD Changing an Offset Position Every graphic library screen in the graphic library has an offset position at coordinates X Y 0 0 as default To change the position follow the procedure below 1 Click the Off
23. al of fell ae elle lo TEREE ERR Cancel Refer A Device selection field This field becomes active when PLC Memory Internal Mem I O Memory Temp Mem PLC2 Memory or Common Memory Clicking this box brings up the drop down list Select the desired device by clicking B Entry field Specify amemory address Use the keypad in the dialog or the keyboard of the computer C Keypad The keypad allows direct entry to the above field in the allowable range foreach memory type Chapter 1 Basic Operation Station No This option becomes active when 1 n is chosen for Connection in the Detail tab window of the Comm Parameter dialog For Ethernet communications set the network table number here LU Ee p a O Internal Mem CH 3 S Q cy E Indirect lei alele 9 fefefe o Station No 0 ef stall I 3 Tale S Cancel Refer 5 CPU No This field becomes active when YOKOGAWA FA M3 etc is selected Memory Input PLC Memory YOKOGAWA FA MS E x Type o y 00100 Internal Mem T Indirect CECR est 4 5 6 C D Fa 4219 10 CPU No fi ol afcr Cancel Refer CPU No This field becomes active when Mitsubishi Net10 or OMRON SYSMAC CS1 DNA etc is selected It is possible to see the data on the network table AX Type o y 00100 Internal Mem 1 0 Memory CPU
24. as that of Delete in the Edit menu e Detail Setting The dialog for table data display property change is displayed L The Cut Insert and Delete commands are used for editing lines or columns Ex Insert Copy Specify the target Finished No 1 WEE No 1 WEE No 1 WEE No 2 12345 12345 12112345 PREG 12112345 PRES 12345 12345 4112345 MES 14112345 MES 12345 Relay Relay Sub and Message Modes Clicking the Relay Mode Relay sub Mode or Message Mode icon brings up the following corresponding tool bar Ei DC EQ identical to the relay mode uit toolbar Display area Up down switch Up down switch A For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 6 Message Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 2 46 Chapter2 Screens Entry Mode and Data Block Area Clicking the Entry Mode or Data Block Area icon brings up the following corresponding tool bar E i 9 me ma m Q T O H identicalto the relay sub Keypad Quit mode tool bar Data block Delete Detail Min display Max display Entry target Entry displa IT For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Func
25. 2 42 IOC Chapter2 Screens Property Change for Multiple Data Cells 1 Click the table data display part Handles are shown all around Memo It is also possible to bring up the Table Data Display xxxx dialog by double clicking while the specified cells are highlighted 2 Selecttwo or more desired cells by right dragging The cells are highlighted The right click menu is displayed at the same time 12345 12348 e 12345 12345 Align width 4lign height Align character faut Copy Paste Insert Delete FF Detail Setting 3 Select Detail Setting from the menu The Table Data Display Num Display dialog is displayed When data cells of different types are selected the Table Data Display xxxx dialog for the top left cell is displayed Memo xxxx in Table Data Display xxxx indicates the type of the display part Num Display Char Display Message Disp or Text in Drawing 33 c When the Table Data Display xxxx dialog has been set and OK is clicked the setting is reflected through the remaining selected cells When O Memory Inc is not checked the previous memory address setting is maintained 2 43 op A 3 a H D O D 3 D 5 Fe o gt a Q D re cr S Chapter2 Screens Change of Cell Height and Cell Width e When changing the width ofthe cell specify a demarcation line in the top line as sh
26. Buffering Area S ample Control Comm Parameter write Area Comm Parameter write Area Comm Parameter write Area Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div 0 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div 0 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Diw 0 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Diw O Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div 0 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Diw O Screen No 5 Base Num Display Divw O Screen No 5 Base Num Display Diw 0 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div 0 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Diy O Screen No 5 Base Char Display Div O Screen No 5 Base Char Display Div 0 Screen No 5 Base Char Display Div 0 Screen No 5 Base Char Display Div O Screen No 8 OPEN Macro LINE 4 Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Diw 0 Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Diw 0 Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Div 0 Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Div 0 Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Div O Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Div 0 Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Div O Screen No 8 Base T able Data Display Div 0 5 er H Si O el E 0 However it is printed out as below by clicking Present Window Printing ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name D ZM 300data ZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 Memory Address Use Cross reference D00000 D09999 D00000 Comm Parameter Read Area D00001 Comm Parameter Read Area D00002 Comm Parameter Read Area D00003 Buffering Area
27. Chapter 18 Video Display inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Function 11 Custom Part A maximum of 512 items or parts can be registered in the custom parts file with extensions Z3F Z7F The file is independent of screen data files and registered parts can be used for creating screens Operation Procedure Registration in Custom Parts File 1 Choose and copy the part or item to be registered as a custom part S 2 Select Custom Part from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click New 3 512 boxes are displayed in the Custom Part window 4 Click the box for registration Its number is highlighted in red Paste the copied part or item in the box that is highlighted The copied part or item is pasted fus Custom Part untitled 7 21 Chapter7 Useful Techniques 1 22 NM Tile the screen edit wndow and the tray icon display wndow Hold down the CTRL key and drag the chosen item to the tray window The item can also be registered in this manner 5 Click the Save icon for saving the file The message Will save custom part file untitled appears Click Yes The Select Custom Parts File to Save dialog is displayed Specify the file name and click Save To delete the registered custom parts click the box for deletion and push the Delete key or click Delete on the Edit menu Pasting a Custom Part to the Screen Select Custom
28. Since the 12 point size data is transferred to the ZM series first manual font setting is not v h necessary INS For more information on the 12 point size data see page APP 1 14 in this chapter APP1 11 Appendix 1 Fonts When any function mode or part that needs manual font setting is used on the screen proceed to set the Font Setting dialog 1 Open the Font Setting dialog from the System Setting menu Open the Manual Font Setting tab window Font Setting 3 xj Dialog Manual Font Setting Storing Points T 8 point T 14 point T 22 point T 36 point T 9 point 16 point T 24 point T 48 point T 10 point 18 point 26 point 72 point IT 11 point 20 point 28 point T Transfer fonts Font Capacity 0 byte Screen Capacity 2097152 byte Remaining Font 27083 byte Remaining Screen 3573301 byte Capacity Calculation As seen from the window every option is provided with a check box Check the boxes of the options used in the screen data All checked options are transferred as font data y O Transfer Fonts h This option is displayed for the ZM 42 to 82 Ifyour ZM 42 to 82 system program version is earlier than 1 520 and the ZM 42 to 82 data is transferred to a memory card with this box checked the manual font setting data is also transferred as screen data When uploading the data from the memory card to the ZM 42 to 82 not all HK font data HK Gothic and HK Times is specified as the data to be
29. The file management function is not available for files with different extensions pr Screen Data File Management One file can be copied entirely Also selected items in the file can be copied to a different file Messages File AAA Patterns File BB B Screen Copying only screen No 2 oO O EE With screen data file management the items are copied by the categories shown in the Item menu such as screens tiles and external characters In addition animation tables 3 6 patterns D tt 33 4c graphics library messages system setting and color pallets are copied ltem System Setting J System Setting Tool Window Screen PLE Type Graphic Library Comm Parameter Multi O verlap Edit Model Selection Data Block Unit Setting Message Font Setting Pattern Modular Macro Block Function Switch Setting Fage Block Buffering Area Setting Direct Block Memory Card Setting Screen Block CF Card Setting Tile Printer Setting Ex Char 16 Video Setting Ex Char 32 Sound Setting Data Sheet Barcode Setting Screen Library V Link Setting Multi anguages Macro Setting Animation 7 28 Time Display Format SRAM Clock Setting Attribute T able MA 400 Format Table j Modbus Slave Communication Setting Tarman TAL JD Cutan C akhna b Chapter 7 Use
30. When this option is checked switches are placed based on the switch grids irrespective of the set grid type When the Point Search icon is used during switch placing the function of the con takes priority over the switch grid setting About the right click menu The ON Grid Grid Dsp and Grid Type options in the Grid tab window are also included in the right click menu Right clicking the mouse on the screen shows the following menu CH OD DI O mD gt Undo Ctrl 2 m Ca Redo Gtrl py mD lt de Cut Chi 3 3 Gopy Chic CH A Paste Ctrl Delete D ON Grid gt Grid Display CD dv 1 Byte arid O Switch grid Mode grid 3 Overlap O nd O Free grid Overlap 1 Overlap 2 Hide overlaps with Base checked Change All On line Editing a On line Run When ON Grid and Grid Display are checked or unchecked these commands are active or inactive For Grid Type select the desired type from the displayed menu on the right When ON Grid or Grid Display is selected the grid type selected from this menu becomes valid Make other grid settings such as color or offset inthe Display Environment dialog Chapter2 Screens Others Tab Wind ow Zoom 75 100 200 400 The screen display can be zoomed out or zoomed in O Monochrome 8 grade Display When this option is checked the colors on the screen change into the monochrome 8 gradation colors This funct
31. switch area Pressing here activates the switch This area can be moved in switch part editing Select Switch Area Setting from the Edit menu Or right click the mouse and select Switch Area Setting from the pop up menu o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O 3 a a O U w pa Delete MAA Mover tool ON Grid Y Grid Display C End Type d Frame Auto Fitting Switch Area Setting Eamt Postion setting Hire with Graphie The switch area can be moved to the desired position by dragging the mover tool Drag the mover toolwhie The switch area is fitting it to the switch part moved tothe position APP3 11 Appendix 3 Part Editing APP3 12 Part Frame Setting In a switch part the graphic size may differ from the switch area If an irregular graphic is drawn for a switch part the switch area may not fit the graphic The part frame can be adjusted to fit the whole partin this situation The part frame can be set either automatically or manually When fitting aframe to a part automatically select Frame Auto Fitting from the Edit menu Or click the Frame Auto Fit icon or choose Frame Auto Fitting from the right clicking menu apy EE D Paste Ley The frame automatically Delete fits the part ON Grid Fe Grid Display gt Grid Type gt aint Postion Selina bees with Greate A frame can be set manually as desired Select
32. 0 pd Bit i Parity Send Delay 7 msec net In ion Screen data transfer is allowed in either status However it may be necessary to bring up the Main Menu local main screen STOP mode to make data transfer possible For more information see page 5 12 At the time ofscreen data transfer from the editor software computer to the ZM series If the editor software has a ZM series system program containing functions that are not supported by the ZM series the computer transfers the system program as well to the ZM series Otherwise the program is not updated If the screen data contains any font data other than Japanese 32 the computer transfers the font data as well to the ZM series If the set PLC model is different from the previously set model the computer transfers the I F driver file as well to the ZM series 0 lt 5 4 Chapter 5 Transfer Data Transfer Methods Data Transfer via ZM 80C Screen data is transferred from a computer to a ZM series unit while a RS 232C cable ZM 80C is connected between the modular jack MJ1 on the ZM series and the computer Arrangements e LCD control terminal ZM series e Cable ZM 80C 3 m Available from Sharp Corporation Computer ZM series ZM 80C een Op a A MI D D KE Ka 5 E i U RRID Modular jack DI If Modular Jack 1 Editor Port is not set inthe Modular Jack dialog 8pin 3 selecte
33. 3 Click the PC gt button The Open dialog is displayed Select the system program file corresponding to the model of the ZM series A ls Look in a TPA D e DI rt El laa 2135 pro laa 2M421 PRG laa 2M62E PRG al 2436 prg a 2M43 PRG a 2M72 PRG laa 2M362 prg lan 2M52 PRG a 2M722 prq a 2M38 prq a 2M522 prq a 2M82 PRG laa 2M382 prg laa 2M522H prg laa 2M822 prq EELER al 2M52H PRG Files of type program file prg D Cancel The list below shows the ZM series models and their corres ponding system files Model File Mode S File ZM 82T 82TC 82TV 82TVC Zm8 2 prg ZM 381SA 382SA Zm38 prg f zmM3818 3828 m382 prg ZM 72TS 72TSC 72TSV 72TSVC 128 color mode ZM 371SA 372SA ZM 72T 72TCI7 2TV 72 VC Zm7 2 pro ZM 371S 372S ZM 72D ZM 371 TA 372 TA ZM 52D Zm52 pro ZM 371 1 37 2T ZM 42D Zm42 prg ZM 362SA Zm36 prg ZM 42L Zm4 21 prg Zm362 prg ZM 362S ZM 43T Zm43 pr NSCS 128 color mode ZM 352D Zm35 prg ZM 43D ZM 43L ZM 52HD Zm52h prg ZM 62E Zm62e prg 9 25 CO O O D D UO DI er DI 4 DI gt a T Chapter5 Transfer 4 Click Open Data transfer starts On completion of transfer bring the ZM series to the STOP mode Mam Menu local main screen Check the system program version on the screen ZM 371TA 2002 4 1 09 23 30 lt 8 z z Ed Screen Data Information Size 5832704 Connecti
34. A 3 yed y9e3 10 senpe9o01 4 Bump Appendix 3 Part Editing 6 Select the pie graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 7 The Modify Part window for the pie graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size en pc E E Ol i The pie graph has a size limit e The radius of a pie graph without internal circle must be 16 dots or more e The inside radius of a pie graph with internal circle must be 10 dots or more and the difference between the inside and outside radii must be 16 dots or more 10D 8 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 9 Close the Modify Part window Pie Graph Part Edit window 10 The former edit window is displayed The modified pie graph part appears in the window L Icons for Editing Pie Graph Parts x In the window for editing pie graph parts unique icons appear in the tool bar co le OL te C With Intemal Circle D Same Start End Angles A Move Start End Angles Separately B Symmetry A Move Start End Angles Separately There are start angles and end angles for all pie graphs except circles These angles can be changed freely when the graph is edited Click icon A and click the part area of the pie graph Handles are shown around the part Click the part l E SS 2 gt Handles are Click this icon shown Drag either handle on s
35. Chapter 7 Useful Techniques L Difference between Error and Warning h E denotes an error If you attempt to transfer data indicated with E to ZM Data has some error is displayed and data cannot be transferred correctly Be sure to transfer data without any error W denotes a warning This is a moderate error that is detected due to discrepancy in setting but does not cause any problem in operation on ZM Checking Method for Details To check the details of the error or warning double click the line or clickthe line right click the mouse and select Detail from the menu The Error Check dialog shown below is displayed Screen D Base Switch I Sek IA TI A SS eo Latest Information Screen No Setting Double click Error Restoration Cause Specified screen is not set Remedy Check the setting and specify a screen number or a screen again From the right click menu 4 Q 0 Right click Menu VIEW l i l l am VIEW It is possible to jump to the error occurring position WE Detail Latest Information Refer to the explanation above EE Latest Information The latest error information is displayed Error Restoration This item is valid for some kinds of errors For more information consult your local distributor Chapter7 Useful Techniques Function 2 Memory Use This window indicates the remaining memory and items registered in scr
36. FUNCION 12 MAY 7 23 Function 13 Tag Table vecina iier 7 26 File Management Ae nene AE EE conc EE unn LODE File Management Outline cono ener anes 7 27 File Management Screen Data bie cece cee ooo 7 29 File Management Part Fil8 cocooocccco cece seen nooo ves 7 35 File Management File Copy 7 39 File Management File Deletion nosse onas cece cece eee eens ooo 7 40 File Management File Division and Combination 741 File Management File COMPANISON senses cess cee eens ees 7 43 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Tools The Tool menu provides useful tools for screen creation If you are familiar with these tools you can edit screen data quite easily Tool Menu List The Tool menu provides the following functions Error Check Files are checked for errors Page 7 2 Memory Use Memory used by the current editing file is Page 7 4 displayed Memory Address Use Memory addresses used in the current editing file Page 7 are displayed ting fi i 5 Change Memory Memory addresses used in the current editing file Page 7 7 are changed Screen Image The current screen image is registered as Page 7 10 Make Pattern patterns Screen Image The current screen image is copied tothe Page 7 1 Copy to Clipboard clipboard Paste Bitmap Bitmap files areimported into screen data files as Page 7 1 patterns DXF File Convert DXF files are imported into screens Page 7 17 Co
37. Frame Manual Fitting from the Edit menu The mover tool appears as shown below Drag the mover tool to the desired position The frame is placed in the position S mp La me eff p aA El Align d Mover tool Frame Auto Fitting Frame Manual Fitting Switch Area Setting wt Howe Start End Angle Separately ES Summe Eie lara Same Star End Angles Ke With nemalEree Se Frame or Area Property for the Graphic When creating ON and OFF displays fora switch lamp part their colors can be changed directly from the Switch Lamp dialog by designating the ON OFF graphics as frame property Frame or area property Area Refer to the following table Wien creating Switch Main Character Detail Customize Color l FrameColor OFFColor CR Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Tind Graph Scale Multi Text aracter Detail Customize Color Paint Dot Line Box Circle Tex IO oa sel Foreground AO A Ke Bat Round Chamfering Chamfering FrameColor C ONColor CMA Paint me Line Type NN SEE ENE ge me Parts Select The above function is also used for lamp parts v IOC Appendix 3 Part Editing Switch Grids As default M Place Switches on Switch Grids is checked Switches are placed and enlarged reduced or switch areas are moved along switch grids With the matrix type ZM 42 to 82 switch areas can be moved only al
38. Instruction Manual Function O Item Select Memory This option is active when numerical data display or character display parts with Display Function Entry Target setting are placed in the entry mode on the base screen For more information see Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 2 1 Chapter2 Screens 2 8 y Receive Slice Level Specify the word count of PLC data that the LCD control terminal reads one time Depending on the PLC that is used the maximum number of words that can be read one time varies If your setting exceeds that limit the value reverts to the maximum that can be read one time forthat PLC The default is 40 words As for the speed of data display it is recommended that the receive slice level be lowered for a PLC with a fast scan time and raised for a PLC with a slow scan time For more information on the processing speed etc see Appendix 2 Process Cycle in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function P2 Tab Window Screen Setting E x Pi P2 Superimpose Setting Animation Wallpaper Setting PLC Mem of Source Internal Mem of Target No of Words Moi pales Ss e No 2 D00100 E J No 3 D00100 be a TC No4 000100 m E MT No 5 000100 a T Nog OU EEE E I No 7 D00100 ER E I No 8 D00100 ee e M Nog Dono E 1 This tab window is not valid when universal serial i
39. Next button 9 4 Chapter 9 Wizard 5 Entertexts to be placed on the switches ene Character OFF char Char Color IR lt Back Cancel 1 to 4 tabs Open tab windows one by one and enter texts of the switches in the OFF status A B C and D are entered respectively for the four switches in this example Char Color Select a text color from the pull down menu Click the Finish button 6 A cross cursor is displayed Click it in the desired position El 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 ZM 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit 10 xj OQ File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help 8 sl De or ax 0 7 0 14 9 Division No 1 ECKE EECHER CECR BEFORE lao Alps Pen A S Q C O Q GC O m x A 3 2 D n y 484 162 z 100 0 Base 9 5 Chapter9 Wizard Error Display This section explains the settings to place an error display in which errors currently occurring will be shown from ten registered messages and placed from the top position in order of importance M 5 0 A M M 1 Error 2 LA M Setting Procedure 1 In the Wizard dialog select Error Display from the parts list and click the OK button Wizard E Select the part to place Image Num Display Char Displa Trend Display Histrical Display Graph Dis
40. Open from the File menu XA ml lO Transfer or Send AT command Printer Setting E Print Ctrl P CF Card Manager File Managing 2 The Open a Screen Data File dialog is displayed Select the desired screen data file and click the Open button Open a screen data file Look in Sj 2M300 D e e PS Ax a check 237 a Test 237 sa Ladder300 237 al Zm300test 237 a sample 237 laa 2m352d 237 laa sample_1 237 laa Zm3615a 237 laa Show 2_for_sharp 237 e Fisi laa Show_2_For_sharp1 237 ETE 237 Filename Zm371sa 237 Geer Files of type 237 y Cancel Lo 3 The selected screen data file is opened S 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 F Hasegawa_DataDATA ZM 2M30012m3715a 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edi E File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Osh ON S k 0 0 4 e oH Division No OK Jaen an HS SOR WARS RER k E Aragoa a Re E BO A Bez LAST Kee CH Ge OO PA LA Screen 0 Edit 545 3 Bio 1 Base TI A For more information onthe menu items see page 1 7 1 4 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Quitting 1 Click Quit Application in the File menu or the Close button Eile Edit Display Draw Part Item O new Clan gt Open El Save Ctrl s Save As Property E Transfer d Send AT command or w A wv DIS e fa d On line Editing E ABE K g t Onine Run
41. Select Send AT command from the File menu If the ZM 71SE software is not available on the receive side follow the steps below using communication software such as HyperTerminal 2 The AT command dialog is displayed AT command X ee Serial Port MARN far 60 ET 0041 00 0 50 1 sl Send End 3 Select a serial port at Serial Port 4 Select AT from the pull down menu and click the Send button AT command El Input AT command Sel Pari come sl 0 O 3 D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L 5 When OK is displayed the modem and the computer are connected normally 6 Sendthe commands below The setting items and the contents will vary with the model of the modem Check the settings for your modem 9 33 Chapter5 Transfer AT commands for the receive ZM series side Result code presence absence QO presence Result code display format V1 word format Echo back E1 yes Communication standard selection BO ITU T standard ER signal control 8 DO ER signal normally ON Flow control 1 amp KO No flow control Number of calls until arrival SO 1 except for 0 Writing to non volatile memory amp WO The current operation status to be written to STORE PROFILE 0 1 Donot use the XON XOFF flow control 2 This commandis required when you turn off the modem power after AT command setting AT commands for the send computer side Communication standard selection
42. The Transfer dialog is displayed again 7 Click PC gt for Transfer Screen data transfer starts When screen data transfer with a modem is executed while the Main Menu local main screen is displayed a message Transferring Data appears at the bottom left of the screen The message disappears on completion of transfer For about 15 seconds after the message disappears the switches and the function switches on the Main Menu screen do not work Transfer Error Messages Displayed on ZM 71SE The following error messages are added associated with the modem function If any occur the message is displayed on the ZM 71SE No response from target e Check the connection with the other end for power on off or cable disconnection e Timeout may occur before a response is returned Extend the timeout period The circuit is cut The telephone line is disconnected on the other end modem is transferred 5 39 0 O 3 D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L Chapter5 Transfer After Screen Data Transfer Connection LY L When screen data transfer has been completed allow the ZM series to communicate with the PLC and check whether the data has been received The D sub 25 pin connector is required for connection with the PLC For the cable to connect the PLC and the ZM series see each ZM User s Manual For using the universal serial communication Ethernet communication or other optional communica
43. The maximum upper limit setting is 2147483647 and the maximum lower limit setting is 2147483648 jo DEC Y M Use memory counter Increment f Interval Time i O E 100meec 5 Click OK to close the dialog A white square shaped icon will be displayed to the left of memory on the sheet 8 23 Hi 3 CG a O Q Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Use Method 1 Click on the white square shaped icon to the left of memory on the sheet Or select memory that is set for the memory counter and then press the space bar The icon will change to a clock indicating that the memory counter has started PE Scm0000 PE Scm0000 ri M00049 wa MODO45 mM00050 m00050 M00051 M00051 MODOS2 MODOS2 OO M00053 IEN A gt e a D00201 pooz01 0 D00202 D00202 0 D00203 D00203 0 000204 D00204 0 Noo205 D00205 0 NO206 DoOOZ06 0 Click here 2 To stop the memory counter either click on the clock icon on the left or press the space bar The icon will revert to a white square shape AN When the memory counter reaches the upper or lower limit it will revert to O and continue counting Setting the Memory Counter for Multiple Pieces of Memory Simultaneously 1 Selectthe memory that will be set for the memory counter multiple selections possible Select sequentially by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking the mouse Select randomly by holding down the CTRL key and click
44. e Paint Frame Color J Frame Tile Line Type L When M Paint is checked O Frame becomes active It is possible to select whether or not to draw the frame of the painted box When this option is checked Frame Color can be selected O Paint M Paint Y Paint O Frame M Frame E O o 5 O lt OD er gt O o 0 Chapter3 Drawing Tools 2 Arectangle is drawn when dragging from the start point to the end point Start point p End point Drag Drag al End point Start point Ki A rectangle can be drawn from any corner Tora pr Chamfered Box Only for rectangles chamfered box can be selected Round Chamfering or Chamfering can be selected and Radius in dots should be specified No Round Chamfering Chamfering Chamfering D H 1 1 1 D H b H D y y 8 Radius Radius Select either Round Chamfering or Chamfering before drawing the rectangle When achamfered box is selected line type selection is not possible All the lines are drawn in solid lines When Chamfering is selected O Frame becomes active However when Round Chamfering is selected it is automatically framed and the frame setting is not possible When M Paint is checked for a round chamfered box XOR cannot be used For example if a round chamfered box with M Paint is brought up in graphic relay mode the paint is not displayed on the scre
45. memory dec enne EE 8 23 Erem NE ara E a on eee 8 23 A A Aol 8 28 Operation procedure ocicococconncoconconcnononnn cono conos 8 2 OWING iaa 8 1 EGRET enasini aa ae aes 8 4 SPECT Deg ee EE 8 13 eut TE 8 3 SAMMOU a daa 8 6 a eg Eeer 8 17 CSV Me te ico 8 25 useful OperatiON sentiera cesses cono coso 8 21 SOUNO IPPO 0 E 2 56 SUC CHI CON 26 05 5 0 ee 3 11 SRAN E DEE 5 27 slate ie grap te EE ini 2 49 status A Ee Ge E 1 10 SUDERIMP OSE e 2 8 A 2 39 parl editing Eeer AP P3 9 System Setting menu 2 0 cece onne ceeee cee resen cono eee 1 16 system updating EE 5 28 T JOE 2 micres A O 5 27 E 4a ae a ee dE ER 4 72 len A len F eerie Gee 2 52 IOO oi KO Add Video Menu EE 7 21 change memory EE KO convert to rich text format cc cee cece cono coo 7 19 copy image to clip board cee eee reese eee cos 7 12 copy image to pattem n cece cee cece teere cono coc 7 10 CUSTONMI DA EE 7 21 DAFT CIVET oder 7 17 emor EE 7 2 memory address use 0 cece cece seres cono teser eee conos 7 5 We TEE 7 4 ment EE 7 1 paste DIUM AD EE 7 14 TAG Kee tii 7 26 O aise Gabe E EE EE E eaaeet 7 23 e ebe Primicia os poetes ce eee see ned iaa 1 8 2 28 e ebe e A ene athe take 2 29 TOOT MENU 2 cee cece cono sorne sene serne oere eorr 1 16 7 1 UI ARV SS GE 5 1 ZW COG ab cee ea a le oti Sade sd a asta Ca dee ae 5 12 after screen data transfer 0 cc cece estes cono coo 5 40 A A N N a 5 15 I F dri
46. ndo Baste to selected Sereen Delete i Square Select Area 4 2 Delete Al 2 In the Pattern Edit window drag the mouse from the start point to the end point as drawing a box Drag and release 3 Abox is displayed Execute a necessary function such as copy or deletion To move the box drag it Drag the displayed box Release the mouse to finish the movement ee 4 46 Chapter 4 Registration Items Transforming Pat
47. xi JW100 70H COM port JW20 COM port PG port oo JW FL Net JW series Ethernet MITSUBISHI OMRON HITACHI MATSUSHITA it A Display Multi link2 PLC Display All PLC et o e A For compatible PLC models see each ZM User s Manual 1 2 Chapter 1 Basic Operation 4 When a PLC other than Mitsubishi A series link is selected in step 3 the Comm Parameter dialog is displayed Main 1 Detail Baud Rate MEAN Signal Level AS23920 fe RS422 Read Area Eug El Write Area ost 44 El TT Read Write Area ZM 30 Compatible Calendar u16330 El Use Ethernet z Y O mr O D 5 Q O cr S O Default Cancel pl INE For the setting items inthe Comm Parameter dialog see Chapter 1 System Setting in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Click OK The Screen 0 Edit window is displayed E 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 ZM 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit KR WW x Fie Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help De ILEA 7 0 14 5 Division Wel Ok II CIA REE EE KARA CEPAS oO CER AE HE Bel Dase o R S OOS OOF 1 1 Screen 0 Edit i Ready 451 20 Z 100 0 Base IT For more information on the menu items see page 1 7 1 3 Chapter1 Basic Operation Opening an Existing File 1 Click the Open icon in the tool bar or select
48. 0000 0001 NO FRAME TYPE 1 TYPE 2 Cancel 0003 0004 0005 Wa Display Pattern e or y TYPE 3 AREA R2 0006 0007 0008 R2 R2 R2 4 The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Select a parts file 3DStd z3p or BDnow_p O z3p according to the number of the switch patterns Select parts file 21x Look in IS PARTS DI e EI ez ES al 3Dnow_P4 23P a 3Dside_128 23P sa ZMTest 23 User al 3Dnow_P5 23P i SDStd Z3P la 3DFront Z3P al 3Dnow_P6 23P a Parts_e Z3P 38 3Dfront_128 23P al 3Dnow_P7 23P a Parts_e128 23P al 3Dnow_P2 23P al 3Dnow_P8 Z3P fm Std Z3P al 3Dnow_P3 23P 8 SDside Z3P lan Std_128 Z3P E File name RES Files of type zm y Cancel E Ex When the file 3Dnow_p4 z3p is selected a 4 pattern switch can be selected APP2 4 Appendix2 3D Parts 5 3D parts are displayed in the Switch List window Switch List E Program Files 2M7151PARTS 3Dnow_P2 23P 0000 Select P2 RePopSw P2 RePopLPSw P2 RePremS w Cancel Sege 0004 0005 P2 ReSw P2 ReLPSw P2 He how 0006 0007 0008 a _ P2ReChoSwo P2ReChoSwo P2ReSiSw ResidSw P2 RResidswc ResidsWwC O U U o d ee Pattern Color Select JUMP lt gt These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part Displa
49. 2 3D Parts ES A ENEE AE AE EEN AE AE EE en wunne AH r With ZM 300 Series EE nono ENER cono corno KEE EEN eens APP 2 1 With the Model ZM 352 D s s sees usse srens sree rrene acta senses APP2 15 With ZM 42 to 82 Series 00 ee ce cee ono seret ere sese o APP2 21 Customizing e APP2 23 Appendix2 3D Parts 3D Parts 3D parts provided from Sharp Corporation will aid in more realistic display of parts on the screen This chapter explains the 3D parts setting procedure on the screen and the notes on usage The explanation slightly varies with the edit model ZM 300 or ZM 42 to 82 series Check the model in use and the corresponding explanation Forthe functions of parts see the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function O U v o d With ZM 300 Series This section provides notes on 3D parts usage and the setting procedure for the ZM 300 series Read the following thoroughly in advance 1 For the model ZM 352D see page APP2 15 in this chapter Notes on Usage Parts File Sharp Corporation provides ten 3D parts files for the ZM 300 series Depending on the components selected at the time of installation the installed parts files vary e Installed as standard only O Program Files is checked 3DStd z3p Switches lamps 2 patterns other parts 3Dfront z3p Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns ZM 42 to 82 compatible 3Dside z3p Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns ZM 42 to 82 compatible e Installed
50. 2 63 PINKA IMO EEN 2 63 setting procedure A cesses cono esse cono EE cons 2 63 C calendar Dall e e e A tetanus tetra aarnanet AP P3 31 calendar display dee eebe iere mada 2 52 capacity DCP SCRCC AA A eee eel eee 26 CF card screen data transfer 02 ccc cee cece cece con teree nono 5 15 chamtered enger eege ios 3 8 Change Al Change All Division NO cc cece one esse eee 1 33 Change All Process Cycle 0 2 ccc cee cee eee 1 33 Change memory e cece esse cues terne cess conse eens es 7 7 closed area graph EEN 2 48 colr setting T25 60l0 YDE EE 2 61 32 000 color type oo ce cece cece esse coco arso anes 2 58 monochrome type e sese cases sees sees eens 2 62 A rete 2 57 A A 26 convert to rich text format n ccc ccc saree cono cono eee 7 19 Copy dla COPY rd 1 37 VIE Eet EE 1 35 CUSIO NI Palaos aa 7 21 A aeeneeetc ern eee eae AP P2 23 D data el lt 4 25 data DIOCK aaa ada 2 47 data display tori cas apes tues ee ee een Ee 240 Ted ue nessa na APP3 14 data sampling pait did ana APP3 29 data she ado eeecsn aE 4 75 el e e EE 1 17 operating technique in dialogs 1 17 GUTS CL IO CK EE 4 65 display area Del MSC ING EEN APP3 29 display environment ut cece cece cono AE cues serre sees 2 10 detall ee ee EE 2 10 el ele EE 2 13 mMenu diSp ay in ind 2 12 ONES egene 2 16 DISD RAY VE LEE 1 14 1 27 GIVISION EE 2 2 Draw Menu eieiei eebe 1 15 3 1 el gute WEE 3 1 Basic ele It
51. 3 Select Quit Part Edit from the File menu This step completes part editing By selecting Quit Application in the File menu the ZM 71SE editor is terminated APP3 6 Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Procedures for Each Part Editing Overlap Parts In overlap parts the basic part areas equal the part areas in size Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Overlap Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened J Overlap Part 0 Edit D Uoo ___ gt gt A 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa New Part icon 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new overlap part is placed in the window Basic part area 4 Double click the overlap part The Overlap Normal dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 1D 5 Select the overlap part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon APP3 7 Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the overlap part is opened Edit the part or change its size Change the Setting ofa Part Placed icon L e Frame adjus
52. 36 Graphic Library Environment Setting ooocicoconicicoconoconncococonncononnnn nono nooo nar rr cn rr nens Base Screen DIS Play ia ia a id dis Background Color Setting cooococococonococononecoconncoco cono e nerean EE MUI E E EE MultizOVenap Rn dee Calling a Mult i overlap EE IIe E AD TE CNING NEE Placing anm Overlap usas id db Editing In vela e co o ot eo eer lg e EE Base Screen Display Macro Setting EE Macro Setting rias Macro Editing and Dei cnc Dala IOCK narran Data Block Stu HEES gen EE ENEE eher ae eee Ea Callng a Data lee Data Blc Edita iii a a bool Parts Drawing Tals Offset Position Setting Data Block Environment EENEG Base Screen RE EE Background Keelen Le WEE MESS EE Message te EE Calling a Message E Message Edit WIN O Witness Message Editing Copying and Pasting Messages Deleting Messages Message Search and BEE AAA Ee 1E N EEEN T ENER EEE EE EA R lc nck eas ae lee herent ct da ee oll earls a Message Display Environment Geinnmg cece cece aene cece ee ce eeceae caer seas ee no nr nn nn ences ear LK EE Et A E EAA E A A EE E TTEA Calling a EE Pattern Editing Pencil E HE Pencil EE Eege Eraser Icon aa Eraser Com ra Usage Line Icon mee Line mind a Box Icon eg Box Command TE Circle Icon E Circle EE Ukad Text Icon Set Text Command SECH Paint Icon AN Paint Geh BEES Square Select Area re
53. 5 32 Check this option for communications with a ZM series unit via a modem while a cable ZM 80C is not used Transfer PC gt From computer to transfer device PC lt From transfer device to computer PC lt gt Data comparison between computer and transfer device Info This is valid only when Memory is chosen for Transfer Device Memory card data check is allowed Up date of System The ZM series system program font data except for the Main Menu local main screen and I F driver file are updated at one time Detail Setting Serial Port COM1 COM8 Select a computer port Baud Rate 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Select a data transfer rate between the computer and the transfer device This option does not apply to transfer betweena PLC and a ZM senes unt The baud rate at 115 200 bps may be disabled for some computers Choose 57600 bps or less for such a computer When M Transfer through Ethernet is checked The IP address setting dialog is opened Set the IP address for the ZM senes as the transfer target For more information see the ZM 300 User s Manual Chapter5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer via ZM 80C Connecting Method Connect a ZM series unit and a computer as illustrated below New ZM Senes Just after being unpacked Make sure to connect the cable to the modular jack MJ1 on the ZM series ZM 80C Series Being put t
54. 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name D ZM 300data ZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 fe wei Fy Uer SER as reen ma ltd ter lop Data flock ha sage Pallern j i Macro Block Faro Hack et rect Block Sore sn Aleck Bata Sheet Page Screen Lib m mation Frame Graphic Lib D araghic Lib Sripghic Lib 2 driaphic Lit Graphic Lib 4 J Graphic Lib Graphic Lib E Gr apriz Lib Sriphic Lib E Looragbiec Lit lEx Char Jlb i Ex Char 28 Total feted MAA d SIT ES byte Dor een O Graphic 9 0 When Use Cross reference is Checked Ex Messages ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name D ZM 300data ZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 SST Mesa Group U Group Hi ialay M001 40 Bern Error asa 20015 Lead Aich Core Belay M0015 pa PCE Belay MOODS Rie Api Check Error Ba lay BUDD 4 CALA Liatud Error Relay MODI1S5 Mam Conroe Eer Hap Asa HODI HE Sab Contar Erann Sho Belay BOOTS Faria Urien Laiterie Belay MDDISE Ma Teall Belay MODA Dotaoh Tool Belay MODIGO Tool Doing Belay M DIGI Tr Abzottton Emer Relay MDI Sar Parts Mira Sm rf As lay HODIE Lige Heu Lisa r Eslay HODLE Ms Trey Ferie s lay BORD Tray Fishy d eent Lee a lay BODE I Belay MODIES Ba lay MUDO LEE a ETE wit l bb l ae law HODIT SSS st ve Jg Fa Pa fa V
55. 8 18 Testing word memory page 8 19 Stop Simulator com munication Stopping communication with the ZM series page 8 8 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Preliminaries Transferring Screen Data and the I F Driver Transfer the screen data and the I F driver from the ZM 71SE editor to the ZM series for debugging on the Simulator 1 Click the Transfer icon in the tool bar The Transfer dialog is displayed J File Edit Display Draw Part SC SES 2 Check the O Use Simulator box and choose Screen Data for Transfer Data Transfer the screen data Transter Device D 5 kaii T CH Si D ei screen Data Lt Driver Program Font Data Temp PLE2 Ex Font SRAM Data Station No Table Display Memory Read comments in data transfer gt Allidate transfer TM Transfer through Ethernet 0 0 0 0 Ladder comm pra WWW Modbus comm pro MODEM Transter PC gt PC lt PE o Inta Up date of system Detail Setting 3 After transferring the data check that PLC I F driver type is UNIPLC20 on the Main Menu screen of the ZM series ZM 371TA 2002 4 1 09 23 30 System Information FONT A DRV VER 1 210 N SYSTEM PROG VER 1 000 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 UNIPLC HK Gothic K A Screen Data PLC Type SHARP JW link module Error Stop Information Comment Time Out 0 50 sec Size 5832704 Retry 3 Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 1
56. Change Start Mem No in the same manner Click Option and set the items of which memory addresses should be changed For more information refer to the next section Click Change The specified memory addresses are changed at one time 0 1 Chapter7 Useful Techniques 7 8 To Change Item Select Dialog Click Option in the Change All Memory dialog The Change Item Select dialog is displayed Change Item Select EX Start End M Scien o Ship fics El Y Macro Block p to 11023 MV Data Block 0 to 11023 E YM UB 0 E to 1023 H MV Data Sheet 0 m to 11023 kV S LIB p to 1023 E Temp CTRL PLC2way 0 to 31 H E MR400 Format Table to 128 H M Modbus Slave Table p y to 205 Y System Setting F Compare Station Ho T Compare File No I Compare CPU No TI Compare Record No T Compare Temp Control Station No Cancel The following items are included Screen Macro Block Data Block M LIB Data Sheet S LIB Temp CTRL PLC2Way System Setting Check the desired items If a range should be set enter the numbers for Start and End OCompare Station No This option is valid when 1 n multi drop is selected for Connection Check this box to include port numbers of the PLCs for memory change O Compare CPU No Choose this option for setting the CPU number of PLC O Compare Temp Control Station No This option is valid when the temperature contro
57. D It pops up The internal circle hole is deleted oo AD web Click the depressed icon and it pops up The intemal circle is deleted APP3 21 A 3 yed y9e3 10 senpe9o01 4 Bump Appendix 3 Part Editing APP3 22 TD Panel Meter Editing Procedure Basically the panel meter composition is similar to the pie graph The pie graph indicates the value with execution color but the panel meter uses an indicator Both start angle and end angle can be changed in the same manner as in pie graphs Basic area for the Indicator Y panel meter part Start angle End angle The panel meter always has an internal circle The With Internal Circle icon is therefore inactive when the panel meter is edited The panel meter has a size limit The inner radius must be 10 dots or more The difference between the inner and outer radii must be 16 dots or more The procedure for editing and registering panel meter parts is the same as used for pie graph Seethe example for editing pie graphs explained previously page APP3 19 1 Appendix 3 Part Editing Statistic Graph Bar Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Stat Bar Graph Part Edit window 1 The edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened TEF Ab EE Horizontal Bar Graph Vertical Bar Graph 2 Click the New Part icon The statistic graph bar type pull down menu is displayed
58. D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Moving and Transforming the Tool Bar The tool bar can be moved to a desired position or be altered to a different shape To move the tool bar click any position except icons on a bar and drag Release the mouse button in the desired position The tool bar is moved to the position 050 00 38 xn 0 5 0 1 gt Division No oH menh ABEDE EA E SEEDS Ek lE ARAMES AAA A Deia noA a g la o 2 A 00 8 OR 1 BS Drag Draw E 7 El ti te Een ra CES To alter the shape move the tool bar out on the screen and drag the tool bar edge Dx Prem Sege oD mo me CA D Chapter1 Basic Operation Hiding the Tool Bar Tool bars are shown as default To hide the tool bar uncheck the tool bar name in the Tool Bar sub menu ofthe Display menu To show again check the tool bar name Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool GE w Status Bar V Edit R Y Parts Jump de Preview Next skip SS Screen List Item List Switch Lamp Display Grid Display ON Grid Grid Offset Position Zoom gt Display Environment Change Al Display Environment Redraw Status Bar The status bar contains the following information 300 150 Mouse coordinates Memory use per screen Hiding the Status Bar The status baris shown as default To hide the status bar uncheck Status Bar in the
59. Datatiest cece eeneeeeeeees Pans MOGIVING Procedure eii isis Creation and Storage of Part ies Creating Part E Saving and Closing Part a tenets couse R Editing Procedures for Each bart Editing Overlap Pass is A a a Selfie Rate e EE EdItlnd S Witchy Lamp P AS EE Notches 33 Editing Procedure Ex 2 eres Switch ent Editing Data Display Parts Edda Rey Dad ner dad is ae Salle Wee e Ra Editing Graph Parts geet Bar Graph Editing Se Statistic Graph Bar Editing Procedure Statistic Graph Pie Editing Procedure l Trend Graph Trend Sampling Editing Procede Editing Display Area Parts for Data Sampling cecc ee aenean aeneae nenene nenene rererere ees Edna Welte AU Si edantita eatin nae adad ass tan tn cael Editing Calendar CN Composition of Calendar arts 0 sur a a a SS APP2 21 APP2 21 APP2 21 APP2 21 APP2 22 APP2 23 APP2 23 APP2 25 O Oe Editing Procedure Ex JEE Bez Ee EENS APP3 14 APP3 15 APP3 16 wan APP3 17 Pie Graph Editing ProCedure E Panel Meter Editing Procedure ona cn nn anna rn nn rn APP3 19 APP3 22 wu APP3 23 wu APP3 24 ns A Oe Closed Area Graph Editing Procedure oocococonicicocococonncoconocncoconnononnn cn anna nn ns APP3 26 APP3 29 APP3 30 APP3 31 APP3 31 APP3 32 Editing Display Area Parts EE Sal dite Neie Sale A Printing the Part Part File Prmung Procedure aio dci sciatica svat ve orien lid
60. Dot Color IN er Pn ESOU IL EI Color For color selection see Chapter 2 Screens g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Pen Select the dot size Clicking the mouse on the screen draws a dot of the selected size in the selected color Clicking the mouse again draws the same dot onthe screen To cancel dot drawing close the Screen Drawing dialog or click the Select icon IOC Bar Graph Scale Clicking the Bar Graph Scale icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Line Bow Circle Text Paint Dot Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Color H eg Length 5 Line Split No pro L W Longline Pitch 5 Length 1 16 Set the length of short gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button 3 29 Chapter3 Drawing Tools 3 30 O Line When this box is checked M the scale is drawn with lines When this box is not checked O the scale is drawn without lines Split No 1 255 Set the number of divisions of the scale Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button O Long Line When this box is checked M long gradation marks are attached to the scale at the specified pitch When this box is not checked O long gradation marks are not attached Pitch 1 16 This option is
61. EE ZM Series Seng raid Ehe ere gene elei We EE Modular JaC EE A en SE re eee ge ee Oe Tee ce Pee 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 coo O 3 Fora ZM Series Being put to EENEG Data Transfer Lee EE Data Transfer via ZM 80C nono cono nn eee cee eee arce eee an ge esas sage een ee ease AAN eMe EE Data Trans ter OMENET a a a l 5 6 sf Data Transfer to Memon Card ZM ARE ge ee EE EE Bata Transier Ma ee En EE 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 8 5 9 5 10 e 5 12 Dk ZM 80C Series Being put to KEEN SE Meni ak S 9 13 Screen Data Comparison between Eemer Se ZM A Series A eats 9 12 9 14 OA Screen Data Transfer via CF Card Gett ZM 300 Series SERGE 9 15 lt a ke Connection between CF Card and M300 ceccecccccstcecustectucsesotesustiseites Screen Data Transfer between CF Card and Computer a 5 16 var 5 16 5 16 9 15 5 16 Screen Data Transfer via Memory Card GM 7REC nono nos Connecting Method as Wee Connection ss Memon Card CM 1REC a it Connection between Memory Card and ZM Series e Screen Data Transfer between Memory Card ZM 1REC Dee puters Screen Data Transfer to Memory Card ZM 1REC Screen Data Transfer from Memory Card ZM 1REC Screen Data Transfer between SE Card ZM 1REC and ZM Series With a ZM 300 n EE Et ee A ee See EREECHEN VF Driver Extension ob Transenna Procedure soccorso ei en a eA ios ode ied Program Extension DIO E FARIS dl Led ee is rio on a Font D
62. EE i E wy id ej mu el A ese enna A fav co BR MO No Setting EA No Setting i P24 No Setting I 3 No Setting o Pa No Setting d E No Setting l No Setting A No Setting poo l No Setting I Gaz No Setting 10 No Setting Pil No Setting pea No Setting pts No Setting p14 No Setting ____ GE No Setting O UO OOS 3d IE Ze Screen No Block Division No Block No Librar O o 4 69 LO e OH D mD w O O el Chapter4 Registration Items Screen Block Editing Follow the procedure below 1 Click the block No O cell under Block The line is highlighted as shown below Si File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window Delos S 0 1S 0 14 S SCH AAA E EL IAEA A CEA ES E b m e i a o i a S a o omy OO Reh ds Block O No Setting RE E Poa No Setting SS 3 No Setting TI L No Setting TI 5 No Setting SS L No Setting TI 2 Select an option from the pull down menu under Block Si File Edit Display ltem Gustem Setting Tool Window DS e sn Sk 017 10 14 Fe Jim A oH ea Se mils AAA O ESE EE Ke ERAN eH YO Oe OOS a A Screen No Block Division No Block No Library No 0 No Setting i No Setting a Page Block Direct Block Graphic LIB S No Setting Data Block l No Setting No Designation PW No Setting 3 3 No Setting 3 The other columns become act
63. EEE v Colors Displayed on the Editor Software and the ZM AS In the monochrome type there may be slight differences between colors shown in 8 or 2 gradation colors on the editor software and colors displayed on the ZM Displayed colors will also vary depending on the option Norm default or Reversed Image selected for Display in the Backlight tab window in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu Refer to the following table for details System Setting Unit Setting gt Backlight tab window Model Display place Display Norm Display Reversed Image ZM 42L LCD control terminal Editor LCD control terminal ZM 43L ZM62E LCD control terminal 2 62 Chapter2 Screens Blinking Setting Colors available for blinking are limited Forthe color display the basic 16 colors can be used for blinking Forthe monochrome display blinking is available in 8 graduation or 2 gradation colors Blinking Setting Procedure 1 Bring up the color pallet The B button is placed at the far right of the basic 16 color or monochrome pallet 2 Click the B button It is marked with k Blinking display is now enabled A GM Blinking Time Setting It is possible to change the blinking interval Set the items as described below 1 Select Unit Setting from the System Setting menu The Unit Setting dialog is displayed 2 Open the Blink Flash tab window Set OFF Time and
64. EEN C Font Data I Read comments in data transfer EE fe Ema aiez All data transfer opin aa g Transter farauat Ethernet 20000 ei SEAM Data ei Staton fda lable fe Ladder coanm BiG fe Modius canm ma E RODEN Transfer PC lt FE o Info poate oh Syste Detail Setting Screen Data Transfer from Memory Card ZM 1REC 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu The Transfer dialog is displayed Select Memory for Transfer Device and Screen Data for Transfer Data Click the Detail Setting button Select a computer serial port to be used and a baud rate between the computer and the memory card ZM 1REC Click OK Click the PC lt button Screen data transfer starts Transfer Device Transfer Data Display e Memory Screen Data C AF Driver b T Use Simulator EE C Fort Data T Read comments in data transfer SEN 8 Jempi All data transfer AE Eeri E Tirenster though Ethemet 000 0 CRAM Data G Station Woy Table Gadder comm pra Modbus comm pra E MODEM Transfer PC gt PC lt gt Info A Update of System Detail Setting 5 19 CO O wen D D UO DI er DI 4 DI gt a T Chapter5 Transfer 5 20 Screen Data Comparison between Memory Card ZM 1REC and Computer 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu Trans
65. ELSE le ln EE Screen Library SUE UTE areni ee ie ee ee ee i Gallhg a Sere smLlibralY sr Sh ooh iO eege Screen Library Editing Notes on Editing Ex Placing a Calendar Part in Gear Peres Screen Parts Management Through Screen Bie eege Offset Position Setting BE Placing a Screen Library EE Notes on Placing a Saen braia VIE En e e EE Animation For the ZM 300 series except for ZM 352D Animation Function Structure atc aioe ie i ie eden eel Rae Calling the Animation Function c ccccecece eee cece ae cece cues ca cnee cece eneeee ca nara nr rn rr rr ANIMA ION Edda E E Framed da dis a a Frame Stuart Frame Edda adri Chapter 5 Transfer Before Using the ZM Gees Preliminary SEPS EE Screen Data Check Setting for EE with PLC PLC Type Setting ee Communication Paramotor Setting Screen Dala Tr Pr iia Preliminaries dE For a New ZM Series Just DS Se unpacked Arrangements Data Transfer to CF Card For ZM 300 he Arrangements Transfer Dialog Screen Data Transfer via ZM 80C Connecting Method eee Ree New ZM Series ust SS Eis EES Screen Data Transfer to ZM Series Screen Data Transfer from ZM Sege Screen Data Transfer on Ethernet Connecting Method ee ree Connection sen CF Card ahd Eder Screen Data Transferto CF Card Screen Data Transfer from CF SN Screen Data Transfer between CF Card Se ZM series 9 1 EZ ee O 2 EZ OUNCE SENOS
66. EN Limitations on Line Styles e Line No 1 thick line cannot be used for the following items Continuous lines chamfered boxes parallelograms polygons circles of all kinds e Chamfered boxes can only be drawn with solid lines 3 4 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Drawing Methods Drawing methods of items are explained Line Clicking the Line icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Bou Circle Text Paint Dot Color IN eg Line Style Single Line 1 Click the Single Line icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for Color and Line Style as well as the arrow type Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Bou Circle Text Paint Dot Color IN eg Line Style pe ES eo us lv 1 e LE L Straight lines can be equipped with arrowheads Available arrow types are h shown below Arrow at both ends start point endpoint 3 5 g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Chapter3 Drawing Tools 2 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point A line is drawn Drag Start point yg Endpoint v When you drag the mouse while holding down the SHIFT key it is possible to draw a horizontal or vertical line Continuous Line 1 Click the Continuous Line icon
67. ER signal control amp D2 Line to be disconnected at ER ON gt OFF Writing to non volatile memory amp WO The current operation status to be written to STORE PROFILE 0 1 Donot use the XON XOFF flow control 2 This commandis required when you turn off the modem power after AT command setting If the settings for your modem are the same as the above select the commands below from the pull down menu and send the AT commands Receive ZM series side AT BOE1Q0 V1 amp DO amp KO S0 1 Send computer side AT BOE1Q0 V1 amp D2 amp KO OK appears when the commands have been transferred normally 7 Turning the modem power off deletes the transferred commands Therefore select AT amp WO from the pull down menu and send it OK appears when the commands have been transferred normally 9 34 8 9 Chapter 5 Transfer If the settings for your modem differ delete the written AT commands and directly enter the AT commands written in your modem s manual Send the AT commands AT command Ea Serial Port come sl Input AT command Enter AT command directly into this field 9 35 0 O 3 D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L Chapter5 Transfer LCD Control Terminal ZM Series Setting Set a baud rate between the ZM series and the modem 1 On the Main Menu local main screen press Editor MJ1 The Extended Function Setting screen is displayed 2 Select the desired baud rate for Mod
68. Edit Oj x Q File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help 5 sl DSAlormB lx 017 0 14 e sg e Division No 1 menh EEE EU CS RSR o CEA El e ABRAN Aa o 2 A 100800 31d z 100 0 9 10 Chapter 9 Wizard Trend Graph Display This section explains the settings to place a trend graph in which sampling data in memory specified as desired D200 and D201 will be expressed by two lines at one second intervals Max100 Min O lt E Max100 Min O lt E Max100 D a C Min 0 A lt E e o T x lt fe 3 ss D 09 Chapter9 Wizard Setting Procedure 1 In the Wizard dialog select Trend Display from the parts list and click the OK button Select the part to place Image Num Display Char Display Error Display Keypad Password Histrical Display Graph Display Calendar Display Memo Pad lt Explanation gt 2 Datain the desired memory addresses should be sampled at regular intervals Select Store the values from specified addresses into the buffering area in LCD Control Terminal and display the area as line graphs Trend sampling Trend Display X Display the value for the continuous memory addresses by continuous lines Trend graph EN ACA Store the values from specified addresses into the buffering area in Monitouch and display the area as line graphs i Denn Tee e ee e Ten ge
69. File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window D Ge Undo Cz oS ED 14 e gt e neo OY JSR aes CBE EHR EME ae Ez A Cut D Ahem OO eRe J oi fe Block Lopy Ctrl C ot ey 0 O error 2 0 6 errorb AS No Zetting KI These commands can also be selected from the right click menu To select multiple block numbers at one time hold down the Shift key and click top and bottom block numbers Screen Block Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Block L When Screen Call in the Relay dialog is chosen in the relay mode parts screen blocks must be specified For more information on the screen call function see Chapter 6 Message Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Screen Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 screen blocks can be registered Calling a Screen Block Wen System Setting Screen Graphic Library Mult O verlap Data Block Message Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Multilanguage Animation Select Screen Block from the Item menu The Screen Block Edit window is displayed Ed 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen Block Edit File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window Osa amg 0 4 DKCH IP CAE REEL ERA Be wem
70. File Management File Comparison cooococococicocococonocococononnnononn nono cono TA File Comparing ee About Menu ER ren e A Save to TEXT File File Meet E E Display Condition Setting Display moho O A Sn Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor SIMIO ataron iio 8 1 QUIN a A da iaa OF E ee leie de EE O Operation FOC EaU O ti da lios Possible Simulation E A O Operation Procedir e ETETE A EE EE A EE O Creating SIM File s Aumaia e Creating a New SIM A 8 3 Preliminaries dh l Ee GER ere Screen Data ane the VE Ber EE EE Connecting a Personal Computer with the ZM Series EE EE Starting up and Closing ae EE O Starting Up the Sim lator from ZM 1 71SE O EE Starting Up the Simulator from Windows Mens SE Ee EE ClOSING Een UU e T EE dal O Starting and Stopping Communication Ef Starting Communication with the ZM Gees Ef Stopping Communication with the ZM Gees DE Setting Items Necessary for Communication DH About SIM Files Wi E AE Timing of oa or Updating SIM File O EEGENEN 8 12 Names of Automatically Created SIM FilesS ooocoococcoconociccnocococononoco ETA Sheet Configuration NA A tata OO Changing the Display on a Shell EE Elek Creating a New SIM A A 8 15 Saving a Newly Created SIM File ooococococnconococncococonncococnnnnonocnon cono OTTO Adding or Inserting Memory in the heet DI Testing Geck Testing Bit ee Testing Word Mo Deed EC o 0
71. For more information see the ZM 300 User s Manual Modbus Comm Prg This option is valid when Modbus slave communication is in use Select the option when updating the Modbus slave program file O Use Simulator Check this option when performing debugging using the ZM 71SE simulator The I F driver file UNIPLC20 tpb for simulator is transferred accordingly O Read Comments in Data Transfer This option is provided for screen data transfer from a ZM series unit to a computer after the data is transferred fromthe computer to the ZM series without the included comments When the previous screen data with comments stored in the computer is overwritten by the data from the ZM series while the option is checked the comments are not deleted If the option is not checked the comments are deleted from the previous data To transfer screen data with comments open the Environment Setting tab window in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu and check O Transfer Comment 0 O 3 D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L O All Data Transfer This option is valid when Memory is chosen for Transfer Device When the option is checked screen data I F driverfile ZM series system program and font data are transferred during communication witha memory card O Transfer Through Ethernet Check this option for communications with a ZM series unit on Ethemet while a cable ZM 80C is not used MODEM See page
72. It is not possible to save SIM file s due to the fact that it is automatically updated each time it is started up Open screen data on ZM 71 SE Transfer screen data from the ZM 71SE editor to the ZM series Transferring screen data and the I F driver page 84 Connecting a personal computer with the ZM series page 8 5 Start up the Simulator Starting up the Simulator from ZM 71 SE page 8 6 Start Simulator communication Starting communication with the ZM series page 8 7 Use the SIM file to perform a test Testing bit memory page 8 18 Testing word memory page 8 19 Stop Simulator communication Stopping communication with the ZM series page 8 8 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Creating a New SIM File The procedure for creating a new SIM file and then performing a test is shown below The SIM file name memory to be tested etc can be set freely The contents of the SIM file created here can be saved Open screen data on ZM 71SE Transfer screen data from the ZM 71SE editor to the ZM series Transferring screen data and the I F driver page 8 4 Connecting a personal computer with the ZM seriespage 8 5 Start up the Simulator Starting up the Simulator fromthe windows menu page 8 6 Start Simulator communication Starting communication with the ZM series page 8 7 Create a new SIM file Creating a new SIMfile page 8 15 Hi 3 e Use the SIM file to perform atest e Q Testing bit memory page
73. Ladder300 237 al Zm300test 237 sample 237 laa 2m352d 237 la 2m3615a 237 El File name Test 237 Files of type sn D Cancel 4 Click Delete The confirmation message is displayed ms AN Will delete F ZM300data Test 237 OK 5 Click Yes The file and its environment file of the same name are deleted 7 40 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management File Division and Combination The ZM 300 series can create a screen data file of great capacity With the ZM 42 to 82 series it is also possible to create a screen data file using large amounts of memory depending on the model However such a file cannot be stored on only one floppy disk Using File Divide and File Combine the file can be divided into several sections for storage on floppy disks and can be recombined File Divide 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Divide The Divide File dialog is displayed 3 Specify the desired file name for Divide Source Clicking Refer brings up the File to Divide dialog A file can be selected from the dialog 4 Specify the desired file name for Store Target The extensions div is provided At this time the divided sections of the file cannot be stored on floppy disks Store them on the hard disk once 0 D T 5 Select the floppy disk capacity from 1 44 Mbyte 1 25 Mbyte or 720 Kbyte x T OD Specify each name of the divided so
74. Line Box Circle Text Faint Dot ojo elole E cm Foreground D A 7 Packgaund E Faint Frame Ealar l Frame TE ene SES EE Select the draw type g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Drawing from the Center 1 Select the left icon for the draw type Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Test Line Box Circle Text Faint Dot fo elole hal 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type For sectors select the desired options for O Paint O Frame Background Frame Color and Tile Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Bos Circle Text Faint Dot oleje eleje Jee Foreground M Background Frame Color Tile Line Type 3 Drag from the center to the desired radius O Start point End point 4 When you stop dragging aline is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the arc or sector 3 13 Chapter3 Drawing Tools 5 Move the cursor along the arc to the end point of the arc The section drawn counter clockwise remains as an arc Counter clockwise O Start point End point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the arc or sector Drawing from the Line End Position 1 Select the right icon for the draw type Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Muli T ext Line Box Circle Te
75. Make necessary settings in the dialog Parameter Setting Data E Action C Replace Start NoSetting Sel Start Y NoSetting Sel DN Fiss D A ls Diy Dl DN Da le 4 16 Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Char Prop Tab Window The contents of the window are the same as for the data display on screens Graphic Library Drawing Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Data ad Data Char Prop Multi Text Enlarge E Enlarge Y E A ME Foreground Background Rotate Normal sl IT Transparent Italic SIS Direction Joer ama 0174 C Bold Shadow Graphic Library Environment Setting D o SS O D o 3 si lt Environment setting for the graphic library is also started from Dis play Environment in the Display menu as performed for screen editing Therefore this section explains the settings that are different from those in screen editing Base Screen Display While editing a graphic in the graphic library a screen or multi overlap can be placed behind the graphic to check the actual image Only a graphic Graphic displayed on a base Monitor Screen An offset position can be changed with ease 4 17 Chapter4 Registration Items 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Check O Base Screen Dsp Selection
76. OMRON HITACHI MATSUSHITA y ILR Display Multi link2 PLC Display All PLC Ze Cancel APP3 4 Opening an Existing File 1 Select Parts Edit from the File menu and click Open 2 The Select parts file dialog is displayed Look in a PARTS D e DIr ES aa 3Dnow_P4 Z3P User al 3Dnow_P5 Z3P sa 3Dfront Z3P al 3Dnow_P6 Z3P al 3Dfront_128 Z3P a 3Dnow_P7 Z3P al 3Dnow_P2 z3P si 3Dnow_P8 Z3P al 3Dnow_P3 23P sa 3Dside Z3P laa 3Dside_128 23P la 3DStd Z3P laa Parts_e Z3P Parts_e128 Z3P ls Std Z3P laa Std_128 Z3P aj MTest 23 2 PS Files of type zz Cancel i File name When opening a ZM 300 part file specify z3P for Files of type when opening a ZM 42 to 82 part file specify z7P Select the desired part file and click Open Appendix 3 Part Editing 4 The Part Edit dialog is displayed Choose the part to be edited and click OK Part Edit ES Click this button Data Sampling Disp Area Calendar Display Area Closed Area Graph 5 The Part 0 Edit window for the selected part is displayed Ose mESlx 9 4eu ment GUOOo RB EOROS E A AMoO oR te W O Oe eee TAL Overlap Part 0 Edit O D O gt DI gt a o O DI D O h U DI Sen T D Nm 6 When an existing file is opened click the Screen List icon Double click the target box for registratio
77. ON Time Touch Switch DIO Mem Overlap E Mail Environment Setting Memor Expansion Backlight Buzzer System Mode Switch Blink Flash ON Time m 1 O0meec OFF Time fo E 1 O0meec The specified blinking time is valid as a common setting in the screen data file Itis not allowed to specify different times as individual blinking settings 2 63 O O O 3 lt pS Y 0 D 5 o ep 5 O 0 Chapter2 Screens M EMO Please use this page freely 2 64 Chapter 3 drawing 3 1 Basic Operations u n neoe ne nanenane nane neono nenene rererere renee OTZ SEENEN Screen Drawing Dialog coco nono conan ono es 3 2 Selecting CO OFS ococococconcco conca coco conan nono nerne sees cess senne mere ae 3 3 Selecting Mes ais ari ias e 3 3 Selecting Line Styles n a ccc cece cess nono cess cono cee serre cono es 3 4 Drawing Methode a AE EE aa QUO A A A 3 5 CO Pro A ee ee a A ET 3 7 A A 3 12 LE eee en nen AE eee E E cee A EA 3 18 ENE E E 3 23 Pl a eee O 3 26 Graphic SS 3 27 nn 3 29 Bar Graph Scale cocos oie 3 29 Pie Graph SCI coco aarin sene cents cono cues nsere mene 3 31 Trend Graph Scale e cscs cee esse case canes cece sees KA anes 3 33 NEST ccna ceczicatessassnncnnestens xaneceasnshesuceueenee wane acct apsicaekeeres 3 35 SCP CL IB EE 3 37 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Tools The tools with the following functions are provided PA MOLE
78. PLC and transferring only added or altered data to the ZM series Since the data to be transferred is limited as mentioned above transfer time will be shortened Preliminaries With ZM 80C IA For the contents of arrangements see page 5 5 Computer ZM series Select Editor Port for Modular Jack 1 in the Modular Jack dialog selected o from the System Setting menu On Ethernet A For the contents of arrangements see page 5 5 Computer bel eee CT CURREEEEES TKE gt p II ol ZMsenes With ZM 300 ZM 43 to 82 ZM 80NU 80NU2 5 30 Chapter 5 Transfer Online Editing Procedure Online editing is performed during screen editing Open the desired screen data file po 1 Select On line Editing from the File menu or the right click menu Eile Edit Display Draw Part ltem System Se Y Base A New Ctrl N Gyerap u gt Open velan E Save Ctrl S Overlap 2 Save As Hide overlaps with Base checked Property Change All On line Editing or Sei dine Bon 2 If there is a discrepancy between the screen data on the ZM series and the screen data being edited on the computer the following inquiry message appears When no discrepancy is found go to step 4 CT x S Mismatch between stored data and edited data Transfer data again CO O wen D D
79. Polygon La Foreground Beckaround E Paint Frame Ealar IY Frame Wile Line Type A Special Edit Select the draw type Drag from the center toa A Drag from the start point to corner the end point of one side O Start point End point Select the desired options for Polygon O Paint Ol Frame Foreground Background Frame Color Tile and Line Type 2 Drag from the start point to the end point The specified polygon is drawn 3 10 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools v O Special Edit This option cannot be selected as default When a polygon has been placed double click it or click it and then click the DetaiVProp Change icon The Prop Change dialog is displayed O Special Edit becomes active then When O Special Edit is unchecked ex regular pentagon The Prop Change dialog is set as the following Prop Change Box JLE a Polygon F Foreground WELT Yel SES Paint Frame Eola D Frame Me Line Type EA Special Edit O o 5 O lt OD er gt O o 0 By clicking the pentagon handles are shown around it Only enlarging or reducing is executable for the polygons When V Special Edit is checked ex regular pentagon The Prop Change dialog is set as the following Prop Change Box JLE A Al Polygon EF lt q Foreground TT WEE ke Backoraung I Paint Frame Eola R Frame THe Line Type EEE M Special Edit By clicki
80. Sample Control D00050 Comm Parameter Write Area D00051 Comm Parameter Write Area D00052 Comm Parameter Write Area D00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div O D00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div O D00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div O D00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div O D00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div O D00100 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div O D00101 Screen No 5 Base Num Display Div O ER E RU A E 6 7 Chapter6 Print Printing Examples Screen Output ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name D ZM 300data ZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 rrr Seran Ha List Output ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name D ZM 300data ZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 DSP Sore Ra d screen THELIN Hack grian FELT O07 eilkekrpgeo ESLIS Blink wo tam Select Harary He Transfer f PLC Munory Not Use RecCeivwg Slice Leyelod OPERAN Macro Kot Hee CLOSE Macro Rat lige CYCLE Sacre ona Local Fes tian Smithist Use SuPer apes Transparent Color DH Aland vialars 225 Animation Transparent Osler 25374 naze DIY Berl iwl toh caera ta FPO iad Tas bee OFF Char Ho 0 H oH Char Funcion Wa Cutput Memar upil D i Gutput Action Alternate amp Hamor jal 70 00 OFPColor Ra Dexl gnaki om Frame Color Ha Des1gnatian OH Color Ps pesignilias Frase
81. Screen Drawing Line Bow Circle Test Faint Do Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Muli Text AE Color H Jee Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point When the mouse is released the arc is displayed re ke N Clicking the mouse to the desired position draws the arc S l O Start point eo ae End point Trend Graph Scale Clicking the Trend Graph Scale icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Line Bow Circle Text Paint Dot Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Color H eg Length 5 L x Y M Line Split No fro L fro L W Long Line Fitch E L E L Length 1 16 Set the length of short gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button This setting is used for both X and Y axes O Line When this box is checked M the scale is drawn with lines When this box is not checked O the scale is drawn without lines 3 33 g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Chapter3 Drawing Tools Split No 1 255 Set the number of divisions of the scale Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button Separate settings for the X and Y axes are required O Long Line When this box is checked M long gradation marks are atta
82. Select a character color Background Select a character background color Font Clicking this brings up the Font dialog Font ax Font style Size Small Fonts F Symbol System 18 Y Tahoma 24 Terminal El Effects T Strikeout T Underline AABD TYZz Color Im Black sl Script Wester Select the desired options for Font Font Style and Size To go back to the previous dialog click OK 4 43 Chapter4 Registration Items Text Command Usage 1 Selecta foreground color and a background color and make Font settings 2 In the Pattern Drawing window click the text field Check that the cursor is blinking inside 3 Key in a text as desired Pattern Drawing Pattern Text Delen Foreground i M Background Ki 4 In the Pattern Edit window drag the mouse A box as large as the text is displayed Release the mouse being dragged to place the text Dragging the mouse Releasing the mouse displays a box places the text y y y y y y
83. This area is provided forthe use of the animation function Graphics for animation are registered Animation Function Structure There are Animation and Frame sections in the animation function Graphics are registered in Frame sections and graphics to be used are selected in Animation sections potato 0 1 023 Frame No 0 Fra me No 1 Frame No 2 Frame No 3 Frame 0 1 022 A maximum of 1 024 animation settings from No 0 to No 1 023 can be registered A maximum of 1 023 frames from No O to No 1022 which are defined in Animation can be registered Calling the Animation Function Select Animation from the Item menu The Animation window is displayed By making necessary settings in the window Animation folders and their respective Frame folders are displayed ltem System Setting J Screen gt gt 3 D cr O 5 O 3 O N lt Q9 O GA O af D LI O x O O F O 3 N Oo OH N U Graphic Library Mult Overlap Data Block Message Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile E 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 ZM 37 T 640 480 32K C Ex Char 16 File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window Ex Char 32 IDeNIgw lw ol E Jesus m or inh HSB PR A RB we Screen Library MES AAA IA Molillsnguages 7 4 8
84. Toler Ao Desigoatkon tae Mode RER Process Opole High Of Hacrocket line OF PR ge rosBet Use rater irk Rot line Rot Use Cuwa tam 11 map DEI Fils Homes ra ADA De See Hot Use Flash File Mame thes efi pl br 6 8 Chapter 6 Print Table Print ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name D ZM 300data ZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 Screen Lian L at ANIMATION System Setting ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name D ZM 300data ZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 bb U es 5 gt O O D Q Cc D SSES cya toe SEELI Selected btLCRigauntIaHl Fx Serkez CPU File Aara D data Eng wi Eb le Comment rage Paraerer Connecti ce S 4 31 Come Cerer Handling Slop Local Mo Haud Kato TRODRPS Date Lrngtb F bit Parity Ewen Stop kit 1 b1e Signal Lara PSAZ Read APEI DUDDD Write APPIE f HDD Be Aree 0 40 Compatik s Ho Calendar i Gulbis Etheener Hor Une Tast Froereag L5 gt A Code GEL Tims Time 1 500 mzet Estrisla A send Delay Tire St r Time sec Type 4718 E FE oler Reger Extensa CHon i mack light TH wisp lay Hora durar tanda ra Zen teg Seith Disable mije Sei ch Disable Ebanqe ouerr Time D ue SlinksFlazh on Tire defolt ige 6 9 Chapter6 Print Memory Use List ZM
85. Tool Bar sub menu ofthe Display menu To show again check the tool bar name Display Draw Part Item System Set Le gas Jump de Preview Next 4 skip SS Screen List Item List Switch Lamp Display Grid Display ON Grid Grid Offset Position Zoom gt Display Environment Change All Display Environment Redraw Menu Bar Chapter 1 Basic Operation File Menu New Opens a new file and brings up the screen for editing Open Opens an existing file for screen editing A screen data file for the ZM 30 61 series can be opened and converted into a file for the ZM 300 ZM 42 to 82 series Save Saves the current file If it is anew file you must give aname to the file Save As Saves the current file under a new or different name Property Allows you to check the information on the current file For more information on the menu items see page 1 42 Transfer Transfers data between the computer lt gt ZM or a memory card For more information see Chapter 5 Transfer Send AT Command Used for transferring a screen data file using a modem For more information see Chapter 5 Transfer On line Editing Used for on line editing On line Run This command becomes active in on line editing When itis clicked only the screen data that has not been transferred yet is transferred to ZM Printer Setting Used for printing a screen Editing of margin
86. Ts pecial Edit Create Color gt gt Clear Cancel Colors in the copy source file that are not registered Not registered in the pallet in the copy target file are displayed inthe Prop Change dialog in the target file 2 60 Chapter2 Screens 128 color Type The color pallet shows the basic 16 colors as default When selecting a color other than the sixteen click the far right button W on the pallet The following dialog is displayed CS E G gt O o O 3 WEI TTT Watt Si CO TTTTTITTI i eT TTT TTI ES at Cae TT TTT TT CSE D ES CAMA 1111 TT El e WSL Se Gi Q LI Click the desired color and click OK The line including the clicked color is displayed The color is marked with x 2 61 Chapter2 Screens Monochrome Type Monochrome display is not available as default Select Display Environment or Change All Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed Open the Others tab window Display Environment E x Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others Zoom Monochrome 8 grade Display V Interlock text in the switch Limit of Edit Model Area Enlarge items including circles in the opposite angle T Not display overlaps when Base is selected Windows 2000 NT4 0 paint processing Check the box of Ol Monochrome 8 grade Display and click OK Now monochrome display is valid ZM 42 43 ZM 62E A
87. Types of Fonts nn APP1 1 RSS glo EE APP 1 2 Available Fonts EE APP 1 3 HK Gothic and HK TiMes 2 aae cece cece ects nono cono coo APP 1 4 Appendix 1 Fonts Types of Fonts The following fonts are available on the ZM series Chinese simplified 5 376 1 216 Page APP 1 3 Korean 5 504 3 392 Page APP 1 3 Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic As per setting Page APP 1 4 English Western Europe HK Times The ZM 71SE version 2 00 or greater is available with all the above fonts though there are some limitations on editing in each font type This chapter provides notes on font usage and description of editing in different fonts APP1 1 lt po D mn Q TI O 5 P gl Appendix 1 Fonts Font Setting APP1 2 loa When performing font setting select Font Setting from the System Setting menu System Setting Tool Window Font Setting F x PLC Type Dialog Comm Parameter Edit Model Selection Display Language Unit Setting English Font Setting A Modular om EnalishW estern Europe Languagel e m Multi Language A ES Changing Characters fi impot Export Je provided Function Switch Setting Buffering rea Setting Memory Card Setting CF Card Setting Printer Setting Video Setting Sound Setting Barcode Setting 2M Link Setting Macro Setting Time Display Format SRAM Clock Set
88. Under Page Setting Left Margin Right Margin Upper Margin Bottom Margin Enter the desired values for each option The size of the printed screen depends on the settings of Left Margin and Right Margin M Header This option is checked M as default The PLC type and file name are indicated automatically The header setting can be changed as desired O Footer This option is unchecked O as default When a footer should be printed check the box Page No Left Center Right Page numbers are printed in any of the three positions When page numbers should not be printed uncheck the box Font Size Set this option to determine the character size The default value is 10 Print Setup Dialog Clicking Printer Setting brings up the Print Setup dialog Set paper size and portrait or landscape mode Print Setup Ki Printer Name HP DeskJet SEILER Series Printer Properties Shatus Default printer Ready Type HP DeskJet 6900 Series Printer Where LPT Comment Orientation z Letter 8 5 11 in Portrait Source Jin Tray O Landscape 6 3 H D 3 D gt Y 0 Chapter6 Print Print Procedure Print Setting Dialog Select Print from the File menu The Print Setting dialog is displayed as follows A List of Memory Use Start Page p q Use Cross reference T Net TablejEtherHet Het ablelriey IT Multi Languages Stark End 0 Sa
89. Video Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function JPEG Display Clicking the JPEG Display icon brings up the following tool bar Part OH IA For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 19 JPEG Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Sound Clicking the Sound icon brings up the Sound dialog Main Replay Sequence Detail Division No iE Memory D00100 00 aE Iw Replay Consecutively Replay Priority fo E IA For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 20 Sound Replay inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function When the dialog setting is concluded the dialog icon is shown in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To bring up the dialog again click the icon 2 56 Chapter2 Screens Color Types and Settings This section explains the color types available with the LCD control terminal models and their setting procedure Color Types Available color types differ depending on the models of ZM series 32 000 color 128 color 16 color Monochrome Model ZM 381SA 382SA ZM 38 1S 38 2S ZM 371SA 372SA ZM 37 1S 37 2S ZM 371TA 372TA ZM 371T 372T ZM 362SA ZM 362S ZM 352D ZM 82T 82T C 82TV 82TVC ZM 42TS 7 2TSC 7 2TSV 72TSVC ZM 72T 72TC 72TV 72TVC ZM 72D ZM 52D ZM 42D ZM 42L ZM 43
90. ZM Series 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu Transfer Device Transfer Data l l l e Display C Memory Screen Data 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed C VF Driver 3 Select Display for Transfer F Use Simulator cia Device and Screen Data for A de E E Allideta tanster ss gt Transfer Data Transfer through Ethemet 0 0 0 0 C spam Data 3 Click the Detail Setting button A Ladder comm pra Select a computer serial port to be C Modbus comm prg used and a baud rate between the T MODEM R m Transf computer and the ZM series Click een OK PC gt PC lt info 4 Click the PC lt gt button Screen Update of System data comparison starts between the ZM series and the computer ES EEN H screen data transfer is aborted the message below appears on the screen and the screen data as well the font data is deleted Keep this in mind if aborting data transfer loc Font Data not setting Down load by Panel Editor o SYSTEM Ft F2 Fs Fa Fs Fo Screen Data Transfer on Ethernet 5 14 IA For the description of screen data transferon Ethernet seethe ZM 300 User s Manual 1 Ethernet in Chapter 4 Network Communication Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer via CF Card For the ZM 300 Series Only Connecting Method Connection between CF Card and Computer
91. active when M Long Line is checked Set the pitch for long gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button Shape No 0 Pitch Short gradation mark e Long gradation mark O Line O Long Line a ads Drawing Method 1 Select the desired style from the Shape icons Line Dou Circle Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Sec 2 Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand 3 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point The bar graph scale is drawn Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Pie Graph Scale Clicking the Pie Graph Scale icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Line Bow Circle Text Paint Dot Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Color H eg a S Filme Spit Y Complete Hound Circle W Long Line Pitch E L g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Length 1 16 Set the length of short gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button O Complete Round Circle This option is not active as default This option becomes active once a pie graph scale has been drawn Double click the pie graph scale or click the pie graph scale and click the Prop Change icon When O Complete Round Circle becomes active check the box O Line When this box is checked M the scale is drawn with
92. amp HQ 4 fi Rall Up Roll Down Select the desired part from the menu Redisplay of Tool Bar Click a registered icon in the Part auxiliary tool box When the Detail icon is clicked the Relay dialog containing the previously set data appears The remaining icons are the same as those used for placement gt Click it to check the previous settings zj Er Oae HA A Click them for new placement 2 33 y o er lt D on a S Si U T O O 3 O 5 fb Chapter2 Screens Parts Placement and Setting Overlap Click the Overlap icon The Overlap Setting dialog is displayed IN Overlap Setting Q St 3 E Wo 8 Gig No 1 Overlap No 2 Overlap Cancel Check a box as desired The associated buttons become active Normal Overlap This section explains placing anormal overlap It is possible to create an overlap to be displayed on one specific screen Click the Normal button The Overlap Normal dialog is displayed Overlap Normal 3 A x SE Overlap No o tem Select M Use System Button E zontinue reading PLE memory when set to DEF I Superimpose Parts Select Area Prop Foreground J ERR Kr Background PG RER Sr Tile Cancel A For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 2 Ovenap inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Clicking the Parts Sel
93. as options O 3D Parts is checked 3Dnow p2 Z3p Switches lamps 2 patterns other parts 3Dnow_p3 z3p Switches lamps 3 patterns 3Dnow_p4 z3p Switches lamps 4 patterns 3Dnow_p5 z3p Switches lamps 5 patterns 3Dnow_p6 z3p Switches lamps 6 patterns 3Dnow p7 z3p Switches lamps 7 patterns 3Dnow p8 z3p Switches lamps 8 patterns During software installation the selected files are stored in the AZM71SE Parts folder Do not move the Parts folder Parts3D folder and bitmap files in folders to different storage places Do not change their names po APP2 1 Appendix2 3D Parts Memory Capacity 3D parts need more memory than memory for ordinary parts Checkthe current status of memory use by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu Ifa message The size is too large to communicate is given during data transfer memory expansion by installing an optional memory cassette ZM 300EM is recommended E Limitation on Parts Placement A maximum of 1 023 patterns of 3D parts can be used in one screen data file e Pattern count When one part or multiple parts of the same type in the same size are placed Switchlamp e COUNT the notch number of one part Parts other than switch and lamp Count one pattern When parts of the same type in different sizes are placed Switchlamp e COUNT the notch number of each part Parts other than switch amp Count one pattern for eac
94. character display parts or graphics are registered Data Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 data blocks can be registered Data block A Line A setting Data 1 1234 Data 2 1234 Data 3 1234 Data 4 1234 Data 5 1234 190 13 EJEQ A maximum of 1 024 data blocks can be registered Calling a Data Block Select Data Block from the Item menu The Data Block dialog is displayed Specify the data block number to be opened and click OK ltem System Setting 1 Screen Graphic Library j Overlao Data Block Message Ex e Cancel Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Muli anguages Animation 4 25 Chapter4 Registration Items Data Block Editing Lee 4 26 Parts Numerical data display character display and table data display parts can be placed in the same manner that they are placed on the screen For more information see Chapter 2 Screen Composition in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Drawing Tools Except for the following the drawing tools can be used in the same manner as used on the screen For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Offset Position Setting Every data block has a reference position called an offset A registered data block is always placed on the screen with respect to the offset
95. cono corno cess anno crono aes 4 55 Calling a Macro Block 4 55 Maco Block EJEN EE 4 56 Page ISIOCK A A en Page Block Structure ocoooococccconcconconocono canon cess cono cess ees 4 61 Calling a Page Block 4 61 Page Block EditiNg coocococcooo coo KE coco cono nono sene 4 62 Direct BOC Casa DO Direct Block Structure cono canon cess sees crono cos 4 65 Calling a Direct Bock 4 66 Direct Block BGI Oui aaa mias 4 66 Screen Block D I Screen Block Structure nas aesae nae aeneo tare conca cono cono sense cono 4 69 Calling a Screen Bock 4 69 Screen Block Editing sonos cece cece sence cess cocoa cono cono sense cons 4 70 RI ee UU TEE 4 72 SCH le te a Tinas dr 4 72 TS EIN O sites 4 73 IEA dd Data Sheet Structure 00 00 00 cece cece cess cono corno cess cono serre aes 4 75 Calling a Data Sheet noos cece naon cece cee cono cono cono sense nono 4 76 Data Sheet Editing enses ccc enes cscs seese eee sees cess cono cess ees 4 76 Data Sheet Environment Setting 0 00 ccc oase cee cee ees 4 79 Screen Library u sonene no cece cee ce so oane DU Screen Library Structure anseo naos aanne cee norne are nono coreo eons 4 80 Calling a Screen Library 2 ccc cesses cece noris cono cono coronan 4 80 Screen Library Editing nono nonne cono nono serre eens 4 31 Placing a Screen Library n s csc cece cono cence cee cate cess anes 4 84 Multi languages e es 4 04 An
96. dante aetna APP1 2 LOIRI RO F e M 5 26 G graph display part editing EE APP 3 17 grap Ne ND aY EE 4 4 graphe une EE 2 50 graphic relay mode 0 ccc eee cece cess KE cono terne cono coo 2 50 A ee 2 13 2 14 2 15 H de tele Rust ao tte 1 16 RA S 5 21 WMS Vell de sta 2 54 Hee LIS tee Cer E 1 27 MEME crust cnica dass tolera 1 15 4 1 J JPEG GISDIAY Ree AE alae E Dee vane 2 56 A A E EET E 1 22 K keypad par edin EE APP 3 15 L ladder COMM PIG e coco conan cono i a a 5 28 A ea O 2 39 par editing EE AP P3 9 VAY OF ege E e EE Ee 2 35 A ag Riera ila eeu Secsaeaau recs 2 6 M MACHO 2s ee e 2 54 Wu ge DOCK EE 4 55 k We fe e RE 2 54 memory address USO oo ieee coco nesse nono cece nono cess cnn no 15 Memory card EE 2 55 screen data transfer u s ness cece ccoo nono cono ces 5 13 WW le TEE 14 Menu Dsp tab wmdow cece cece cece cono coo eats 2 12 modify part modifying Darts APP3 3 MOdIy NG Re EE APP3 3 Monochrome 8 Gradation nsss cee cece cono cesses cono ees 2 16 AS E E AAS 1 35 PACED e ee EE 4 84 MUlHOVE Nap ais li 4 20 O ON GU WE 2 13 2 15 NNS o NEE 5 30 Overlap EE 2 34 part CCUG EE APP3 7 P page DIO sia a oi im 4 61 ele Kr ansia iii ads 2 48 part editing par grapi reseni data AP P3 17 cal cial APP3 31 closed area graph 0 eee cece coco serre cono nooo AP P3 26 CONDON Ed EE APP3 2 data ASP uta ona AP P3 14 data sampling display area n aon oone naan AP P3 29 display area EE AP
97. displayed Click Copy to Clipboard 3 The following dialog is displayed When reversing the monochrome color on a screen click Yes When keeping the present color click No ms A AN Will reverse When anormal overlap is placed on the screen the Layer dialog is displayed after this message Select display or non display for the base screen and each overlap and click OK 4 The screen is copied to the clipboard automatically Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Import of Screen Image into Word Processing Software Ex This section explains how to paste a ZM 300 screen to a Microsoft Word screen 1 Copy the desired screen to the clipboard as explained above 2 Start the Word software 3 Move the cursor to the position to place the copy E Document WordPad x Eile Edit View Insert Format Help STEE solel a ES dek Ss S 4 Select Paste from the Edit menu The copied image is pasted on the document The size of the image can be changed by dragging a handle eg aa ai elel S T Tee Nat 2121 E eg 7 13 Chapter7 Useful Techniques Function 7 Paste Bitmap By specifying a bitmap file with extensions BMP the bitmap can be pasted to the screen The bitmap file is imported as a pattern automatically Operation Procedure 1 Select Paste Bitmap from the Tool menu The Open a Bitmap File dialog is displayed 2 Click the desired bitmap file an
98. displayed The following items are included OO Compare Station No This option is valid when 1 n multi drop is selected for Connection Check this box to include port numbers of the PLCs for memory change Ol Compare CPU No Choose this option for setting the CPU number of PLC O Compare Temp Control Station No This option is valid when the temperature control network is used Check this box to include the port number of the temperature controller Compare File No Compare Record No Choose these options for specifying addresses in the memory card 7 9 Chapter7 Useful Techniques Function 5 Copy Image to Pattern AS v 7 10 The screen being displayed on the computer can be registered as a pattern A pattern can be pasted to a screen change switch to show the target screen instead of text or can be used in various ways The following edit items can be registered as patterns e Screen e Graphic library e Multi overlap e Data block e Screen library Operation Procedure 1 Bring up the desired screen 2 Select Screen Image from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Make Pattern 3 The Size Change dialog is displayed Size Change Y Size Ka ySize lan I 640 J ei Color Goor 16 Color 128 Color Ge 32k Color Cancel When a normal overlap is placed on the screen the Layer dialog appears first Choose the editing layer to be displayed Click OK T
99. e Ter Tei Calling Up the VWmdow EE EE ste He 1 22 Preview Next Icons Jump in the Display Menu Double clicking on the screen List E Dragging on the Screen List Window n sonene nnne nenne cece cece euena nenene nenene neneseme eseme Calling from the ltem Men Operations on the Screen List WINGOW cece cece cece cece ee cece ee cece ee cono coco no renerne nena vee 1 27 1 27 Item List D SE up SS tet EZ Utilizing the Item A A uate lehsthe sarin at cant Changing the Display FO Mat Closing these mi EE USSTU PODEIS a A Ei EN A O O ee en eT en eee ee ae ips Ee seeds 1232 1 32 Zooming In Out Right clicking Menu ee When No Items are 5 Seeded When an Item is EE Ate When a Normal Overlap iS blaced nono non ease When a Table Data Display Part is Selected 2 0 0 occ cece cece ce cece ce ee ee ae ee ee ae co non no o Uset l Editing Commands sese ana a a an a aE i ane 1 35 1 37 Multi Copy E Copy to the selected SH Rotate AN leie lte POC UNO saaan lead dll deuda an 1 39 tau 1 39 1 39 1 39 Flip Semana Get Proce duien Align Switch en Catena Flush Right Left Top Bottom EE A nce ac a ea cine Rat tore ee S ale lira ola Ile EE A a E aN ENN Select Environment EE Foni en cn di o a screen Data File elen EE RIG Information Tab VVING OWeoxsesacs aitor traditional Memory Use Tab WiNdOW ococococccococococonocccnco
100. for screen libraries though they are valid for screens Overlap OPEN macro CLOSE macro CYCLE macro Local function switch setting Screen library e Place parts in screen library while imagining them placed on the screen Both parts in screen library and on the screen are subject to the limitation on screen parts placement When placing a screen library on the screen check that parts to be placed do not exceed the limited number For more information on the limitation on screen parts placement see Chapter 2 Screens Ex Placing a Calendar Part in Screen Library In the example below a calendar part is registered in screen library No O and the screen library is placed on three screens 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE onff 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE el 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE ScreenNo 0 Screen No 1 Screen No 2 oxoror 12 1616 mE Screen library No 0 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE 4 81 O e OH D IS g Q 2 Chapter 4 Registration Items e Memory used by a Sharp Manufacturing Systems standard calendar part is about 300 bytes When the calendar parts are placed on three screens directly 900 bytes are used 300 x 3 900 bytes e When a 300 byte calendar part is registered in a screen library and the part is placed on a screen 315 bytes and 7 bytes are used respectively 315 7 7 7 336 bytes e By using screen library 564 bytes 900 336 564 are saved Use of screen library saves memo
101. from Screen and Multi Overlap LIB is made possible 3 Select either one and specify the desired number 4 Click OK The selected screen is placed behind the graphic Display Draw ltem System Setting Tool Bar FA Status Bar Jump Preview E Next Dr Skip a Screen List hem List Grid Display ON Grid land Wiser Postion oom Display Environment Change All Display Environment Redraw Display Environment El Detail Meru Dep Grid Others Edit laper Base Y SwitchYLamp 10 Y Language ff H Overlap MM Noo M Noll No Detail IT DiYHo Memory W rea Paint Dsp Graphic Relay Dep E ON OFF Message Dap Graphic Library Rev em Ha T Data Block Dep Display path of Animation CG Screen C Multi Overlap LIB jo m caca zm If no screen is displayed select Redraw from the Display menu or press the Home key on the keyboard 4 18 Chapter 4 Registration Items Background Color Setting It is possible to change the background color in the graphic library y When the graphic library is called its background setting is ignored and thus AS only the registered graphic is recognized as a target 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Open the Menu Dsp tab window 3 Selectthe desired background color and click OK The graphic is shown on the background colored as specified
102. in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for Color and Line Style Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Test Faint Dot Color H Ri Line Style 2 Click at the start point Then click at the first point The first line is drawn Click Start point EI First point 3 In the same manner move the mouse to the desired point and click Start point First point Click Second point o To erase the line you have drawn click the right mouse button 3 6 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 4 Atthe end point double click the mouse button The continuous line is terminated First point Third point Start point Click Double click Second point End point Box Clicking the Box icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot oja mm Ee EE Y B y Chamfering Background TP Paint Frame Ealar I Frame me Line Type IEA E Specialledt Rectangle 1 Click the Rectangle icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for O Paint Foreground Background Tile and Line Type Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Test Faint Dot T eee Y i y Chamfering Background A
103. item in the clipboard to the screen Copy to Selected Screen Pastes the copied item to multiple screens For more information see page 1 37 Undo Paste to Selected Screen Cancels the Copy to Selected Screen operation that you performed Delete Deletes the selected item Selecta partor a graphic or parts or graphics to be deleted and click this menu Multi Copy Pastes the selected item multiple times For more information see page 1 35 Move to Front Moves the selected item to the front When two or more parts or graphics are overlapping select the item that you would like to move to the front and click this menu Move to Back Moves apart or graphic to the back when two or more parts or graphics are overlapping Chapter 1 Basic Operation Group Groups the selected items Select multiple items at the same time and click this menu Ungroup Ungroups the selected group Select the grouped item and click this menu Rotate Graphic For more information see Rotate Graphic page 1 38 Flip For more information see Flip page 1 39 Align For more information see Align page 1 39 Table Data Display Editing Brings up the menu for table data display editing while a cell cells in a table data display part is are selected For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Modify Part Brings up the Modify Part window Select a part placed on the screen and click t
104. lamp memory location used e Each data display is counted as one memory location If maximum and minimum values are set one memory location each is counted Parts File Chapter2 Screens Parts such as switches lamps or data displays SP parts mentioned on page 2 17 are registered in parts files Desired parts will be selected from these parts files and placed on the screen A placed part can be replaced as desired Kinds of Parts Files Three different extensions are provided to parts files e Z3P ZM 300 series parts file e Z7P ZM 42 43 52 62 72 82 series parts file e ZMP ZM 41 70 series parts file The following parts files are provided from Sharp Corporation Parts file name Type Remarks 3Dside z3p 32 000 color 2M 42 43 52 62 72 82 Std_128 z3p 128 color Parts 128 z3 128 colo E EE 3Dfront_128 z3p 128 color 3Dside_128 z3p 128 color Std z7p 128 color Parts _j z p 128 color ZM 42 4 3 5 2 62 72 82 3Dfront z7 p 128 color 3Dside z7p 128 color Parts_mono z7p 1 128 cobr color ZM 41 70 2 21 0 o 3 P lt D n D o H T O O O 5 E Chapter2 Screens 3D Parts The ZM 300 series and the ZM 42 to 82 series are provided with parts using 3D graphics Extra care should be taken in handling these 3D parts For the description of setting and placing the parts see Appendix2 3D Parts This section explains how to set parts other than 3D part
105. modular socket Ifthe distance between the modem and the telephone line is as long as tens of meters data transfer failure may occur Connection between Modem and Computer Connect the RS 232C cable accompanying the modem between the RS 232C connectors on the back of the modem and on the computer Screen Data Transfer 1 Start up the ZM 71SE software Open a screen data file to be transferred 2 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu 3 The Transfer dialog is displayed 4 Check O MODEM Click the Detail Setting button 5 The Modem Comm Setting dialog is displayed Station Mo Table i Ladder comm pro Modem Comm Setting Fa Modbus comm prg crt Baud Hate AF BOO gt Telephon No P TONE C PULSE Dial timeout o ee SEH I MODEM Transfer PC gt PC lt PE o po Up date of System tar Detail setina Serial Port COM1 COM Select a serial port Baud Rate 9600 19200 38400 57600 Select a data transfer rate between the computer and the modem 5 38 Chapter 5 Transfer TONE PULSE Select TONE pushbutton or PULSE dial according to the telephone line type in use Telephone No Specify the telephone number of the receiver Dial timeout sec Set a timeout period until a normal response is given from the receiver The default is 60 seconds 6 Whenthe dialog setting is concluded click OK
106. of one window as shown below E 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Page Block Edit File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window eA LEE x 01 0 14 e 5 2 Ea Ar OA sE No Setting io No Setting t O No Setting II No Setting t No Setting t ________ No Setting io No Setting No Setting t Z No Setting i No Setting tp No Setting t No Setting II No Setting io O No Setting No Setting oj _______ No Setting io No Setting io No Setting 1s No Setting i N a HRY RY k k k Re A Len kea E Lo RR L k vA Es Lo n e Follow the procedure below 1 Click the block No O cell under Group No Setting is shown in the cell as default 2 The dialog now shows as the following File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window OSHO Six or EB e ae E be E M MBA A E O BlockNo Group Start End go a D Reference 1 No Setting 2 No Setting 3 No Setting 4 No Setting 5 No Setting Moa A Specify a group number for Group and message line numbers respectively for Start and End Enter numbers using the arrow buttons or through the keyboard 4 62 Chapter 4 Registration Items 3 Tocheck the contents of the messages click the Reference button The corresponding Message Edit window is displayed File Edit Disp
107. of setting the dialogs see Chapter5 Data Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the Message Disp List window Select a part and click the Select button The previous dialog is displayed Message display parts are used to display variable messages The parts are displayed as MSG on the editor screen Iloc KN Chapter2 Screens When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Message Display Parts When placing a graphic such as a frame behind a message display part the use of Modify Part from the Edit menu or the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon is recommended The background should be sized so that it can display the longest message For registering a part background see Appendix 3 Part Editing Table Data Display Part Table data display parts are not included in parts files They are placed by setting the corresponding dialog Click the Table Data Display icon on the tool bar The Table Data Display dialog is displayed Table Data Display A S E Division No pp Line No fio Column No E JV Ruled Line Display Ruled Line Color Background Order p Item Select bes HE Inc Direction RGT C DW Process Cycle Low Speed y Cancel For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 5 Data Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Funct
108. of the editor For more information on the title indication see page 1 6 M Create Backup File A backup file with extension r bak is always created when saving a screen data file If not necessary remove the check mark O Auto save Check this box to save the screen data automatically When the box is checked the time period for auto saving can be set Set the desired time interval for auto saving in minutes Setting range 10 to 60 minutes Fora new file a name should be given when the file is auto saved for the first time Auto save operation is not performed when the macro edit window example switch ON macro editing screen OPEN macro editing etc is open Please take note of this 1 43 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation M EMO Please use this page freely 1 44 E Screens Screen Compoemton e dr Screen Outline ccc cece ccoo cece aooo cono noran narn nonne suse se case tenes 2 1 Screen Str Ctu re coco ccc cecee cece neces cess nuoro cane cesee anrr sees neces wees ee 2 5 Operation Environment Setting e O00 Background Color Setting 20 0 ccc cece cece cesses tere cess cates cono es 2 7 Display Environment Setting 0 ccc cece cence cess cono eree ono 2 10 Part Types and Placement dl Ge e 2 17 Notes on Parts Placement n se coco cece coco cess cono cono crono anes 2 18 PAS UNS AE E il e eebe 2 21 Parts Placement fro
109. of the week in the Calendar dialog When O Display is unchecked in the tab window of a calendar item the item is not displayed APP3 31 o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa Appendix 3 Part Editing APP3 32 TD Week Day of Week Message Setting Customize Main Yea Month Da Hour Minute Second Kik KRITT Editing Procedure The procedure to edit and register a new calendar part consisting of year month and day is explained below Calendar Part Edit window 1 Click the Screen List icon In the screen list window double click the desired box for registration The Calendar Part Edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear Click the mover tool in the desired position A new calendar part is placed A En gt YYMMDDhhmmssSUN Double click the calendar part The Calendar dialog is displayed To delete unnecessary items from the part open the Hour Minute Second and Week tab windows one by one and uncheck M Display in each window Clicking OK deletes hh mm ss and SUN from the calendar part YYMMDD The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window Enlarge the calendar part if necessary Click the part and
110. option Program Select this option when updating the ZM series system program SYSTEM PROG Font Data Select this option when updating the font data 12 point size only in the case of Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Western Europe HK Times and the Main Menu local main screen in the ZM senes Temp PLC2 This option is valid only when the temperature control network or PLC2 Way function is used Select the option when updating the protocol file for either of them Ex Font This option is valid for the Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Westem Europe HK Times font types Font data specified by manual font setting except for 12 point size is transferred Font data specified by automatic font setting is transferred with screen data Chapter 5 Transfer Transfer Data SRAM Data This option is valid when an SRAM cassette or a built in SRAM is in use With the option setting the data is backed up atthe time of SRAM battery change and then is returned to SRAM For more information on SRAM see Chapter 24 SRAM inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Station No Table This option is valid when a temperature controller model F MP C04P FUJI is used on the temperature control network and also the station table is used Ladder Comm Prg It is possible to write ladder sequence for PLC Mitsubishi Q02 Q02H Q 06H via a ZM series unit Select this option for the purpose
111. overlap disappears When the editing layer has been changed from Base to Overlap again the overlap appears on the screen The same setting is available in the Others tab window to be displayed by selecting Display Environment from the Display menu ON Grid Display Environment E x Grid Display Grid Type Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others v Base Overlap 0 Overlap 1 Monochrome 8 grade Display Overlap 2 V Interlock text in the switch a Wists a See Sebi F Limit of Edit Model Area Change All Enlarge items including circles in the opposite angle On line Editing T Not display overlaps when Base is selected es On line Run Windows 2000 NT 4 0 paint processing 2 36 Chapter2 Screens Call Multi Overlap Fora call or multi overlap make settings for calling the overlap on the screen Register both call and multi overlaps in multi overlap editing For the overlap registering procedure see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking the Call button brings up the Overlap Call dialog Clicking the Multi button brings up the Overlap Multi dialog Overlap Call x Overlap No EZ T l IT Item Select Item Select Memory o 00100 Multi Overlap No a p MLIB Placement Delete Io Cancel For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 2 Overlap in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function By clicking OK the Overlap icon is registered i
112. part placed by the wizard function and its screen number Click the OK button IOoe Chapter 9 Wizard 3 The specified part is deleted from the editing screen Deletion is completed Before deletion Ed 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit lol xf Q File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help 18 sl DA ora xo CB eg Division No 14 MT EEE TEIDE E KE ADAMIS AABAA Ea S C Ar o St feo om ODE DOE js 1 BE BR Messages are registered in the message editing area fz 100 0 Base After deletion Ed 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit loj xj Q File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help 8 x De omg ax Sm h e g Division No 1H Ime t ETT ATA BASTA oo ODE DRA ALEE All settings are deleted z 100 0 U D 2 5 O H D O O D y 0 When a placed part is selected by clicking and then deleted by the command in the right click menu or the deletion icon the part is deleted from the screen however the settings in the message editing area and the buffering area remain To avoid such an instance go to the Edit menu and select Undo Wizard as explained above when deleting a part 9 17 Chapter9 Wizard M EMO Please use this page freely 9 18 TT Fonts
113. sceeiaguv acto sanehavia diets a 4 65 Graphic le le E 4 4 data display a sometida veda dde dudas 4 16 environment setting E sess EEN 0 4 17 MMS das 4 5 We rn E 4 6 MACO DOCK AAA EE Ee 4 55 Message 4 28 environment setting 2 cee cece sesse nono cocoa cos 4 35 MUIT OVEI ADs ee 4 20 OUN E cerrar id si li 4 1 Page DOCK aaa don 4 61 PANGEN A 4 37 bitmap import and storage cc o 4 49 environment setting n s cee sesse cee cocoa cos 4 53 Dacia 4 54 ASTON O NEE 4 47 SCLC E 4 3 Gei Baler 4 69 seleen lee cs timado cad 4 80 e 4 72 relay mode A seet sere tes taste tere cates en meere tene 246 Re Eu e ie 246 right click MORI etario 1 32 A Ae 1 38 S SAMPIO asusta ota 2 51 SOC e EE 4 3 background color TEE 2 7 capaci eege ege ees 2 6 COMPOSITION siii 2 1 2 5 ESOO Merci ai 2 5 screen DIOGK A E A 4 69 screen data transfer on Ethernet oooococioococoo ooo 5 14 sereen TDA eied a E hee 4 80 elele i ao EE 3 37 ER BEE 1 23 Screen Setting dialog cococoooo ccoo coo como es 2 7 Select Environment cnn nono cono teree ees 1 41 INDEX S SIMAO as 8 1 A hat uenerictewiend adie avi acemnavseeaaas 8 7 communication SIAN eens sean const ema eccrine teen sok ests ende naan ose 8 7 SO Dit Ee Ba ea ar Oh 8 7 communication setting 8 9 COMPO SIU OMA ica AT 8 1 A Aaa coer daa ees 8 31 WE ANET acicate isa cio alii 8 4 A courant Mae Ds aetna alice Leaner aches n age 8 28
114. select Transfer from the File menu 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed Click the Up date of System button C Ladder comm pra C Modbus comm pra MODEM Transfer PC gt PC lt reo nto Up date of System Detail Setting Chapter 5 Transfer 3 Thefollowing confirmation message appears The version of Display Fot_ pni2 ftd ts up dated or the same one Continue Transfer only New Data Transfer Al Transfer only New Data Only the data files in the ZM series thatare older than the counterparts in the transfer data are updated Note that no confirmation message appears in advance Transfer All All data files specified for updating are transferred Therefore transfer will be executed even if the transfer data is older than the data in the ZM series Note that no confirmation message appears in advance Yes No When the transfer data is older than or the same as the data inthe ZM series the confirmation message is displayed by clicking either button To continue transfer click Yes To discontinue click No 4 On completion of data transfer the ZM series is brought to the previous state CO O O D D UO DI er DI 4 DI gt a T V Never turn off the ZM series during system updating 5 29 Chapter5 Transfer Online Editing Online editing means editing screen data on the computer while the ZM series is communicating with the
115. text file extension txt Display Condition Setting Display menu Selecting this command brings up the Display Condition Setting dialog Number of displa El E Cancel Number of Display 10 to 100 default 20 The number of errors specified is displayed in the report window For errors having detailed information the details discrepant items can be checked in the following procedure e Display Detail e Double click the error e Right click the error and select Detail El 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 File Comparing F 2M300da File pl ee Comm Parameter Setting O bel S amp ETEA E AN AAA Baud Rate of Multi Link E File Comparing F 2M300data Test 237 F 2M300data 2m300 DLC Type Setting is different Edit Model is different q is differen Detail Unit Setting is different Font Setting is different Buffering Area Setting is different Check Level is different Message 0 is different Message 1 is different Pattern 15 is different e Enter key on the keyboard 7 44 efi Applications for ZM 71SE Editor O Eed EN EE 8 1 COMPOSIIO EE 8 1 Operation Proce Cure coccoccconcccnnococoono cece cess nono cono anno cate es 8 1 le un Me Ee Sri ent 8 4 Starting UP and Closing ccoocccco cee conan cee benne cono nono corno anno es 8 6 Starting and Stopping Communication 00 0 naase aaee ee 8 7 Setting Items Necessary for Comm
116. the ATEMP folder 8 12 TD Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Memo Ifyou close a sheet mistakenly go to the File menu to Open and choose the SIM file that you wish to re open from the directory displayed Sheet Configuration Test sheet SIM file configuration is as follows This example includes the format display item display and comment display PE Sem0000 Ol x or MODODO i D00100 00 OUT D00100 00 LAMP M00005 LAMP M00010 LAMP M00015 LAMP D00100 03 OUT D00100 03 LAMP DO00100 06 OUT DO00100 06 LAMP D00100 09 OUT D00100 09 LAMP u00100 0 Memory u00101 0 Memory 5uDO1D2 0 Memory u00103 0 Memory 1 Address Shows the address 2 Setting value Shows the setting value currently entered 3 Display type Shows the display format currently set 4 Data length Shows the data length currently set 5 ASCII display Shows the current setting value in ASCII code 6 Item display Shows the placement layer division number and item number 7 Comment display Shows comments For an automatically created SIM file this display shows the switchlamp OFF characters as well as the allocated functions Sheet background color Gray sheet AN SIM file automatically created from the ZM 71SE editor or an SIV file White sheet
117. the following two 3D parts files for the ZM 42 to 82 series During installation of the ZM 71SE software the files are stored in the Parts folder included in the ZM71SE folder e 3Dfront z7p Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns e 3Dside z7p Switches lamps 2 and 3 patterns Do not move the Parts folder and bitmap files in the folder to different storage places Do not change their names pr APP2 22 Appendix2 3D Parts Customizing When a part being edited for creating a ZM 300 screen has the Customize tab in the part setting dialog a user created bitmap is available for the part Types of Parts O The parts below are provided with the Customize tabs in their respective dialogs 3 e Switch N e Lamp e Numerical data display e Character display e Message display e Bar graph e Pie graph e Panel meter e Statistic graph e Closed area graph e Calendar Setting Procedure A lamp is used as an example for the following customizing procedure Also follow the same procedure in the case of the other parts 1 Open the Lamp dialog Open the Customize tab window 2 Click O Custom Bitmap Lamp x Main Er Bitmap Selection Delete Refer OFF jon Cancel Apply V Checking O Custom Bitmap deletes the 3D parts setting APP2 23 Appendix2 3D Parts 3 Select a bitmap file from Bitmap Selection If the Bitmap Selection column does not include th
118. the part has been modified close the Modify Part window The former screen edit window is displayed The modified part is shown on the screen L How to save a partina part file after modifying itin screen editing h e Copy the desired part e Open a partfile and bring up the edit window of the copied part e Paste the copied part tothe target window for registration e Click Save or Save As to save the part Registration has been completed APP3 3 lt O o ben a lt 5 O SS Sg mi Go gt o O 3 D D 5 OU D er D SR D 2 Appendix 3 Part Editing Creation and Storage of Part Files Creating Part Files Creating a New File 1 Select Parts Edit from the File menu and click New 2 The Edit Model dialog is displayed Choose the correct model and click OK E E Edit Model ZM 37 T 640 480 ZM 38 5 800 600 KH 800 600 12 1 model 800 600 10 4 model 640 480 10 4 model 640 480 7 7 model 320 240 5 7 model ZM 82 ZM 725 2M 72 2M 52 ZM 42 640 480 16 color reservation 640 480 8 color 640 480 Monochrome 320 240 1 6 color 3 The Select PLC Type dialog is displayed Choose the PLC model to be used for the screen data file for the part file you are going to create Click OK Select PLC Type SHARP JW series x E SHARP JW series JWw100 70H COM port JW20 COM port PG port JW FL Net JW seres Ethemet MITSUBISHI
119. the selected line To close the Line No dialog click the top right x button of the dialog or the line number d D WE S RAR LA a a Ee A LL EPM Tie 3 Sen D I 5400100 1 Command Condition Next pen Delete Preview Next To bring up the Line No dialog again click a white line 4 58 Chapter 4 Registration Items Useful Functions Copying Lines Click a line number as the copy source The Copy icon becomes active Click the icon ia File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window Osuna xo 70 449 52 R m DRE IR wile BE we H E HEM oe Sudd100 1 Ww Su00105 5400003 o EENEG Click a line number as the copy target Click the Paste icon The source data is copied to the target line D A AAA nn gt O zz File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool 38 File Edit Display ltem System Setting Th u NAAA OA ax 01 E 8 BUET BUERG a p EA a OS te 5u00210 10 0N S5u00100 1 W When copying multiple lines at one time click the top number of the lines hold down the Shift key and click the bottom number of the lines an File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window Hok down the Hr Terre ees e Shift key and click the bottom mm a a ES SE le ies line number i pEi O GH we EY OoOe eee SuOO105 Su00003 W Sugoloo 1 Ww 5u00210 1010H7 Multiple lines from the specified top to the specified b
120. this transparent setting however the actual pattern color can be displayed Set the color that you do not want to display as transparent when the pattern is placed on the screen Only one color can be set as transparent for each pattern When setting a color as transparent the transparent color is reflected even when placement is not animated Take care to draw the pattern so that it falls within the 4 088 dot size limit pattern size X size x Y size EX When a pattern is created and placed on the screen it differs in the following ways depending on whether or not a color is setas transparent Pattern Place Y Transparent Color Green O Transparent Color None Screen Screen 4 48 Chapter 4 Registration Items Bitmap Import and Storage It is possible to import a bitmap file into pattern editing and to store a pattern as a bitmap file Importing a Bitmap File 1 Select Read from Bitmap File from the Tool menu The Open a Bitmap File dialog is displayed Tool Window Open a bitmap file Error Check Merion Use Memon Address Use Change Memory Convert to Rich Text Format Sah ideo Meno iden 0 z Y gt Save As Bitmap File Files of type bmp Cancel Tag Table de Color Type for Convert 8 116 i 128 Click OK 4 49 Chapter4 Registration Items 3 The following confirmation message is displayed Clicking Yes imports th
121. trend graph and closed area graph To create these graph parts follow their individual procedures 33 c 33 c o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa Bar Graph Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Bar Graph Part Edit window 1 The edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon The bar graph type pull down menu is displayed LI e YAA K Horizontal Bar RGT Horizontal Bar LFT Vertical Bar Top Vertical Bar Bottom 3 Choose Horizontal Bar RGT for example A dotted box and a mover tool appear 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed NA APP3 17 Appendix 3 Part Editing 5 Double click the part The Bar Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannotbe set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window Io 6 Select the bar graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon TEEL Modify Part window 7 The Modify Part window for the bar graph part is displayed Editthe part or change its size 8 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 9 Close the Modify Part window Click the Frame Auto Fit icon loo a a lo o a y Eb a lo o a a a E A
122. window Ed 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Macro Block 0 Edit File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window DSH O xm E mec g t n He ES E UN a BC y ga k EE bt E a M B ta A K SS C riai 13 EA S le Ki Ca a FS CT ei GC E tp DA E 3 as n CIEE DS 4Macro Block 0 Edit HO NI LA PN un O oJ Qu Follow the procedure below 1 Click a white line in the window The Line No dialog is displayed MAA AAA 1 a Command Estan Test pe a rl rl he 1 O a Command E Commands Clasification All Arithmetical operations Logic Operations Statistic Bit Process Conversion Transfer Comparison Macro Actions FROM Printer ion gt fii EDAD 4 56 Chapter 4 Registration Items y Command Dialog a Commands Classification on the left in the dialog lists the macro command groups and Command on the right lists the commands Clicking All under Commands Classification brings up all commands under Command Clicking a group name under Commands Classification brings up the associated commands under Command Command Commands Clasification Command DK All Arithmetical operations Logic Operations Statistic Bit Process Conversion FILL Cancel MOV di Comparison Ge an Macro Schons FROM wor
123. with patterns in the graphic mode orthe graphic relay mode patterns that are 4 088 dots or less in size tend to be depicted more smoothly Once a pattern is placed it cannot be reduced but can be enlarged Ifa pattern is 4 088 dots or less in size its size can be multiplied by integers Note that if a pattern that does not exceed 4 088 dots is enlarged onthe screen or in the graphic library it may exceed 4 088 dots and thus be subject to the limitations described above in the case of Rotate Mirror operation or animation 4 54 Chapter 4 Registration Items Macro Block Macro programs are registered in macro blocks Macro blocks are executed by CALL commands in the macro mode or in other macro programs Macro Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 macro blocks can be registered A maximum of 1 024 lines can be set for one macro block A Calling a Macro Block Select Macro Block from the Item menu The Macro Block dialog is displayed Specify the macro block number to be opened and click OK ltem System Setting J Screen yoo g oe N Graphic Library Mult O verlap Data Block Message Macro Block Ed Pattern CT reet pa E Cancel Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library MultiCanguages Animation 4 55 Chapter4 Registration Items Macro Block Editing Opening a macro block brings up the following
124. 0 Custom Part TT Page Dlock 0 HJ Iray I Direct Block m Tag Table I Sereen Block p Macro Block jo S Data Block p3 Mult Uverlap 0 T Sereen ihrary GR E Temp PLC2 Net Table po y E Map Format Call BE E MR400 Funnel Reuistes E F Modbus Slave Table p 3 S Animation KS TF Comment Group D H I Sercon Output TF Table Print J List Output Reverse File Name FAZM300data Zm371sa ATA RE Ste anre 2 Check each item to convert to a Rich Text file and input the range of each editing item Data Sheet cannot be converted to Rich Text file PE The setting items O Screen Output O List Output O Table Print O Reverse are same as printing IA For more information see Chapter 6 Print 3 Specify the name and the location of a Rich Text file at the File Name setting When changing the name orthe location press the Refer button 4 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK The size of the Rich Text file made by the ZM 71SE editoris much larger because it is not compressed The size will become smaller if the Rich Text file is saved as the normal document file e g doc in Microsoft Word by the Save As command Toa 7 20 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 10 Add Video Menu When a video display item is used it is possible to automatically place an overlap using a macro command for video quality adjustment IA For more information see
125. 0 DEC Wy SIGN Char 205 240 OCT Char 15 240 HEX Char H 55 315 BIN Grouping Start gt gt gt gt Box Paint 15 95 1 70 140 Box Paint 15 97 170 136 Box Paint 15 98 1 70 135 Box Paint J 15 99 1 70 134 Box Paint 15 101 170 132 Box Paint 15 102 170 131 Box Paint 15 104 170 131 Box Paint 15 106 170 127 3 Click the item to be copied It is highlighted U Qo 3 lt O du o Q o U Q O D 3 D 4 Select Copy from the Edit menu or click the Copy icon ag Item List Screen 5 ox Paint 400 161 615 Box Paint 400 167 615 210 Box Paint 400 173 615 204 Box Paint 400 179 615 198 Box Paint 400 185 615 192 Grouping End lt lt lt lt Box Paint 410 155 605 225 0 Num Display 000105 411 158 603 222 Function Entry Target Char 400 90 MAX lt 750 gt RED Char 400 115 MIN gt 250 gt YELLOW Char 400 140 NORMAL gt BLACK 0 Interval Timer Char 421 375 Grouping Start gt gt gt gt Box Paint 400 310 465 340 Box Paint 400 311 485 337 Box Paint 400 312 465 336 Box Paint 400 312 465 336 Box Paint 400 31 4 485 334 Box Paint 400 314 485 334 Box Paint 400 316 485 334 Leen 1100 200 m am 5 Pasting can be executed on either Item List or screen Select P
126. 14 Close the Modify Part window The ON display as created appears in the window Whether or not the created switches or lamps appear as desired in the ON OFF and P3 to P8 displays depends on the Draw Mode selection between XOR and REP For a 3 to 8 notch part the same drawing or editing procedure applies APP3 13 o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Data Display Parts APP3 14 Leef There are three different types of data display parts numerical data display character display and message display However the editing procedure is the same for all of them Editing Procedure Ex Numerical data display part Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Num Display Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new numerical data display part is placed EE EE The top left comer of the part moves to gt 1234 the clicked position 4 Double click the part The Num Display dialog is displayed Setthe dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannotbe set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 5 Select the numerical data display part b
127. 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 2 Superimpose Setting Tab Window For the ZM 300 series SE E iaa Animation Tab Window For the ZM 300 series only Wallpaper Setting Tab Window For the ZM 300 series only ona a na ano nanona aen Dis play Environment SENO id o O Display Environment Dialog 0 cece cece ce cece cece cece an ce ceeeenae ce eeanenaeeaee AA Betah a VV lee EE Menu Dsp Tab WIndw 20 cc cece cece ce cece ce cece cece ee ce ae ca rn cece ae ee ae ea aran cnn renere ene nn erene SHA Tab WING OW a ae tents E eet te enh eeu tA eaten Others Tab Window 0 0 ccc ccc cece cece ce ce cece ce cece cae ae ca cece nunun cece ae eee ae seen cena marnan Parts Placement and Setting Color Types and Settings y A ae css ee I a ee Kegel e editing it Overlap EE Sal MUI O VE a dad VIGGO DIS arta dd As SA A oe a er eee ne ate ce re ee Data Display EE Numerical Data and Character DE Message Display Table Data Display Part Property Change for One Data Cell Property Change for Multiple Data Cells EE A Change of Cell Height and Cell Wd Right Click Menu Relay Relay Sub and Message Modes Entry Mode and Data Block Area Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter and Closed Area SEENEN IAE ene ee enero ea et a a a ee Trend Graph Graphic Mode and SE Relay Mode A OS Eime DIS DAY errana an E Secs neat wished ste aaa Calendar Display it ete ied aces ci
128. 2006 LAMP T CER be Ee al LAMP 0012011 LAMP J gt oek e 0012012 LAMP 0012013 LAMP 0012014 LAMP 0012015 LAMP 0012016 LAMP 0012017 LAMP 0012020 LAMP 0012021 LAMP 0012022 LAMP 0012023 LAMP 0012024 LAMP d 0012025 LAMP d 0012026 LAMP 9012027 LAMP e BABILONIA ROLAT 1 6126 1260 ilog 1iz00z2jo0 120053001200400 1200500 1200600 120070012016 inches Screen 0 Edit Division No PAC Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71 SE Editor Incrementing or Decrementing Memory Values It is possible to increment or decrement numerical values of word memory by setting the memory counter Setting Method 1 Toset the memory counter double click on the current memory value The Write Memory dialog is displayed If you right click on the memory that will be setas a timer counter a menu is displayed From there itis possible to display a dialog by clicking on Change Setting Value The same dialog can be displayed by going to the tool bar and clicking on the Setting Value icon 2 Check the O Use Memory Counter box The memory counter setting items become active 3 Make the desired entries for Increment Value and Interval Time An increment value from 1000 to 1000 can be entered An interval time from 1 to 300 can be entered 4 When the O Specify the Range box is checked it is possible to set the upper and lower limits
129. 315 BIN Grouping Start gt gt gt gt Box Paint 15 95 1 70 140 Box Paint 15 97 170 136 Box Paint 15 98 1 70 135 Box Paint J 15 99 1 70 134 Box Paint 15 101 170 132 Box Paint 15 102 170 131 Box Paint 15 104 170 131 Box Paint1 151061 1170127 1 28 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Changing the Display Format 1 Click the Display menu The menu as shown on the rightis Display Tool window dis p ayed wi By Registration By Division i e 3 By Graphic 2 The following display formats are available GER By Selection By Registration The items are displayed in the order in which items are placed By Division The items are displayed in ascending order of division numbers By Graphic Only graphic items are displayed By Function The following dialog is displayed Select Type by Function 3 x Overlap C Graphic Sampling Display Area C Switch C Graphic Relay Memo Pad C Lamp C Data Sampling C Simple Data Display Num C Relay C Bit Sampling C Simple Data Display Char C Relay sub O Macro C Simple Data Display Message C Message Memory Card Interval Timer C Entry Calendar Closed Area Graph Data Block Area C Num Display Table Data Display C Graph Char Display C Alarm Display C Stat Graph Message Disp Time Display Trend Graph Display Area ZA Only the items of the selected function are displayed By Selection The items selecte
130. 4 al 1f 2 3 Data5 1234 o fcr cr An offset position can be changed with ease 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Check O Base Screen Dsp Selection from Screen and Multi Overlap LIB is made possible 3 Select either one and specify the desired number 4 Click OK The selected screen is placed behind the data block Background Color Setting It is possible to change the background color of a data block When a data block is called its background setting is ignored and thus only the registered data is recognized as a target 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Open the Menu Dsp tab window 3 Select the desired background color and click OK The data block is shown on the background colored as specified 4 27 Chapter4 Registration Items Message It is possible to register user s desired texts in the message editing area Texts for the relay mode message mode bit sampling alarm display parts that will vary according to the circumstances are registered in this area and can be displayed by the message display function Message Structure The message editing area is divided into 24 groups each of which can contain 256 message lines Therefore you can register a maximum of 6 144 lines Message Group No 0 Group No 1 Group No 2 Group No 23
131. 4 Hardware specification s No 5 Inputpower AC 85 235 No 6 Displaycolor 16 colors Block No 0 No 7 Displayarea 640 X 480 dots No 8 FUNC switch 8 pcs No 9 Switch H24 X W40 RS232C RS4 22 AC 85 235 No 21 Printerport 1 port No 22 Comm port RS232C RS4 22 A maximum of 1 024 blocks can be registered 4 65 Chapter4 Registration Items Calling a Direct Block Select Direct Block from the Item menu The Direct Block Block Specify dialog is displayed Wen System Setting Screen Graphic Library Mult O verlap Data Block Message Direct Block Block Specify Fa Pattern re Ce 0 99 400 499 900 899 Macro Block Page Black Cc 100 199 500 599 900 999 IE e C 200299 C 600 699 1000 1023 Screen Block 300 399 C 700 799 Tile Ex Char 16 Cancel Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Multilanguage Animation Check the desired block number range and click OK The Direct Block Edit window is displayed Direct Block Editing 4 66 Follow the procedure below 1 Click the block No O line indicating No Setting El 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Direct Block Edit Block No 0 99 File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window Os alaomw S 0 21 14 95 3 me a Th ES 3 SE D IS g 4 M 6 i e Sia na A oS ao O0 GEODE To im IE fe Block No No Sett
132. 5 d Chapter4 Registration Items Animation Editing In the Animation dialog the number of frames and an animation speed are set and the actual animated image can be checked Follow the procedure below 1 Right click Animation and click Ada 2 The Animation VIEW dialog is displayed Start setting from animation No 0 File Edit Display ltem System Animation VIEW O ta ll G SIM a x EE Animation Ne A Iv Use De amp m Bgg Hee ep Start Frame No jo End Frame Na 0 See gt De H MIE TEST PLAY PAUSE STOP Repeatedly playback Delete Bpen krame Ease krame forrest i Cancel Animation No 0 1 023 An animation number currently being edited is displayed To goto a different animation number for editing click the arrow buttons or key in the desired number directly Y Use A check mark for this option denotes thatthe animation number has been set To cancel the setting uncheck the box Start Frame No and End Frame No 0 1 022 Specify the number range of frames to be used for this animation Seconds to Replay x100 msec Specify a speed to change the frames specified for Start Frame No and End Frame No during animation TEST After frames are selected their animation can be checked IA For more information see Chapter 17 Animation in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual
133. 9200 8 4 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor L UNIPLC20 This is a type of I F driver used when a personal computer and the ZM series communicate using the Simulator The file named UNIPLC20 TPB is automatically transferred Connecting a Personal Computer with the ZM Series Connect the ZM series to a computer using the data transfer cable ZM 80C On the ZM series side use MJ1 modular jack 1 On the ZM 71SE editor select Modular Jack 1 Editor Port in the Modular Jack dialog selected from the System Setting menu Computer 2M seres ZM 80C Ener ess D sub 9pin Modular 8pin Modular Jack 1 Editor Port in the Modular Jack dialog under System Setting L It is possible to use the Simulator only when ZM series and PLC are 1 1 connection It Xx is impossible to use the Simulator when ZM series and PLC are 1 n orn 1 connection H 3 CG v O 8 5 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Starting up and Closing Starting Up the Simulator from ZM 71SE 1 Use ZM 71SE to open the screen data file that will be tested with the Simulator 2 Click the Start Simulator icon or go to the File menu and click on Start Simulator The simulator will start with the SIM files which are automatically displayed El 27M Editor for Windows ersion 2 1 Eile Edit Display Draw Part Item Li New Chr EH Open E Save
134. A CLL WERT T 2 ES O AO AAA L ee CLL DIT AE CS lL PA A ERR RS RR CELIT AAA ATT MAA AAA AAA AAA Pallette Y Pallette 2 Pallette al Create Color gt gt Clear Create Color gt gt Clear Create Color gt gt Clear Cancel OF Cancel UK Cancel Pallet 1 Pallet 2 Pallet 3 Pallette 1 GE Pallette 1 Palete 2 Palette 3D 2 58 Chapter2 Screens Create Color Clicking this button brings up the following dialog A SS TT es ToT Ga TT _ Ss BERR S LTT TT IO SESE PELI Let EEL Ley O LLL TE TELE o O Pallette d Pallette 2 Pallette al y OK Cancel D Ss g Q D gt o O D gt EL TC Q S T CTT TTT a 0 IT WERT TTT CECTTT TTT TT WS B 248 04F8 _ BS Se EEC IE G 2481048 3 COCINA CINNT B 248 0xF8 Pallette 1 Pallette 2 Pallette d i Clear Select In this dialog a maximum of 32 colors in addition to the provided three pallets can be registered as desired with the steps below 1 Inthe dialog displayed by the Create Color button click anywhere within the provided color area The color of the clicked point appears in the top right box Repeat clicking or move the scroll bars until the color in the box becomes your desired color Click around this point The colorofthe clicked point appears R 136 0x88 c je G 216 0xD8 f B 0 0x00 Create Color lt lt Clear Sele
135. A calendar display can be set on a data sheet using a numerical data display The calendar data is stored in system memory addresses s160 to 166 By placing the calendar data with numerical data display on a data sheet the calendar is also printed out at the time of data sheet printing Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Sheet Environment Setting Display Environment On data sheets graphics texts and data display parts can be placed based on the fixed grids Texts and data displays are placed along grid dots Lines and boxes are placed on spaces between grid dots A grid color and whether or not to show grids can be selected in the Display Environment dialog Display Environmet E x Grid Color B P Se Language Display fi Cancel U D er Di SE D D O Grid Dsp Check this option to display grids Grid Color Select a color of the displayed grids Language Display This option is active only when the language selection function is in use IT For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Memory Display Use this command when checking the memory addresses allocated to the placed numerical data or character displays Select Memory Display from the Display menu The memory addresses are displayed Display Draw ltem System Setting Tool Bar d Iw Status Bar Jump Preview E Next ti Skip EH screen List ltem List Gri
136. A tates eect ate eee E E IR ele Overlap WEE Useful Operations Creating a New SIM File sage a Shoreut A Incrementing or Decrementing Memory Values n n anneanne nene nene sere nete te nete coro ree ree ns Setting Method Use Method ies Testing eee Mode athe a CSV File Conditions for a a Notes on Creating a CSV File no cncn ar nr cn neern nn CSV File Setting Example oo went ee a nt hee Read PROCCCIUNG uta A E N E S ET EE ie ICONS EEN Fie MENU EE EE Ed UNE Commu unicaton Mon EE View Menu Screen Number e EECH Display EE la AA A A AS FED EE A pipe erg ete eee eee eer tree emer ere cre eerie Pe cme ner tee ern One ene eer ee Oe rete ee ZM MDD Transfer Utility ooo ge needa adds AAA E EE Ee erneiere DE Operavon ell ZMEMBDOTranster UI o Ee eat Starting Closing EN ZM MDD Vater Utility Dialog Chapter9 Wizard e POE CO Opening the Wizard Dalog ccc ccc cccccee cease ecnececneceeneaeeeeeans Wizard Usage EXadMples E Radio Buton Crea das SEWING Procedu aeda nka ias Eror Bi E sa Seting Gelee EE Trend Graph Display E Setting Procedure EE Deleting Placed Parts Soen et NENNEN siii ir an Appendix 1 Fonts PESO a APP 1 1 FONS CIN a o e los is e Ee Available Fonts TEN A O O EnglishWestern EGODE Fonts E e E Chinese and Chinese EE APP1 3 Koreanen oa E R and HK TIMES EE APPA Outline sre E AE an E Points of English Western Etage HK Gothic HK Times Misuse eee
137. BEE 3 2 CUM a cia 3 1 drawing method bar graph Scale EN E cono EE ones 3 29 A eg 3 7 O a A 3 12 O peters stra ota ac apes catsa ecg eu eam ne 3 29 ut 3 5 A gaeheenesex 3 35 A o A 3 26 A O inoue e 3 23 pie graph Scale e see noore cues conan cons 3 31 Screen LIB cece cece cece cess cono sense cess conca coc 3 37 E GE 3 18 trend graph scale e nano EE nooo sees nooo 3 33 drawing tools graphic cal A nE 3 27 Screen Drawing dialog o ocooooo0ooom 3 2 SCIECIING COI Sian 3 3 Selecting line styles e cece cess KE sees cess seno es 3 4 SCIECIING TGS ama io 3 3 DACP MECO EG 7 17 E PEGI Met EE 1 12 1 22 1 35 as AA A ege 247 A A A et 1 2 OX TOME EEN 5 27 INDEX F file division and combination MS COMBINE Cuerda abit 7 42 A peace une ction lonipaemen eee 7 41 file management n cee cess ees cono cono conan sete cess eee ees 7 27 THES CODY eta A tat cali OSs 7 39 file deletion ee 7 40 Manageable files cee cece cess cocino coco cono anno coso 7 28 O e ER 7 27 porte 1 35 APP 3 36 screen data file oo cee cee cece cece cacon cess cents nono anes 7 28 Ile Ku LEE 1 11 1 42 ASTON eege 5 10 Nash NETON WEE APP2 8 PU E E AE EEEN E E E A A 1 39 Le a E R a a a e Cosine lt APP1 1 A a noe APP1 3 Chinese simplified 0 0 ee ee cece cess 0 oo ees APP1 3 English Western Europe cece cece conca oo APP1 3 available font n naas ooreo nane aanne nono cess oo AP P1 3 A oil ceo Seatet
138. C PROGRAM FILES Z3W Tpa dpprg mdd is selected Select the desired program file and click the Refer to button The Select Program File dialog is displayed Select the program to be transferred Send Turn the PLC power off and on Click the Send button The program is transferred When no program to be transferred is selected the Select Program File dialog is displayed Select the program in this dialog The communication status Connecting to ZM MDD Transferring the Data etc is shown in 2 During transfer a bar is shown in 3 When transfer has been completed Transfer Finished is displayed To cancel program transfer click the Cancel Send button When the ZM MDD Information or Send button is clicked again after communication with the ZM 1MD2 was performed the message Time Over for waiting Receiving is displayed Turn the PLC power off and on and try again zmmdd E xi AN Time Over For waiting Receiving eE Wizard A CN Opening the Wizard Dialog a neonne nanona 9 1 Wizard Usage Examples n senese senese e se nere H Radio Button Creation n se ccc cece cece cece cence nono nooo cate rene o 9 2 Enor DNS E 9 6 Trend Graph Display coco canon cono anno arre anes 9 11 Deleting Placed Hate 9 16 Chapter 9 Wizard Outline The wizard function is provided to aid you in setting for instance the entry mode or sampling mode which will be complicated
139. Choosing this command allows you to edit calendar parts e Display Area Choosing this command allows you to edit display area parts e Closed Area Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit closed area graph parts Item Menu e PLC Type Specify the PLC model for the screen data file when using a part file inthe screen data file e Edit Model Selection Specify the model of LCD Control Terminal for the screen data file when using a part file in the screen data file e Use Gothic Font Select this option when creating a part using the Gothic font APP3 40 Appendix 3 Part Editing Tool Menu e Open File for Reference This command is used when choosing Pattern or Graphic Call from the Draw menu in part editing Part files do not contain graphics or patterns However graphics or patterns exist in screen data files using part files Therefore it is possible to use graphics or patterns for creating parts Graphics or patterns in a screen data file can be referred to and used in the part edit window using the Open File for Reference command Click Open File for Reference and choose the desired screen data file Graphics in the selected screen data file can be called up when Graphic Call or Pattern is selected from the Draw menu in part editing Tool Window Open File for Reference 4 oi 3 m Q 5 O lt D 5 Open a screen data file 2 xi Look in E ZM300d
140. Chris Save 4s Property File Edit Display Bean Part Item System dei E Transfer EE Iw e Ed or e Send AT command ASS Bt SS On line Editing b Ea BR Qh a att ex Ondine Bun Printer Setting Print Ctrl P Present Window Printing Ctr Q CF Card Manager ZM Start Simulator File Managing Parts Edit 1Z m3715a 237 Starting Up the Simulator from Windows Menu 1 Click in the order of Start Programs Zm 71s and Simulator 2 The simulator initial screen is displayed ZM Simulator Eile view Communication Help Ds al ea ollo alla aa rus aaa Ejem e mwa se 8 6 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor L Or double click the simulator program icon to open a simulator file slew v i H Simulator Closing a Simulator File 1 Click Exit in the File menu of the Simulator or the Close button Eile wiew Communication Helg New Ctrl M Open Chrl 0 PLE Type EEN e Baud Rate or COM Port r pply zM data Memory Setting 2 Thefile is closed When the file has been modified a message as to whether the file is to be saved appears Starting and Stopping Communication Starting Communication with the ZM Series Click the Start Simulator icon or go to the File menu of the ZM 71SE editor and click on Start Simulator The communication is automatically started To confirm whether the communication is established or not check if
141. D 3 D gt Y 0 Environ ment setting Select Printer Setting from the File menu The Option Setting dialog is displayed Set printing environment data in the dialog Select and printthe data Select Print from the File menu The Print Setting dialog is displayed Choosethe desired data and start printing Page 6 2 Page 64 Chapter6 Print Option Setting Dialog Select Printer Setting from the File menu The Option Setting dialog containing the following options is displayed Option Setting xX F Table Print List Output Reverse Page Setting Left Maomdrmm 20 E Right Wlarginimm jo E Upper Margin nmn E Bottom Marginimm jo 4 Header ZM Editor Yer er Date Date Time Time Selected PLC FlcT ype lt FileCommert Fie Name lt FileMlame Footer D M PageNo Left Center 7 Right FontSize fio m Printer Setting Cancel The following setting items are included y Screen Output Screen images are printed O List Output Items set for the screen are printed O Table Print The table of screen images is printed When this option is checked the Screen Output and List Output options are not active O Reverse The screens are printed in reverse video Only the white and black portions are reversed O Monochrome If the printed screen data is difficult to see check this box Legibility may be improved 6 2 Chapter 6 Print Options
142. E Change over tab Click on a tab with the mouse The corresponding tab window of the dialog is displayed Numerical data field When setting or modifying numerical data click the upward downward arrow buttons Some data fields allow direct numeral entry through the keyboard Option button Select one option by clicking When the button changes to the option is selected Arrow to show the drop down list Clicking this arrow shows the drop down list Select the desired option Check box Click on the check box for the desired option The check box changes from Dto M checked When a box is checked it means that it is selected or Command button Command buttons include OK Yes No Cancel etc Clicking a button triggers the specified action Text field When the cursor is shown in a text field characters can be entered The dialog can be moved by pointing to the title section and dragging UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Setting up Memory Addresses When specifying a memory address in a dialog click the calculator button on the right of the entry field The Memory Input dialog is displayed The contents in the dialog vary depending on the PLC model and the selected type Common setting items are explained eer rl EH 1 When PLC Memory is selected Select this option when using the PLC memory Type Internal Mem
143. Ex Font This option is valid when the screen data contains the Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times font data The Gothic font data is divided into these three kinds 12 point data automatic font setting data and manual font setting data The automatic font setting data is handled as screen data The 12 point data is transferred as font data The manual font setting data is included in the expansion font data When any changes are made to the manual font settings in the screen data select this option and transfer the data However when Memory is selected for Transfer Device the expansion font data manual font setting data is also transferred as the screen data together with the automatic font setting data SRAM Data This option is valid when the ZM series uses an SRAM cassette or built in SRAM With this option setting data is backed up at the time of SRAM cassette battery change For more information see the ZM 300 User s Manual Station No Table When the temperature control network as well as a temperature controller model FUJI MPCO4P is used the station number table becomes available With the station number table in use this Station No Table option becomes valid When the screen data is transferred to the ZM series first the station number table is also transferred automatically It is not transferred automatically afterwards When any changes are made to the table trans
144. FG ABCDEFG ABCDEFG ABCDEFG ABCDEFG English Western Europe HK Gothic English Westem Europe HK Times The English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Western Europe HK Times fonts used for the ZM series are Sharp Corporation original fonts The English Western Europe HK Gothic and HK Times feature e The English Western Europe font creates a smooth typeface when the specified enlargement factors are even numbers however only a normal typeface is available when the factors are odd numbers With the English Western Europe HK Gothic or HK Times font a smooth typeface is created in any size English Western Europe font Enlargement factors odd 1x1 ABCDEFG e9 ABCDEF Enlargement factors even 2 x 2 ABC DE KG English Western Europe HK Gothic font 12 points ABCDEFG 20 points ABCDEFG 2 pans ABCDEFG ABCDEFG APP1 4 Appendix 1 Fonts e Inthe case of the English Western Europe font the minimum enlargement factors are X 1 and Y 1 When smaller characters should be displayed the 1 4 size must be selected With the English Western Europe HK Gothic or HK Times font the number of points is used to specify a character size in place of enlargement factors The minimum permissible number of points is eight A smoother typeface can be realized as a result English Westem Europe font lt po D o Q TI O 5 e gl Minimum size 1 4 ABCDEFS 1 x1 AECDEFG English Western Europe HK Gothic fon
145. For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 2 50 Chapter2 Screens Sampling Clicking a sampling icon brings up its tool bar as the following Pg ES le E A 1 2 3 4 5 Ti 8 x a O E El Quit OO AQ Maui Up down Sampling Delete switch display area Detail Count display Time display Count display Time display Trend sampling Up down switch 3 4 op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 Fe o gt a Q D er cr S ll A A 86 O H ak a O t Ha P Display area Quit identical to the relay mode Delete tool bar Detail Status display Up down switch Count display Time display A OH identical to the relay sub mode tool bar Clicking the Trend Sampling icon allows a trend sampling part placement To establish a link between a trend sampling part and other parts like switch or data display parts available with the part give the same division number to them For the sampling icons other than trend sampling their tool bars contain Detail icons respectively IT For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 10 Sampling in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 2 51 Chapter2 Screens Time Display Clicking the Time Display icon brings up the Time Display dialog
146. Function 3 When the dialog setting is concluded click the Close button The Animation window is displayed again 4 86 Chapter 4 Registration Items 4 Double click on the Animation folder The Animation sub folders as set in step 2 are displayed File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window Dor W nal 14 10 14 Im 6 n A IEEE A ASE wm b E A A PA Ep ELE Animations ERT Animation No 0000 1 49 Animation No 0001 To go back to the Animation VIEW dialog right click the desired folder Animation No xxxx and click Property 5 Double clicking a displayed folder Animation No xxxx brings up as many Frame folders as the number set in step 2 File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool wind D to bed ns amp oh BB Sj im 9 to OS Se ome dl RMS RSH a ao o ELE Animation El Animation No 0000 of Frame No 0000 of Frame No 0001 P Frame No 0002 E A 29 Frame No 0003 Sy Frame No 0004 B Frame No 0005 AY Frame Mo 0006 B Frame No 0007 23 Frame No 0008 gt gt 3 D cr O 5 O 3 O N lt Q9 O o O af D 0 O x O O F O 3 N on N U 4 87 Chapter4 Registration Items Frame Editing In the Animation window double click the desired Frame No xxxx under an Animation No xxxx folder The Frame Edit window is displayed File Edit Display ltem Sys eer ie m F zx
147. Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Test Line Box Circle Tert Faint Dot Foreground i M Esckoround E Paint Erame Ealar Frame iE ine ee SES EEE Select the draw type 3 15 Chapter3 Drawing Tools Drawing from the Diagonal Line 1 Select the left icon for the draw type Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Tent Line Box Circle Text Faint Dot e o 0 0 gt efe ell Foreground lx i 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type 3 Drag from the start point until the desired circle or ellipse is drawn O O Start point End point 4 When you stop dragging a line is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the elliptical arc or sector 5 Move the cursor clockwise portion to be erased or counter clockwise portion to be drawn along the elliptical arc or sector and click on the end point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the elliptical arc or sector Clockwise Ch Counter clockwise CQ 3 16 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Drawing from the Center 1 Select the right icon for the draw type Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Tent Line Box Circle Text Faint Dot SEEESS Foreground IN M 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type 3 Drag from the center to the desired radius O Start point End point
148. I er DI 4 DI gt a T Chapter5 Transfer Transfer Dialog L Setting the Transfer dialog is required for data transfer except for transfer to a a CF card When using a CF card CF card manager setting is required Select Transfer from the File menu or click the Transfer icon on the icon bar The Transfer dialog is displayed Transfer Device Transfer Data PA Display C Memory Screen Data C IF Driver o IT Use Simulator e RS e Font Data ead comments in data transfer e Temp PLC2 FP Allidata transter Ex Font T Transfer through Ethernet 0 0 0 0 SRAM Data C Station No Table Ladder comm pra C Modbus comm pra m MODEM Transfer Up date of System Detail Setting _ Display Select this option when the target source for transfer is a ZM series unit Device Select this option when the target source for transfer is a memory card TransferData Screen Data Screen data is transferred If the PLC model setting or font data is different between the screen data and the data stored in the ZM series the I F driver file or the font data is also transferred with the screen data I F Driver The I F driver file is transferred During screen data transfer to a new ZM senes unit the I F driver file is also transferred automatically Therefore this option is not necessary When the ZM seres already contains the I F driver file and it should be updated select this
149. KC e ha A aa Make all data cleared Cancel K Itis also possible to clear all the memory values by going to the E dit menu to Initialize Memory Starting up the Simulator from the ZM 71SE editor and automatically creating an SIM file e The PLC model setin screen data is displayed in the PLC Type tab window e The necessary words for Me mory Setting are set automatically based on the memory data used in screen data e Additionally if there is a change inthe memory used by screen data the setting value canbe corrected by going tothe File menu to Apply ZM Data Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Be careful when setting Memory Setting in the following cases When using EM expanded memory in OMRON s SYSMAC CV Follow the registration procedure below when using multiple banks EM o jo L Bank No L No of word To set bank number 0 as 100 words and bank number 1 as 150 words 1 Enter 02 for the bank number and 100 for the number of words 2 Then enter 1 for the bank number and 150 for the number of words The newly entered values will be displayed in place of the values entered in 1 To check and see if registration took place normally after you are finished making entries enter O and then 1 for the bank number and confirm that the corresponding word number for each is displayed When using F file register for each type of Sharp s
150. L FILLER Drag 35 36 38 SHAPES A 40 When the desired screen is not included on the Screen List window show the vertical scroll bar or click Jump from the Display menu and specify the desired screen number Display Item System Se Tool Bar gt iv Status Bar a x gt D No E El Cancel Latest Information Item List Items on the edit window can be checked on the item list Calling up the Item List Select Item list from the Tool menu The Item List wndow is displayed E Item List Screen 5 Registration Order 1 1 Display Draw Part Item System Set Screen Lib D 0 No 2 Tool Bar Screen Lib 0 0 No 1 V Status Bar Char 15 90 DEC Char 15 165 BCD Paya Char 205 165 ECD W SIGN bl Char 205 90 DEC Wy SIGN K Char 205 240 oct Char 15 240 HEX 3 screen fist Char 55 315 BIN E Grouping Start gt gt gt ay ae 8 Box Paint 15 95 170 140 SE Box Paint 15 97 170 136 Box Paint 15 98 170 135 Box Paint 15 99 170 134 Box Paint 15 101 170 132 Box Paint 15 102 170 131 Box Paint 15 104 170 131 Box Paint 15 106 170 127 Box Paint 15 107 1 70 126 Box Paint H 15 108 1 70 125 Box Paint 1 15 110 170 123 1 27 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Utili
151. M 71SE Editor Menu and Icons 8 28 Commands included in each menu correspond to the icons as shown below File Menu File Edit Communication view New Ctrl M Open Ciro Close Save Chri s Save As Read C5Y File Apple zM data SN AA Baud Rate COM Port Memory Setting Exit Edit Menu Edt Communication View Window Add 6 Insert 7 Undo Chez 4 Redo Ctrl 5 Cut Cla 1 Copy Ctrl C 2 Paste Lilou 3 Delete Del 8 Delete All 9 Select All Change Display Address 10 Change Setting Value 11 Display Type Setting Je ltem Setting 13 Comment Setting 14 Sort memory Initialize Memory Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Communication Menu Communication View w Stark End Click e Depressed Start Raised End Eann vatra View Menu View window Help ajae vw Standard Toolbar w Screen Toolbar w Status Bar Preview Next Overlap O Overlap 1 Overlap 2 Display Sheet d vw Display All pe an Display only word devices Display only bit devices Display each item 15 Type Display 16 lem Display 17 Comment Display 16 Lines 18 de Lines 19 wf 1024 lines 20 El ll e 17 18 19 20 Screen Number and Comment Display The comment registered during screen edit is displayed here O Ion weila IS When a screen is selected here the screen shown on 1 the ZM seri
152. MEE FT Screen 7 S IT Message EJ a E Pattern jo z l 1023 Graphic Library fo 0 E em Elle E Page Block 0 E 1023 E F Direct Block 0 E 1023 F Screen Block 0 1023 FP Macro Block 0 E 1023 I Data Block 0 E 1023 IT Multi Overlap T E 1023 a FP Data Sheet 0 1023 T Screen Library a 1023 E temp PLE Net Table il HAAD Format ical 128 al E MAA400 Format Register ES 128 Modbus Slave Table 0 D E I Animation 0 a 1023 al Option Setting Cancel The following setting items are included O System Setting See page 6 9 Click this option for printing the system setting data The tile list is also printed out O List of Memory Use See page 6 10 Memory use by screens and screen edit items is printed O Use Cross reference See page 6 10 Chapter 6 Print Memory addresses are printed to the following edit items e Message When messages are printed memory addresses used in relay mode are also printed e Graphic Library valid when M Screen Output is checked When graphic library is printed memory addresses used in graphic relay mode are also printed e Page direct and screen blocks When page direct or screen blocks are printed or when relay sub mode is used the corresponding memory addresses are also printed O Net Table Ethernet This option is valid when Ethernet is set Check the box when printing the network table for Ethernet O Net T
153. Message Edit Window The following window is displayed E 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 Z2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Message 0 Edit Balz File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window Help Ose lama ix 2 9 oF z MIER ee LT ee ee EE LEEA A Eei oa a m a Bie o 8 oe eer J In OFF a E 4 30 Chapter 4 Registration Items Message Editing Messages are entered in the same way as characters in graphics E To shift to the next group click the Next icon on the icon bar Copying and Pasting Messages 1 Specify messages as the copy source by dragging the mouse The messages are highlighted File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window Dako 3 1x0 FP 0 14 gt El E A A EE Mile SE wel b RBS SSH Ati SY OOP lt OD CO ge Q Q D B Message 0 Edit error v To select all messages in the group select Select All from the right click menu 4 31 Chapter4 Registration Items 2 Select Copy from the Edit menu or the right click menu or click the Copy icon on the edit tool bar The messages are copied to the Windows clipboard File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window OSA oa S 015 0 4 SCC Si E IEEE SUR SA b Ea KAS Nao ew YO B Message 0 Edit Delete Select All 3 Move the cursor to the copy target position Select Paste from the Edit menu or the right click menu or click t
154. Message No O AAAAAAAAAAAAA No 0 Message No 1 BBBBBBBBBBBBB No 1 No 0 No 0 No 1 No 1 Message No 255 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No 255 No 255 No 255 The maximum permissible number of characters per line depends on the number of displayed dots specified for the ZM No of displayed dots Max number of characters 1 byte ora ooo 4 28 Chapter 4 Registration Items Each message is given a group address message group number and line number as well as an absolute address line number only Ordinary addresses groups Absolute addresses Group No Message No Message No 0000 to 0255 None 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0256 to 0511 0000 to 0255 0512 to 0767 0000 to 0255 0768 to 1023 0000 to 0255 1024 to 1279 al lt OD CO ge Q Q D 4096 to 4351 4352 to 4607 4608 to 4863 4864 to 5119 5120 to 5375 5376 to 5631 5632 to 5887 5888 to 6143 af A o O NIO 20 21 22 3 2 4 29 Chapter4 Registration Items Calling a Message Select Message from the Item menu The Message dialog is displayed Specify the message group number to be opened and click OK ltem System Setting J Screen Graphic Library Multi O verlap Message Ed Data Block a El Message gt No E ra cra atter Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library MultiCanguages Animation
155. N Information about Sharp programmable controller is available at our internet homepage http sharp world com sms OJUMANUALZ7E2 2 0v 1 2003 Printed in Japan 0 11 Y Y
156. No 0 1 1 4n4 4nU 1 y JT Indirect EE z 4 5 6 C D e lel slate p 3 olf fen Cancel Refer Chapter1 Basic Operation 2 When Internal Mem is selected Select this option when using the internal memory of LCD control terminal For more information see Appendix 1 Internal Memory in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Memory Input Internal Mem 3 x Type UNE E mio e e e E ry ekee 3 Aale O Indirect This option is available with memory setting when macro commands are used For more information see Chapter 13 Macro in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 3 When Memory Card is selected Select this option when using the memory card as the memory For more information see Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Memory Input Memory Card a x Type PLC Memory y 0010 Internal Mem E ou GEGEE File No 0 tf 2 s a a Record No O al Jafer File No Record No Set these numbers when Memory Card is selected For more information on the memory card see Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 1 20 Chapter 1 Basic Operation 4 When Constant is selected Select this option when specifying a constant instead of a memory address Depending on the item this option may not be sele
157. No 3 No 4 Pattern No o No 2 No 3 Sod Y 4 13 Chapter4 Registration Items 4 Paint start point The start point coordinates can be changed by a command from memory specified with a parameter In this case only REP is available therefore the previous paint ex circle remains o Ave hs Data Display Outline of Data Display in Graphic Library In the graphic library it is possible to use a function similar to data display parts as used onthe screen The usage is as follows e Showing deleting a data display through bit setting ON resetting OFF Bit OFF Bit ON al gt 3426 e Moving a data display on the screen 3426 3426 ee gt 6243 4 14 Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Display Setting Procedure 1 Goto the drawing tool bar and click the Data Display icon The Graphic Library Drawing dialog is displayed D HEC EE Ade E ag DEF d Graphic Library Drawing Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale DatalMain DatajChar Prop Mun Text 1 word 1 byte M Zero Suppress 2byte Digit F Decimal Point jo O a E eae y E Spacing P Parameter f A CH 5 Display Type DEC EEES O Ge byte E o Q lt Style gt gt Input Type per Data Length 1w A For the description ofthe Data Main tab window see the following page For the Data Char Prop tab window see page 4 16 2 W
158. O Display Function Specifications e APP1 6 Setting Procedure O E Ee Font Type Setting ee NEE ree Font Setting for individual Functions ee EE e Manual Font SCG eean de e ds ARA Automate Font osa a a APP IAT WICH Blees Data Transfer to the ZM Gees e ARTI Notes on Font Data to be Transierred e APP1 14 Error for the ZM series ooocococonociconocicnnecicnnoconnneconnnocnon APP1 14 Appendix2 3D Parts SR APP2 1 EE SENOS sr Eeer Ae Notes On US ad Sucios bi tra lil AZ ANUS O A EE e Memory Capacitan lo A Limitation on Parts PlaceMent oococonccococcnncinnconoconononocn cono cn AHH Seting Procedures cia EE Switch and Lamp e EE cece ee ce cece EE EE EE EE EE AE EE A un APP2 3 Flash Function E E a Setting ZEN al re Eo Switch Lamp ZM 421 to o 82 Conab eTe EES EE EE Ech Numerical Data Display Character Display Mbs Display Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter Statistic id Closed Area een and Calendar Parts EE EE Oe With the eelere lb Notes ON US e E PANS na Ee Memory Capacitan o AP ee Color Pallet Wees Be ee EE ee EE Limitation on Parts gene E NK Setting S A APP2 18 With ZM 42 to 82 Series Notes on Usage Applicable ZM 421 to 82 Series ee A en Crea eet Memory Capacity toc a ee PAG FIE a treat ete eae EL eee ee ee eer ee ee ere re ae ere CUS TO IZ e EE Kaes eg Pans sds ts Ada Seting Gelee TEE Notes ON USAGC EE Appendix 3 Part Editing o E EECHELEN eat Modifying Parts In Screen
159. O o 5 O lt OD Fe gt O o 0 4 When you stop dragging a line is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the elliptical arc or sector 5 Move the cursor clockwise portion to be erased or counter clockwise portion to be drawn along the elliptical arc or sector and click on the end point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the elliptical arc or sector Clockwise Ch Counter clockwise Ca 3 17 Chapter3 Drawing Tools Text Clicking the Text icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Text Faint Clot Enlarge E Enlarge E Foreground Background WE Rotate Direction Text Field Text can be entered when the cursor is flashing in the text field If the cursor is not flashing in the text field click the mouse on the text field Number of Characters Available The maximum permissible number of characters per line depends on the number of displayed dots No of displayed dots Max number of characters 1 byte uo ooo Text Entry Check that the cursor is flashing in the text field and enter characters using the keyboard Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Text Faint Dot controll Enlarge x E w Jee Enlarge Y WE E We Text File Me Rotate No
160. O Dither The option is valid when an option other than 32K is selected for Color Type for Convert When O Dither is checked middle tones are corrected Dithering is performed to make the colors of the bitmap closer to the original S O Pseudo Gradation When this option is checked pseudo gradation is used When the Detail gt gt button is clicked the detail setting is possible The following items are included D Free 0001 7253 bmp E Eo xx Reduction of colors Lancel E Adaptive Error Diffusion Eror Diffusion 2 Dither Nothing Corwert Diffusion 0 E Redraw Color E E 186 278 Green E E 24bit a Pseudo Gradatior Ordered Dithenng Color Type for Convert Pos i J C 128 en 7 15 Chapter7 Useful Techniques When O Use 3D Parts is checked in the Environment Setting tab window of the Unit Setting dialog with the ZM 42 to 82 series this option and O Dither cannot be selected The M Pseudo Gradation display is automatically selected YE Adaptive Error Diffusion Error diffusion adapted to each individual part of the image can be performed This function places emphasis on smoothness of image more than the following Error Diffusion does Error Diffusion Ifa color of the source image is not included in the color pallet two bits in similar colors are placed alternately so as to reproduce the color Nothing A pallet similar to the s
161. Option field in the Select Environment dialog Only in the Current Division A division number can be specified for selecting parts When this option is checked the selection is valid for parts having the same division number as the current division Point Search Icon A graphic item can be snapped to a different graphic item with ease during drawing or screen editing This icon is useful in creating screens containing complicated graphics Ex Connecting a continuous line to a straight line on a screen 1 Click the Point Search icon depressed 2 Click a part of the continuous line closest to the straight line and drag The handle closest to the straight line turns green Drag around this point The closest handle turns green gt SIL Line Continuous line 3 While dragging the continuous line to the straight line the green handle is snapped to the straight line automatically e 1 1 D 1 Leg 3 eg 1 D 1 1 dE 1 Snapped automatically 1 41 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter 1 Basic Operation Screen Data File Property Clicking Property in the File menu brings up the following dialog x File Information Memory Use Environment PLC Type File Name F 1ZM30DdataZm3715a 237 File Comment Text Data Change Password File Information Tab Window PLC Type The PLC model set for the screen data file is dis
162. P3 29 E Reese nee Ee ee gee Serer nee APP3 9 PV CRU EE AAP P3 38 NO rics cee Ge nae eeu a ceanestion decks EERE APP3 1 OVEN WEE APP3 7 panel Meter e EN cono rerne AP P3 22 DIS e Te E AP P3 19 Statistic graph bar AP P3 23 statistic graph pel AP P3 24 SWITCH ANC lamp eek coco cece cono conca cono cono ees APP3 9 SE ere APP3 12 creating ON display aesae aaee eee AP P3 12 TRANG asses fe ee AAP P3 12 KEYPA EE AP P3 15 part frame seim AP P3 12 switch area Setting nese enee aeee co AP P3 11 SWECO ONO AA i AP P3 13 Mnd OP ADM BEEN AP P3 24 trend sampling E cono esee seen sees AP P3 24 part file creating procedure e cee erres cono esre ees APP3 4 creation and Storage cece cece cess seee rese oo APP3 4 A E AP P3 34 Parent nar aos 1 15 D parts o dene land ence ovina E T 2 26 enlargement reductiON cece cece aeeie eee sete nos 2 27 notes on parts placement s eee cece eee comen os 2 18 placement cs Ee 2 25 animalo BEE 2 55 bar graph pie graph ccc cece cece nesse noo 2 48 calendar display ue sees cscs coo sees nooo 2 52 data block area e cece coco sates nooo sents nooo 2 47 data displasia door 2 40 eny MOUS ii cabid s 2 47 graphic mode and graphic relay mode 2 50 interval timer e A conan cons 2 54 JP EG ASP ascii 2 56 Macoris E e os 2 54 MEMO Pad EE 2 54 Memo Can carita ic 2 55 message mode e cono conan cono seen ees 2 46 A A E EE T EN 2 34
163. PLC Follow the registration procedure below when using multiple files F kblo L File No L No of word To set file No 1 as 100 words and file No 2 as 150 words 1 For file No 1 enter 100 forthe number of words 2 Then for file No 2 enter 150 forthe number of words The newly entered values will be displayed in place of the values entered in 1 To check and see if registration took place normally after you are finished making entries enter 1 and 2 for the file number and confirm that the corresponding word number for each is displayed When using W user file fortwo types of FUJI s MICREX F Follow the registration procedure below when using multiple user files w olo L File No L_ No of word Hi 3 CG a O Q To set file No 30 as 100 words and file No 31 as 150 words 1 For file No 30 enter 100 for the number of words 2 Then forfile No 31 enter 150 forthe number of words The newly entered values will be displayed in place of the values enteredin 1 To check and see if registration took place normally after you are finished making entries enter 30 and 31 for the file number and confirm that the corresponding word number for each is displayed Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor About SIM Files An SIM file is a memory file used to read and write PLC memory on the Simulator screen Timing of Creating or Updating SIM File Automatic
164. Part from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Open The Select Custom Parts File dialog is displayed Choose a file and click Open The Custom Part window is displayed Select Tile from the Window menu The Custom Part window and the screen edit window are tiled Drag the desired custom part from the Custom Part window to the screen edit wndow File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window de DAA 5 sn 01 D 14 4 FE PEA SEE EA OA BW ei A CH te o CO E E MERA E LE OMS 2 i eae BE Drag and place Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 12 Tray Parts or graphics can be stored in 15 trays These parts or graphics can be used in different screen data files Since the trays are registered in the environment file Zm71e try they can be used any time until the file is deleted Operation Procedure Registration Deletio n in from Trays 1 Ina screen edit window choose a part or graphic to be registered in a tray and copy it 2 Select Tray from the Tool menu The Tray Icon Display window is displayed 3 Paste the copied part or graphic to the tray window The copied item is reduced to an icon and displayed in the window gm ray lcon Display Tray 0 y Tile the screen edit window and the tray icon display window Hold down the CTRL key and drag the chosen item to the tray window The item can also be registered in this m
165. Q lt e Specifying a number Valid for patterns and graphic call Specify a registered pattern number or a graphic number in the graphic library directly ratem Naa No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 a e 4 S 1 D D A e gt eet E When 3 is specified under Absolute Input pattern No 3 is displayed 4 9 Chapter4 Registration Items Incremental Input When changing a graphic specify incremental coordinates in the plus direction e Specifying coordinates Based on a graphic position regarded as 0 0 specifying a positive coordinate value in memory moves it in the plus direction and specifying a negative coordinate value moves it in the minus direction When 300 200 is specified under Plus direction Incre mental Input the graphic is moved 44 AAA as shown below from the initial position Initial position Plus direction e Specifying a number Valid for patterns and graphic call Based on a placed pattern or graphic number regarded as 0 specifying a positive value in memory calls a pattern or a graphic of a greater number and specifying a negative value calls a pattern or a graphic of a smaller number 3 Pattern No 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 2 D 7 o H D H H D DH DH DH l D e y El D E 7 When 3 is specified under Incremental Input with pattern No 3 placed on the screen pattern No 6 is cale
166. So ES E SS e me a Animation 2 1 Animation No 0000 B Frame No 0000 Dj Frame No 0001 339 Frame No 0002 Animation No 0001 Dj Frame No 0003 33 Frame No 0004 33 Frame No 0005 Dy Frame No 0006 Dj Frame No 0007 Dy Frame No 0008 ER E ZM Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 Z2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Frame 3 Edit 0 x File Edit Display Transform Draw Item System Setting Tool Window Help DORA ama ix 0 17 0 1 FH m e t m H GES i RW a o E kwy e e EE li lE AR Meno a E lt El T EEEE T CEE L Frame 3 Edit Pattern Drawing Pattern Text Foreground ET IMAN Ke I Paint Background WITT RRE KE IM Frame FABIEIDOOOO Transparent color Frame Structure A maximum of 1 023 frames from No Oto No 1 022 can be registered The maximum capacity per frame is 128 kB The maximum permissible number of dots is the same as the number specified for the edit model 800 x 600 dots or 640 x 480 dots Frame Editing Frames can be edited in the same manner as for patterns Refer to the description of pattern editing page 4 37 4 88 ET Transfer Before Using the ZM Gees e 9 Preliminary Ste ps a ccc cess sanne coco conan cono seare ono anno teree sene me 5 1 Screen Data CHECK cononnnon cono cono rense conos 5 2 Screen Data Transfer A DD Ge ln AMES ontario ear in 5 3 Data Transfer Methods
167. Square Select Area Usage EE Transforming Pater E Bitmap IMportand ge Tee EE Importing a BIN AD Fil sess aa a een ca a eee es Dialog for Bitmap Import Stoning na Bitmap iS is e icc ween ct Caters teeta a Se cece Pattern Environment Setting EE IR Play Eer nt EE Background Sol a tes Placing a Pattern OPEET Size of a Placed Pattern Macro BOCK EE Macro Blocks le D EE d Hee ER Macro d le Macro Eeer ae EE Usel EE IS 3st eS Sa oe edo EE Copying LINGS soniri Pm eee de e eer ere Dele tng ines ud acia Page leie dto Fage BIOCK STUCIUTG tetas electra Aa ec eaten See a oie deas iol ca cdeaaee ite calling a Page le EE Page Block Editing Copying and Pasting lt or Deleting Page leen atente rare ear One Time Setting of Multiple BlOCKS oocococicoconococncoconcnnconocnnnconocnon con cnn no os Bit ere le ei Direc BIOG e Gallingia Dirge C BIO eege ee eebe Direct Block Editing Copying and Paenga or Deleting Direct Blocks A SA Sree BIOCK ira ra Screen Block Structure EE Calling a Screen Block o o o eee ees Screen Block Editing ee Screen Block Edit Window Setting Tie STUC e A a E ce te He CMA EE EAS CCT EEN Data SOS er EE EE Gallhig a Dala EE ee Data Sheet Editing Beete Drawing Tools for Data Sheet Line EENEG IBOX Be DEE MK Oe Data Dis playl ICOM EE Data Sheet Environment Setting EE Display ENVIO Messina A a cee neuavuaiiten teas Memory DIS play EEN
168. Switch List E Program Files ZM715 PARTS Parts_e zZ3P x 0000 0001 Select no FRAME TYPE 1 TYPE 2 Cancel 0004 0005 al TYPE 3 AR EA 0006 0007 0008 R2 R2 R2 4 The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Select a parts file 3Dfront z3p or 3Dside z3p Display Pattern Select parts file ax Look in lt 9 PARTS sl e ex ES LJ Parts3D a 3Dnow_P4 23P ae BDside_128 23P a ZMTest 23 Lise ja 3Dnow_P5 23P 8 3DStd Z3P fla 30front z3P Y a 3Dnow_P6 23P fa Parts_e 23P wa 3DFront_128 23P al 3Dnow_P7 Z3P al Parts_ 128 23P ls 3Dnow_P2 23P fa 3Dnow Pa z3P_ se Std Z3P laa 3Dnow_P3 23P aa 3Dside 23P laa Std_128 23P DH File name Ev Files of type Z3P e Cancel APP2 11 O U U o d Appendix2 3D Parts 5 3D parts are displayed in the Switch List window Switch List E Program Files ZM715 PARTS 3Dfront 23P x 0000 0001 Select RePopSw b RePopSw g RePopSw o Cancel 0004 0005 ed LA gt mm RePopSwp p RePopSwr RePopSww Wy 0006 0007 0008 RSR RePopsw y RePopsw y y JUMP lt P These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part Display Pattern This setting is active only when a switch or lamp part is selected The
169. T ZM 43D ZM 43L ZM 42HD Blinking 16 colors only 16 colors only 16 colors only 16 colors only O el O 3 lt pS Y 0 D 5 o ep 5 O 0 16 colors only 16 colors only 16 colors only 16 colors only ECH 16 colors only AA 16 colors only WEE 16 colors only MA 16 colors only E 4 16 colors only ME 16 colors only od 16 colors x x 8 gradation 8 colors x 8 gradation 8 colors 16 colors only x 2 colors 2 colors x x x x x x x x x x x x x a a a EC a a Available x Unavailable Not applicable Color setting procedure varies with the color types Refer to the following pages for more information 2 57 Chapter2 Screens 32 000 color Type The color pallet shows the basic 16 colors as default When selecting a color other than the sixteen click the far right button W on the pallet The following dialog is displayed WEI CAM T WEI REITTT TTT Liat T1111 T WR _ Le _ SS WITT PRETT reg Ei Dees AA AA PEEL PELEA Pallette 1 Pallette 2 Pallette al Create Color gt gt Clear Cancel Pallet 1 Shows the 128 color pallet for the ZM 52 to 82 series Pallet 2 Shows the 3D parts color pallet for the ZM 42 to 82 series Pallet 3 Shows the default color pallet 128 color type only for the ZM 300 series MAT AA AO O AAA AE CIO 1 CAMA COM l T O TWEET RH l WIR COLL T DEST TTT hl WITT
170. Text Foreground IN BEH UJ Pairi Background x H las ESOU AT Foreground Select a color to be displayed by clicking or dragging Background Select a color to be displayed by right clicking or right dragging Pen Select a dot size for the pencil command O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Pencil Command Usage 1 Selecta foreground color background color and dot size Pen 2 In the Pattern Edit window draw a graphic by clicking or dragging the mouse It is drawn with the specified size pen in the color for Foreground Y DS rag 4 38 Chapter 4 Registration Items 3 To draw in the color for Background right click or right drag the mouse Right drag Eraser Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pattern Drawing Pattern Text 0 Foreground E rant D Background Me Fame gt ESOU AT Pen Select a dot size for the eraser command O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent
171. UO DI er DI 4 DI gt a T 3 If transferring the screen data to the ZM series is allowed click Yes Online editing is started after the data is transferred 4 After online editing is started the ON line RUN icon on the icon bar and On line Run in the File menu and the right click menu become active Fie Edit Display Draw Part ltem System Se gt Undo Ctrl Z O New Ctrl N E rai 5 Open SL Cut E fel Save Ctrl S Ea Copy Eu Save As SEET Se File Edit Display Draw Part ltem System Setting Tool E GE Ae WEEE Property Osa Ki IM Ce H Z A ON Grid iranse TR ME irene meh KEEB Mg Grid Display Ba EAr e aa o co A Grid Type Send AT command inline dina SY On line Run SST Ed V Base Printer Setting Bebe Ee Print Baler Overlap Present Window Eining fot Hy Uusteg 2 Hide overlaps with Base checked Bhange All 5 When the current screen or window is switched to another during online editing the changed data is automatically transferred from the computer to the ZM series 6 Aside from the automatic transfer mentioned above you can transfer changed data by clicking the ON line RUN icon or selecting On line Run from the File menu or the right click menu 9 31 Chapter5 Transfer Escaping from Online Editing When escaping from online editing and going back to normal editing the procedure is the same as used
172. Version 2 0 Produced in Jan 2003 LCD Control Terminal Model name Screen edit software Z M 71 SE Instruction Manual Operation version Thank you for purchasing the screen edit software ZM 71SE for Control Terminal ZM 300 42 43 52 72 82 series This manual leads you to understand the outline and the functions and to master it effectly by making each example of each chapter Read this manual thoroughly to completely familiarize yourself with the operation according to the examples Therefore about the operation of ZM 71SE see ZM 71SE Instruction Manual operation version About software version This manual is describes the version 2 0 0 0 of ZM 71SE In this manual the module name of Control Terminal is expressed as follows Expression in this manual Series name Model name of LCD control terminal ZM 350 ZM 352D ZM 360 ZM 362S ZM 362SA ZM 371T ZM 371TA ZM 371S ZM 371SA ZM 300 7 370 ZM 372T ZM 372TA ZM 372S ZM 372SA ZM 381S ZM 381SA ZM 380 ZM 3825 ZM 3825A ZM 42 ZM 42D ZM 42L ZM 43 ZM 43T ZM 43D ZM 43L ZM 52 ZM 52D ZM 52HD ZM 62 ZM 62E IM 72 ZM 721 1C TV TVC ZM 72TS TSC TSV TSVC ZM 72D DC ZM 82T TC TV TVC ZM 82DC ZM 70D ZM 70TZM 41D ZM 41L ZM 41D ZM 41L ZM 30E ZM 30L ZM 61E ZM 61T ZM 40D ZM 40L This module is made in accordance with Japanese domestic specifications lts guarantee clauses are described in a separate guarantee card packed together with the modu
173. Y Undo wizard de Cut Ctrl E3 Copy Ctrl C FA Fa Fe HPY Bopp tos ted Screen Maat fo Selected Screen Delete Multiple Setting Delete All 2 The Multiple Setting dialog is displayed Multiple Setting x Start block Mo li Setting Blocks i 0 U Mo 5 Lines of Message cos Start block No Specify a top number of the multiple page blocks for one time setting Setting Blocks Specify the total number of page blocks for one time setting Start Message Specify the first message group number and the first line number in the top page block Lines of Message Specify the number of lines in one block 3 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK Multiple page blocks are set as per the above dialog setting 4 64 Chapter 4 Registration Items Direct Block Lines selected as desired from the previously registered messages in different groups can be re registered in direct blocks Direct blocks are different from page blocks in the point that direct blocks ignore the order of messages Direct blocks are used in the relay sub mode parts or the message mode parts Direct Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 direct blocks can be registered One direct block can contain 256 lines Message _ Direct block Message group No 2 5 O pa Y O O el No 0 LCD control terminal No 1 Gen eral specifications No 2 Item No 3 Contents No
174. ZM 71SE software Select CF Card Manager from the File menu 3 Specify the drive in which the CF card is now inserted Click OK The CF card manager starts 4 Check that the access folder Dsp in the CF card stores the screen data file Dsp0000 bin BIN file Select the file 5 Select Put BIN File Back from the File or right click menu 6 The Selecta screen data to save dialog is displayed Selectthe desired file name and click Save 7 The converted file is stored in the specified place Screen Data Transfer between CF Card and LCD Control Terminal ZM series For the description of screen data transfer between a CF card and a ZM 300 see Chapter 2 ZM 300 Operations in the ZM 300 User s Manual Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer via Memory Card ZM 1REC Connecting Method Connection between Memory Card ZM 1REC and Computer AC adaptor Connecting to serial port ZM 80C Memory card Connection between Memory Card and LCD Control Terminal ZM Series e ZM 300 series With a new ZM 300 just after being unpacked 0606066606060 0 0 Cable with the ZM 1REC Memory card 9 17 0 O 3 D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L Chapter5 Transfer With a ZM 300 other than the above 6 S SYSTEM Cable with the ZM 1REC mar POWER Memory card e ZM 42 to 82
175. a screen message or graphic ltis also possible to copy parts between part files A screen data file can be partitioned for storage on floppy disks and can be recombined File Management Outline File Management Functions The following options are included in File Managing 1 Selected screens or messages can be copied to a different file Parts can be copied between part files Entire files can be copied 2 3 4 Unnecessary files can be deleted 5 l A file occupying large amounts of memory can be partitioned and recombined 6 Files can be compared EA TI File Edit Display Draw Part Item gt C New Ctrl N Open El Save Ctrl S Save As a Property D O Transfer z Send AT command 5 On line Editing E E On line Run Printer Setting 8 Print Ctrl P Present Window Printing Ctrl Q CF Card Manager ZM Start Simulator File Managing Screen Data File 1 Parts Edit gt PartsFile 2 1 Zm3715a 237 File Copy 3 2 untitled 237 File Delete 4 3 Test 237 File Divide 5 4 1 237 File Combine Quit Application File Comparing 6 1 27 Chapter7 Useful Techniques Files for File Management The following two types of files can be handled by the file management function When copying files specify two files with the same extensions 1 Screen data file with extensions 237 or 271 2 Part file with extensions Z3P or Z7P
176. able The maximum permissible number of characters per line depends on the number of displayed dots Maximum 1 byte No of displayed dots 640 x 480 ef Ki The above figures are based on the line spacing of 4 Text Entry Check that the cursor is flashing in the text field and enter characters using the keyboard To enter multiple lines press the return key on the keyboard and insert a hard y a return 3 35 g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Chapter3 Drawing Tools Selecting Colors Foreground and background colors can be set Forthe color setting procedure see Chapter 2 Screens Text Properties Click the Char Prop button The Char Prop dialog is displayed Transparent F Italic Direction MEAR 7 Normal 14 Bold Shadow Ce Left Center 7 Right Pitch bh Enlarge DS Enlarger E For other setting items not described below see page 3 19 Left Center Right Select text alignment Pitch 0 32 Specify the desired line spacing The maximum available number varies depending on this setting Placing Multi text Multi text can be placed in the same manner as ordinary text For more information see page 3 22 3 36 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Screen LIB This command is used when placing a screen registered in the screen library IT For more information on screen library see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking th
177. able PLC This option is valid when Mitsubishi Net10 or OMRON SYSMAC CS1 DNA etc is selected Select this option when printing the network table OMulti Languages The option is valid when 2 or more is selected for Changing Characters Select this option when printing the multi language edit window O Screen 0 to 1023 Check the box when printing screen images or items set for the screens O Message 0 to 23 group Messages grouped by edit numbers are printed O Pattern 0 to 1023 Check the box when printing patterns O Graphic Library Group No 0 to 9 Graphic No 0 to 255 Check the box when printing graphics in the graphic library O Page Block O Direct Block O Screen Block O Macro Block O Data Block O Multi Overlap O Data Sheet O Screen Library Select these options when printing respective items Settings in the range of O to 1023 are valid O Temp PLC2 Net Table 0 to 31 This option is valid when the temperature control network or PLC2Way function is used Select this option when printing the temperature control network or PLC2Way table O MR400 Format Call 1 to 128 This option is valid when the ZM series is connected to the barcode printer MR400 Select this option when printing the MR400 format table call O MR400 Format Register 1 to 128 This option is valid when the ZM series is connected to the barcode printer MR400 Select this option when p
178. acter Graphic Print When this option is checked charts can be printed out clearly The specified number of lines also changes How this relates to the printout paper is shown below Paper size No of lines eege graphic se we Printed out images differ as shown below KN O Use Character Graphic Print V Use Character Graphic Print No O data No O data EEN data No 1 data dial an No 2 data No 2 data No 3 data No 3 data 4 77 A j9ays ISO Chapter4 Registration Items 4 78 To Drawing Tools for Data Sheet Line Icon Straight lines can be drawn by dragging It is possible to draw lines only horizontally or vertically Continuous lines as well as diagonal lines are not available Box Icon Only boxes without painting can be drawn Text Icon Enter a text as desired into the text field and drag the mouse over the edit window The text can be placed Character enlargementis limited to X 1 x Y 1 Only when O Enlarge X is checked however the X size is doubled Data Display Icon Clicking this icon brings up the following dialog Data Sheet Drawing Line Box Text Data Dit JU DecmaPon Ji H I Enlargex 1 won buts Zero Suppress Display Type DEL Stile 2 Input Type DEC Data Length 1w Memory pon OU de Character enlargement is limited to X 1 x Y 1 Only when O Enlarge X is checked however the X size is doubled Calendar Display
179. after being unpacked When a new ZM series unit is first turned on after being unpacked the following screen is displayed ZM 300 ZM 42 to 82 0 O Q D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L A new ZM series unit stores the data below A ZM series system program ref page 5 25 B Font data Japanese 32 ref page 5 26 C I F driver universal serial ref page 5 21 At the time of screen data transfer from the editor software computer to the ZM series lf the editor software has a ZM series system program containing functions that are not supported by the ZM series the computer transfers the system program as well to the ZM series Otherwise the program is not updated If the screen data contains any font data other than Japanese 32 the computer transfers the font data as well to the ZM series If any option other than universal serial is set for the I F driver in the screen data the computer transfers the I F driver file as well to the ZM series 9 3 Chapter5 Transfer For a ZM Series Being put to use When screen data has been transferred to a ZM series unit that has already been put to use not just after being unpacked it is brought to either status at power on e Communicating with the PLC RUN mode e Showing the Main Menu local main screen stored in the ZM series STOP mode communication stopped ZM 371TA 2002 4 1 09 23 30 nection Baud Rate Eh Sign Si Dez Lee Data Lebgth PLC Stat No
180. aging dialog Screen Graphic Library Multi Overlap Data Block Pattern Data Sheet Screen Library Animation Frame e The copy source and target file wndows are displayed The source file window is placed above the other Perform copying as described below 1 Click the screen to be copied in the source file wndow The screen number is highlighted in red File Edit Display Window Cae dl ame lx 0 S 0 14 9 File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data Test 237 2 If necessary scroll the target file window until the desired file number comes into view 3 Drag the selected screen to the desired target box number The copied screen is displayed in the target position by releasing the mouse El ZM Editor for Windows Version 2 00 File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data Test 237 File Edit Display Window Dd ans lx 0 7 1D 14 4 oF File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data Test 237 In the case of a screen only the screen is copied The pattern or graphic library o that is used on the screen is not copied 7 30 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 4 Tocopy consecutive screens click the first number of the source screens 5 While holding down the SHIFT key click the last number of the source screens The screens for the first number to the last number are selected at one time El 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300
181. ainted in the same color as the one selected for Foreground Painting is possible in the same color as the boundary color When O Boundary Color for Foreground is not checked the enclosed area can be painted in a color different from the one selected for Foreground Painting is possible even if the foreground color is different from the boundary color Ex If you draw an elliptical sector on the line and paint the enclosed area it is painted as shown below Paint the graphic drawn as below 1 Li d Inthe Paint tab window In the Paint tab window Line red A Lee M Boundary Color for Foreground O Boundary Color for Foreground lt S Foreground Green Foreground Green Painted area 2 Elliptical S ege NA sector green lt gt N Paint color green runs through red Paint color gree n stops area and stops at the green area atthe red or green area 3 26 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools L To cancel the paint or to check the painted area select Display Environment AS from the Display menu and remove the check mark from M Paint Dsp Graphic Call This command is used when placing a graphic registered in the graphic library on the screen IT For graphic registration and graphic library see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking the Graphic Call icon brings up the Graphic Library List window Graphic Library Group 0 List 0001 0003 0004 0005
182. al ly When the ZM 71SE editor and the Simulator are both started up an SIM file is created automatically SIM file update timing 1 When you gotothe Tool menu for ZM 71SE and select Start Simulator or 2 When screen data is sent from ZM 71SE or 3 When you go to the File menu for the Simulator and select Apply ZM Data Update occurs automatically in both cases followed by the display of an SIM file sheet on screen Names of Automatically Created SIM Files An automatically created SIM file is saved temporarily in NTEMP The following file names are attached to these SIM files i The memory data for tems set on each el Scrn00 1 O sim screen is saved here Screen number The memory data for items set on each Mlib00 1 O sim multi overlap is saved here ulti ovedap number The memory data for normal overlaps Scrn Ov001 00 sim within each screen is saved here Screen number Overlap number The memory data for data display set on DtbIkOO 1 O sim each block is saved here Data block number The memory data for data display set on Tyo001 0 sim each data sheet is saved here Data sheet number The memory data for the system memory System g Si m of the screen data file is saved here a The memory data for the buffering area Buffer sim is saved here v When SIM files are automaticaly created all the SIM files inthe 4 TEMP folder are deleted Ifyou have created a SIM file do not save itin
183. alog setting is concluded click OK The options in the Parameter Setting dialog vary with the selected graphic For more information see page 4 12 4 7 D o SS O D o 3 si lt Chapter4 Registration Items 4 8 Parameter Setting Dialog Action When moving transforming or changing graphics the new one is placed over the previous one or the previous one is cleared before the new one is placed on the screen Select either manner Replace The new graphic is placed over the previous one Therefore the previous one remains on the screen r CERO Animate Only the new graphic is placed on the screen When you goto a setting item and click its Set button the Parameter dialog is displayed Parameter EX No Setting on e e E C Absolute Input C Incremental Input Incremental Input No Setting No memory is allocated Chapter 4 Registration Items Absolute Input When changing a graphic specify the value for change in absolute coordinates e Specifying coordinates With respect to coordinates 0 0 at the top left corner of the screen and 639 479 at the bottom right corner or 319 239 or 799 599 specify the coordinates for moving a graphic in memory When 300 200 is specified under Absolute Input the graphic is moved tothe position below IO 0 300 200 O Q CH CH 5 639 479 e 5
184. anner 4 Q Gu File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window NM A MIA HEB OE MMO CR EA EA LIE 1 Li a ee J oe 3 PB E ELERE Aoo ngepet I E P Hod down the Ctr key and drag 4 When deleting a tray icon click it and press the DEL key or select Delete from the Edit menu 1 23 Chapter7 Useful Techniques Pasting Part in Tray to Screen 1 Tile the screen edit window and the tray window 2 Drag the tray icon of the desired part to the screen edit window The part is pasted to the window File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window OSA eee Bee me 2 DRS BPR RWC ke OE AE ay oe Drag and place Tray Display Change e Right click on the tray window and select Change Window The Tray List Dis play window is displayed instead of the Tray Icon Display window The contents of each tray can be viewed Clicking Change Window again brings back the tray icon display window ma ray Icon Display Change Window Tray Display d Arange Icons de Cut Bike Ee Lou Lila F2 Paste ot Ay Delete Select All am Tray List Display 7 24 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques e Right click a tray icon on the Tray Icon Display window and select Property The Property dialog is displayed The information on the registered part and its image are displayed When necessary a comment name can be attached by entering data for Comme
185. art Bit H 3 CG v O Notes on Creating a CSV File e Each sampling data should be entered on one line e Memory set for Sampling Buffer Word No in each sampling mode should be entered beginning with the most recent from the left of each line e Only create necessary data on the display If a title line or row exists it will not be displayed correctly e Donot leave lines or rows blank Data in blank lines or rows will be displayed as 0 8 25 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor CSV File Setting Examp le The following example shows settings for a CSV file created with Microsoft EXCEL Using buffering area No O Memory Designation D200 Sampling Method Constant sample No of Words 4 No of Samples 100 Store Target Internal buffer Full Processing Continuous When a CSV file like this is created with Microsoft EXCEL El Micoach Excel Book2 xls MEN File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help OSHA SRY LBB o c Bxr A NAMB im gt Para 10 870 o A D35 1stsampling data CO JO Om P wh HO Word No O WordNo 1 WordNo 2 Word No v When the number of sampling times is smaller than the CSV file data amount Example Sampling frequency is 20 but the CSV file has 60 pieces of data Stop The program will stop after displaying 20 pieces of data 20 points are displayed on the ZM series Continuous The first 20 pieces of data are continuousl
186. arting one layer is chosen for editing The editing layer denotes the one that is currently chosen Editing layer one of them Base screen Overlap Overlap Overlap No 0 No 1 No 2 2 35 Chapter2 Screens L Changeover of Editing Layer Follow either method 1 Right click the mouse Changethe editing layer from the pull down menu 2 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed In the Detail tab window change the setting for Edit Layer Choose the desired overlap number to select the layer Display Environment E x Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others Edit Layer Base Base a Switch Lamp Y Language fi E Overlap kW No0 M Nol No 2 Detail T Do f Memory Je Area Editing layer change must be executed while a normal overlap is placed on the screen Iloc When an overlap is selected as the editing layer the modes placed on the selected overlap are indicated in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen When the editing layer is moved to the base screen the modes on the base screen are indicated in the auxiliary tool box YI L Display Non display by Right click Menu Itis possible to decide display or non display of normal overlap onthe base screen from the right click menu Select Hide Overaps with Base Checked from the right click menu When the editing layer has been changed from Overlap to Base the
187. arts Switch Lamp Display Grid Display ON Grid The items of the switch part are listed Zoom Display Environment Redraw K Item List Placed Part O x O Switch 160 100 240 180 Text Function No Function Grouping Start gt gt gt gt Grouping Start gt gt gt gt Box Paint 160 100 240 180 Continuous Line 165 175 235 105 4 Continuous Line 235 105 165 175 4 Grouping End lt lt lt lt Box Paint 166 106 234 174 Continuous Line 170 170 230 110 4 Continuous Line 230 110 170 170 4 Grouping End lt lt lt Polygon Paint 202 142 16 3 Click the item whose property is to be changed and click the Detail Prop Change icon The property can be changed with ease Draw Menu The Draw menu commands are the same as those for screen data files Window Menu The Window menu commands are the same as those for screen data files APP3 43 Appendix 3 Part Editing M EMO Please use this page freely APP3 44 INDEX INDEX Numerics SD DES na ca APP2 1 EE e KEE AP P2 23 ZM A2 1082 ees AP P2 21 DIS TNS ae ee AP P2 22 ZM 300 series ic cia dias APP2 1 RE Kai Terre ME APP2 8 paris tl cn Aaa t APP2 1 ZM D2 EE APP2 15 paris casio APP2 15 setting procedure AE conos APP2 18 A Add Video Menu ura eo 7 21 AIOR EE 1 39 animation EE 2 55 4 85 B Dackgro und COMM ici Seas adn e 2 Dall GRAM a dd 2 48 ei Vu 2 A ea ae es ea ead
188. ascreen library on the screen the parts registered in the screen library are subject to the same limit items in the chart above When placing a screen library that has a mode registered init it is necessary to select division numbers that have no mode registered 3 These functions may not be available even with the ZM 300 series depending on the models For more information on available models see the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 0 o s P lt D n D o H T O O O 5 E Chapter2 Screens 2 20 Setting Memory Setting memory in the previous chart means the number of memory locations which is read on one screen This does not mean the number of words used on ascreen Screen resolution varies with models of LCD control terminal No of memory locations per screen ZM 300 series 1024 ZM 82 1024 ZM 72 1024 ZM 52 52HD 1024 ZM 42 43 62E 256 The read area under System Setting is counted as one memory location The write area is not the target to count Therefore to determine the maximum number of memory locations for a part subtract one from the number indicated in the above table The way of counting for setting memory is unique but these values should be enough to create screens Examples e One memory location is counted even when 10 words are used in the relay mode e Switch output memory is not counted as setting memory For lamp memory however one is counted for each
189. aste from the Edit menu or click the Paste icon The copy icon appears in the Part auxiliary tool box a Deletion of icons from the tool box is also executable on the Item List window 2 31 Chapter2 Screens e Arrow buttons in the Part auxiliary tool box When more than 16 icons are stored in a Part auxiliary tool box extra icons are hidden from view Bring up the hidden icons using the arrow buttons bh hh os bs Tool Bar for Each Part The relay mode tool bar contains icons in addition to Detail Clicking an icon brings up the dialog for the relay mode part Click the Display Area icon for example When the part already selected is OK click the Place button When selecting a different part bring up the parts list using the Parts Select button and select the desired part Display Area Division No p y m In area Prop Foreground JP RER Ev Background STITT RER Ter Tile Eee IT Display area transparent Parts Select L Itis recommended that M Save Setting be checked when selecting a part When a part x is selected with this box unchecked the relay mode settings revert to the default 2 32 Chapter2 Screens There is an icon like the Up down switch icon that brings up a pull down menu when it is clicked Select the desired option from the menu The corresponding dialog is displayed Place a part from the dialog
190. at you register yourself Tile Structure A maximum of 8 tiles can be registered The size of one tile is 8 x 8 dots White dots specified on a tile are regarded as areas in the foreground color and black dots are regarded as areas in the background color White dots specified in tile editing are colored inthe foreground color and black Foreground color i dots are colored in the background color Background color Calling a Tile Select Tile from the Item menu The Tile Edit window is displayed Wem System Setting 1 Screen Graphic Library Ed ZM Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 Z2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window Me Bel OSGRH omaB ix 0 SF 10 14 e 5 E jam OR HEED MILO Sr wem Pattern BEBA o LC EA DEPARA Macro Block Mult O verlap Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Multi anauages Animation 4 72 Chapter 4 Registration Items Tile Editing Follow the procedure below 1 Select a tile number to be registered by clicking lr File Edit Display f ltem System Setting Tool Window PEA IET AS MAREA E RER EE A AT EE GH Soh St Sh la o o n rat AA S a pg Owe ees J oi n D D 2 Create atile in the tile editing area Draw white dots by clicking or dragging Dr
191. ata Extension A EE TEN bn EE e in E ER tele SANNO TaDle iaei a Ladder Omi e DEE Modbus E OMPI sda earache ee Ae SVS Ie Mi PA A a a r El Ui ECA G EE E alle Ed Eer EE dee dd ee Online Editing Giele el Escaping trom dl le Editing sutil Screen Data Transfer via Modem nono no conocio cn nn cnn cra cnn rr arc Prelimi anies and Gd tele e EE Arange menis Orne tre Meena ert ete Sn eevee aN oe mn Arena SUereT eran ree Data Ttranster ee e EE AT Command SC e EE ZM Series Setting Description of EEN A Connection between ZM Sage and M dem Connection between Modem and Telephone CES Connection between Modem and Computer Screen Data Transfer o Transfer Error iie sas ende on n ZN 71SE After Screen Data Transfer enne tactics AE ege Bids Connection DEEN 9 17 ee DENT de 5 17 ai 5 17 5 19 sm 5 19 ee 5 19 Screen Data Comparison between Memory Card ZM 1REC and SE 5 20 Screen Check Chapter Print PPM ANG EE AV allabble Printers ta et Secor Nee ia ee ea eld eo ee eee ae Pre Mina CDS ete hai ec tt cel ied tia ida Option Setting Dialog i Options Under Page ale Pint Setup Dialog RE PARNUETO CO AUT e A aed uae are te ate Print Setting Dialog EE Option Setting Button a cece cece ae ce cece ce cece en cece an cucu E E E ni E EE Print Button Printing the Currently panal Window l When the Memory Address Use List is Opened A A S Sereen QU a Eeer A a na
192. ata D a E iaaa Z37 laa Show_2_For_sharp 237 aa Zm3615a 237 f check 23 sa Show_2_for_sharp1 237 a 2m3715a 237 laa Ladder 237 sa Test 237 laa 2m3815a 237 Ladder300 237 al Zm300test 237 la sample 237 al Zm300test_1 237 laa sample_1 237 laa 2m352d 237 gt File name kan Files of type sn DI Cancel Ls Window Menu The Window menu commands are the same as those for screen data files APP3 41 Appendix 3 Part Editing Ina Modify Part Window APP3 42 File Menu e Quit Part Modifying Clicking this command closes the Modify Part window and brings up the former part edit window Edit Menu The Edit menu commands are the same as those for screen data files except for the following commands Frame Auto Fitting When a graphicis too large to fit in the part area click this icon to enlarge the frame so that it fits the whole part including the graphic The Frame Auto Fit icon functions in the same manner This command is inactive for overlap parts because graphics cannot extend beyond the part areas Frame Manual Fitting The frame of a part can be adjusted manually using the mouse For more information see page APP3 12 Switch Area Setting This command is used to reset the switch area operating area For more information see page APP3 11 Move Start End Angles Separately This command is used to adjust pie graph or panel meter part angles T
193. ate in sucha manner that only the button currently being pressed is Xx activated in output memory and the others are deactivated in output memory 9 2 Chapter 9 Wizard Setting Procedure 1 Inthe Wizard dialog select Switch from the parts list and click the OK button Wizard E Select the part to place Image Error Display Keypad Password Trend Display Histrical Display Graph Display Calendar Display Memo Pad lt Explanation gt Place switches and radio button s Cancel 2 Select Radio Button and click the Next button Select the type of switch C Standard Switch EN Nesassenseessssensessnsesssenees Cancel 9 3 S Q C O Q GC O m x A 3 2 D n Chapter9 Wizard 3 Four types of radio buttons are previewed Switch Cancel ON and OFF tab Open either window to check the image Pull down menu Select a color as desired Click the desired type from the four The lower left type is selected in this example The selected type is enclosed in a red frame Click the Next button 4 The selected switch image is displayed Switch Number of Switch Memory O Doo 00 E O lt Back Cancel Number of Switch Select the number of switches 4 is selected in this example Memory Allocate a memory address to the switches D100 is allocated in this example Click the
194. atible MICREX F T link F_TLink tpb MICREX F T link ZM 41 70 compatible FLEX PC series FlexPc tpb 9 22 Chapter 5 Transfer SR T TOSHIBA Teetes senes pan SHIBA Se ToshibaC tpb MACHINE S5PG port SimS5P G tpb S5 ZM 41 70 compatible SimS tpb os MIN TI500 505 Gm TI tpb TI500 505 ZM 41 70 compatible SHINKO SELMART Selmart tpb Nola E SE FATEK FACON FB series FaconFB tpb AUTOMATION IDEC MICRO3 Micro3 tpb wt N CO O O D D gt UO DI pa D 4 DI gt a Chapter5 Transfer CIEN CTN CN LI E O E EE 4 Click Open Data transfer starts On completion of transfer bring the ZM series to the STOP mode Mam Menu local main screen Check the I F driver model and the version on the screen ZM 371TA 2002 4 1 09 23 30 Screen Data Information Size 5832704 Connection 1 Baud Rate 19200 sil Signal Level RS232C Data Lebgth 7 PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 Parity Even Send Delay 0 msec Gd WWW WE Editor MJ1 O POWER 9 24 Chapter 5 Transfer Program Extension prg The ZM series system program is not transferred automatically with the screen data When the editor software ZM 71SE has been updated transfer the ZM series system program to the ZM series IOC Transferring Procedure 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed Select Program for Transfer Data
195. atterns By specifying the same number for both start and end numbers one pattern is used as wallpaper When importing a bitmap file that has been registered as multiple patterns two or more patterns can be specified e When JPEG is selected File name Select a JPEG file name within eight one byte alphanumerics to be used as wallpaper JPEG files are made available by storing them in the ZM 71S JPEG folder and written to a CF card For how to write JPEG files to a CF card or other information on JPEG files see Chapter 19 JPEG Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Specify Position O Enlarge This option is active for patterns A selected file can be enlarged under equal magnification and placed with respect to the upper left corner of the screen Display Center Select this option when placing the selected file at the center of the screen Tile Select this option when tiling multiple pieces of the selected file with respect to the upper left corner of the screen Display Corner Select this option when placing the selected file at a corner of the screen Top Left Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Right 2 9 O CH DI mp O gt a lt lt O 3 D gt Ap CO D mme EL gt O Chapter2 Screens Display Environment Setting Grids or area lines can be displayed as a screen editing guide Display Environment Dialog Select Display Environme
196. aw black dots by right clicking or right dragging EJ Fie Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window A A T A AAA EEE EA TT TT E E AAA E SN BOR FAL 4 73 Chapter4 Registration Items 3 When the tile is complete click the next tile number The previous tile number shows the registered image KN File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window ECETIA ime gt D HERB Mile Bk wem HOM OtOR I ar Be oe i P 4 Perform the same procedure for the remaining tile numbers 4 74 Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Sheet When data sheet screens have been registered data in the format of data sheet can be printed out from the LCD control terminal by means of the data sheet function Data Sheet Structure A maximum of 1 024 data sheets can be registered Make settings for a data sheetincluding the size and orientation in the Data Sheet Page Setting dialog For information on the dialog see the next page Data sheet No 0 OU Q Line A setting m Mm 0 a Q No 1023 N 09 T 1234 N w Th A N CA BcH Y N Wi amp 1234 1234 Data 10 1234 1234 1234 A maximum of 1 024 data sheets can be registered 4 75 Chapter4 Registration Items Calling a Data Sheet Select Data Sheet from the Item menu The Data Sheet dialog is displayed Specify the data sheet number to be opened and cl
197. being placed on the screen in a disrupted condition To avoid disrupting the shape of the parts that are placed on the screen it is recommended that you do not check TU Save Setting in the calendar parts list window How to Alter a Calendar Part To delete one portion of a calendarpart YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN refer to the example below Ex To delete day of the week 1 Goto the Week tab window in the Calendar dialog and uncheck Display MV Display gt O Display Note that if you select SUN day of the week display handles are displayed and select Delete fromthe Edit menu the calendar part is deleted 2 Even if you delete the day of the week display its area and punctuation marks will remain intact Use the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon to standardize the areas or delete punctuation like How to Enlarge a Calendar Part Click a calendar part and drag the handles YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN are enlarged but the punctuation marks and for example are not To enlarge punctuation marks use the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon rA ga xn 0 0 19 gt Division No i jament HERB RW OC Ae Ar E H E A Bao na mo A pen 1AL Screen 0 Edit A i Not enlarged 2 53 op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 er o gt a Q D er cr S Chapter2 Screens Memo Pad Clicking the Memo Pad icon brings up the f
198. ber Memory card switch Display area Memory card number Memory cardname Format switch Memory card file number Memory card file name INS For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Animation Clicking the Animation icon brings up the Animation dialog Animation k E x ZE d Main Animation Table eT Division No H Command Memory D00100 EEE T Replay Animations Consecutively Use Animation Table gt Animation No l Specify with Memory No jo Coordinates Specify with Memory Sch 3 Process Cycle Low Speed DI IT For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 17 Animation in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function When the dialog setting is concluded the dialog icon is shown in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To bring up the dialog again click the icon 2 55 op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 Fe o gt a Q D re cr S Chapter2 Screens Video Clicking the Video icon brings up the following tool bar CEC 4 OHA q IT For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 18
199. ble indicates parameter items valid for each graphic 1 Line Continuous line Box Parallelogram Polygon Circle Arc sector Ellipse elliptical arc elliptical sector Text Pattern Paint Graphic call Dot Data display Start point end point Point O n coordinates Start point end point Start point PX2 PY2 PX3 PY3 Center coordinates radius start angle number of angles Center coordinates radius Center coordinates radius start angle end angle Center coordinates X radius Y radius Start point coordinates of the first character bottom left Start point top left coordinates pattem number Start point Start point library number Start point Start point bottom left coordinates of the first numeral 1 Paintis not depicted normaly when Action Animate is selected in the Parameter Setting dialog 2 For information on data display parameters see page 4 16 Continuous line points 0 n coordinates When continuous lines are drawn like this parameters can be set for seven points Chapter 4 Registration Items 2 Parallelogram PX2 e PY2 e PX3 Q o pS PY3 z o a lt 3 Pattern e Start point The top left corner of the pattern becomes the start point Parameter No 1 e Pattern No When a parameter for pattern number has been set commanding the pattern number brings up the corresponding graphic Patten No 0 No 1 No 2
200. both screen creation and debugging become possible on one computer and time can be saved e A testsheet based on ZM screen data memory called an SIM file is created on each screen One SIM file is created for each screen Additionally an SIM file can be created based on the memory addresses of any edit screen system setting normal overlap multi overlap data block or data sheet Composition The Simulator is automatically installed when screen creation software ZM 71SE is installed Operation Procedure Possible Simulation e Automatically create SIM files based on the screen data file currently open on your personal computer and perform a test See page 8 2 This is used when the Simulator is started up from the ZM 71SE editor The SIM file created cannot be saved e Create a new SIM file and perform atest See page 8 3 An SIM file can be created freely The SIM file created can be saved L SIM File A memory file used to read and write PLC memory on the Simulator screen 8 1 H 3 CG v O Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Operation Procedure Creating SIM File s Automatically Refer to the following flowchart for the procedure of starting up both ZM 71SE and the Simulator creating SIM file s based on the currently open screen data file and then performing a test SIM files are always kept in their most recent statuses as determined by screen transfer or update of screen data
201. button brings up the Rotate dialog When rotating a graphic item the message Item is out of working area is displayed if it cannot be held in the screen space after rotation In such acase move the rotation center or change the rotation angle Center When the Rotate icon is clicked the rotation center is automatically located at the top left corner When changing the rotation center click the Center button The following mouse is displayed on the screen Click the mouse on the desired position The CENT mark moves to the clicked position Click this position The CENT mark gt WA CENT Multiple graphic items can be selected and rotated at one time Chapter 1 Basic Operation Flip The following graphic items can be flipped on the specified axis Applicable graphic items Line continuous line box parallelogram polygon circle arc sector ellipse elliptical arc paint including frame scale Operation Procedure Selectthe desired graphic item When handles are shown click Flip or icon The following Flip dialog is displayed FS m Direction Position ce al C Horizontal C Right I Copy Direction Vertical Horizontal Select the axis to flip the graphic item Position Left Right Up Down C enter Select the position to place the graphic item with respect to the selected Direction O Copy When the check box is turned on M the graphic item
202. ched to the scale at the specified pitch When this box is not checked O long gradation marks are not attached Pitch 1 16 This option becomes active when M Long Line is checked Set the pitch for long gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button Separate settings for the X and Y axes are required Y axis vertical axis Pitch Line X axis horizontal Short gradation mark Long gradation mark Drawing Method 1 Select the desired style from the Shape icons neni I SE I Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale CHER Coor M kb 2 Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand 3 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point in the same way as drawing a rectangle The trend graph scale is drawn Start point g End point SS a End point Start point 3 34 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Multi text This command is used when placing multiple lines of text at one time Clicking the Multi Text icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Line Eps Circle Text Paint Dot Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Test Char Prop Foreground Background 0 Text Field Text can be entered when the cursor is flashing in the text field If the cursor is not flashing in the text field click the mouse on the text field Number of Characters Avail
203. cked Grids are displayed on the screen Clicking the command again clears the check mark and the grids 5 Grid Type Select the grid type from 1 Byte Switch Mode and Free 6 Hide overlaps with Base checked When this command is clicked once it is checked When a normal overlap is placed ona screen it can be hidden by changing the editing layer from Overlap to Base When Overlap is checked again the overlap is shown Clicking the Hide overlaps with Base checked again clears the check mark and shows the overlap 7 On line Editing This command is valid when LCD control terminal is connected to a personal computer using a screen data transfer cable When this command is clicked once a check mark is added to the command and on line editing becomes possible On line Run becomes active Clicking the command again clears the check mark On line editing is canceled For more information on on line editing see Chapter 5 Transfer 1 32 Chapter 1 Basic Operation 8 On line Run This command becomes valid in on line editing When it is clicked only the screen data that has not been transferred yet is transferred to ZM D When an Item is Selected zi O O 9 Cut E Same as Cut in the Edit menu Ge 10 Copy a Same as Copy in the Edit menu When it is clicked Paste becomes active D m 11 Paste Same as Paste in the Edit menu 12 Delete Same as Delete in the Edit
204. cking this menu brings up the Align Setting dialog Pitch Equal Free This selection determines the pitch for alignment When Free is selected specify the distance Selected Area When this option is checked M the items in the area enclosed by the mouse are all aligned For example when characters are placed on a switch as graphics Check Selected Area and enclose the character graphics in an area smaller than the switch area A dotted box is displayed Enclose an area along the switch frame to select characters Do not select the switch Click Vertical Align or Horizontal Align in the Align sub menu The character graphics on the switch are center aligned in the switch area Characters are vertically aligned to this area Horizontal Align also works in the same manner When the switch itself is enclosed together with characters it is also aligned When you want to align characters only do not select the switch Chapter 1 Basic Operation Select Environment This command is used for editing screens or multi overlaps Items to be selected can be limited Clicking Select Environment brings up the following dialog x Select Option All Only in the current division OK Cancel Select Option All is chosen as default Clicking the Select button brings up the Select Option dialog Choose a desired option It is displayed in the Select
205. co cono cono cono seres anno es 4 4 Graphic Library Editing cocoa cono cono corno coo os 4 5 Graphic Library Environment Setting 4 17 Multi OVerlap ocoocococonocococinononococononocnco db Multi overlap Structure nooo cates nono cono eee eens 4 20 Calling a Multt overlop nss cece cece cece cee ccoo cono cono eee eons 4 20 Mult overlap Editing su saci azota oerte sene ER tere serre re 4 21 Other Settings monde are tere rense mee 4 23 Data BlOCK EE AL Data Block Structure ke sees snese nono sene cono rero teree sene 4 25 Calling a Data Block 4 25 Data Block Editing EE 4 26 Data Block Environment Setting 0 0 0 0 ccc ccce cess cress eens 4 27 MESS QQ E REZO Message Structure ccc cece senes cece cess nono cess cess case reese ees 4 28 Calling a Message conan cece cono sees tere sree aes 4 30 Message Editing a0 aonne nnno anse ita 4 31 Message Display Environment Setting 4 35 Pattern A 4007 Pattern Structure ccc oseas cece cece sees sense cono cence cess sees rere anes 4 37 Calling a Pattem EE 4 37 Pattern Edin AAPP mnia aaea manus anika eia DEER AAKA 4 38 Transforming Pattems aoe ccc cess seene cess sees cono cono rere noo 4 47 Bitmap Import and Storage nono cono setts ees 449 Pattern Environment Setting 0 0 ccc cece cess ene creer ees 4 53 Placing a Pattern E 4 54 To be continued Macro BIOCk EE e Macro Block Structure
206. color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Eraser Command Usage 1 Select a dot size Pen 2 Inthe Pattern Edit window click or drag the mouse over the graphic The eraser in the size for Pen erases the graphic gt Click or drag Operation by the eraser command is the same as drawing in dots using black y AS color 4 39 Chapter4 Registration Items Line Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pattern Drawing Pattern Text Foreground Fai Background x B H EE x Le lelelelee Foreground Select a color to be displayed by clicking or dragging Background Select a color to be displayed by right clicking or right dragging Pen Select a dot size for the line command O Transparent Color Check this box when transparent color setting is necessary For more information on transparent color setting see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Line Command Usage 1 Select a foreground color background color and dot size Pen 2 In the Pattern Edit window drag the mouse Aline is drawn with the specified size pen in the color for Foreground
207. cononcnn coco cece conocio enae ca aran ni cnn nr na Environment Tab Window nan ae eeae sees nn cnn ran renren 1 22 1 22 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 25 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 30 1 30 1 33 1 34 1 34 1 35 1 38 1 38 1 40 1 40 1 40 1 40 1 41 1 41 1 42 1 42 1 43 1 43 Chapter2 Screens Screen COMPOSsItON cios acia ace elen DINSA E A AAT A WiatlS a DIVISION datada COM DINATION of Pars eran tala When Using Screen Library E DiVISION Number Cies in a cia EE e Screen E e UE e EE LINES anid OMAN E E gis Ge te EE Operation Environment Gettng Back ground C olor Secta ii a ie acd ee ee eae Other Screen Setting MOMS E eae neseeaees P1 Tab Window P2 Tab Window Part Types and Placement EE PAM LV DOS tees shes A eae Notes On Paris PIACSME EE Seting WGMONY cei ects ers o atl eee Parts File a Kinds of Parts Files 3D Parts Parts File Ex Switch EE eege Parts Placement Ex Switch A E E EAT Parts Change EX Lamp che tatty incalexeacedeescaieteassne ae Se eresece a aces Parts Enlargement Reduction u a ne annene cece ce cece cece ce cece cece ae cece ee nono cono sean cnn conan nen enneren Pars SCIOCUON ech eeh e dd a FATS IMIOWE INN CIM ss ae ehh eine ace E also Parts Placement from Tool BaB onca dons ccccs cece chad te ladaacac a ee a dees Setting Procedure Ex Relay cai a iat one le te Detail Icon Tool Bar for Each Patt A Redisplay of Tool BEE 2 1
208. correct the setting in the memory address Screen No Error 9 41 gt E D 3 GD 3 D D 5 U Q Q Q gt ep D 3 Chapter5 Transfer M EMO Please use this page freely 9 42 AENA Print PreliIMINALICS e 1 Available Printers e cece miooo coco cence cee eens KEEN sees cones SNE es 6 1 Preliminary Ste ps as ccc cece cscs coco conan sees tenne sees esse aret sene m gt 6 1 Option Setting Dialog ccoocccocccococco sete cess cents nono e 6 2 Print Procedure e D A Print Setting Dialog A A 6 4 Printing the Currently Opened Window 00 ccoo ee 6 7 Printing Examples Chapter 6 Print Preliminaries This chapter explains the procedure for printing the ZM series screen data file from the computer IT The procedures of connecting a printer to the ZM series and printing the screen data file from the ZM series are not explained here For more information on printing fromthe ZM series see Chapter 15 Print inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Available Printers Any printer that is available in the Windows environment can print from the ZM 71SE editor These printers available in the Windows environment may not be used for printing from the ZM series Please take note of this 0 cD Preliminary Steps Follow the steps shown below Rg Refer to the Prepare the printer above Connect a printer to the computer H
209. creen 5 Edit Select the screen to be called on the Screen List window and drag the screen to the previous Screen Edit window Releasing the mouse brings up the Screen Edit wndow of the dragged screen El 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 F 2M300data2m3715a 237 2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen List Screen File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window Help Dain S 7 G 4 oH E gt gt HSB DR MERA A OESTE CAE Oa eet Pw SERS SVN ARMY eR OOP OOS Ia A Me WM Screen 0 Edit lt HARRP Screen List Screen Drag 1 24 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Calling fro m the Item Menu Screens can be called from the Item menu Select Screen from the Item menu The Screen dialog is displayed Specify the desired number and click OK The Screen Edit wndow of the specified screen number is displayed gt ol Cancel Graphic Library Multi Overlap Data Block Message Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Multi Lanquages Animation Note that the previous Screen Edit window remains open To check the edit windows currently opened on the editor click the Window menu Clicking the edit window name moves the window to the front The multiple Screen Edit windows or Multi overap Edit windows can be displayed on the editor Operations on th
210. ct Cancel 2 59 Chapter2 Screens 2 When your desired color is shown click the Select button The color appears in the top left position EJ o poan E B 248 04F8 Pallette 1 Pallette 2 Pallette d J Create Color lt lt Clear OK Cancel To go back to the previous color pallet click OK When registering a different color next select its registration position in the pallet by clicking in advance If no position is selected the top left position is overwritten by the next color registration Notes on Color Creation e Registered colors as desired up to 32 colors are stored in the screen data file when the file is saved Each time the file is opened the registered colors for the file are displayed e In the case of data copy by means ofthe file management function Chapter 7 Useful Techniques between screen data files containing different registered colors the registered colors in the copy source file is not displayed on the color pallet in the target file but is displayed outside the pallet Screen Drawing x CEBA CEN WT ATT TT Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Text C Line Box Circle Text Paint Da iii O GA bal Es Round Chamfering Se TTT Chamfering CCT 1 eg Foreground TI TI TI TITITITI M WERT CR Backaround Paint COMA TIT Frame olor KR Frame CIII Tie Pallette 1 Pallette d Pallette d Line Type SA do EE EE
211. cted Memory Input Constant E x Type PLC Memory z 00100 Internal Mem Memory Card Type foe y 4 5 6 C D m MEA a J Toff fal Cancel Refer UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem DEC DEC OCT HEX FLOAT These options become active when Constant is chosen DEC decimal with sign DEC decimal without sign OCT octal HEX hexadecimal FLOAT floating point when real numbers are used 5 VO Memory Select this option when using I O communications such as Ethernet For more information see the ZM 80NU 80NU2 User s Manual 6 Temp Mem PLC2 Memory Select this option when using the temperature control network or PLC 2Way function For more information see each ZM User s Manual Type Type PLC Memory y 0063 PLC Memory o 00100 Internal Mern Internal Mem Memory Card Memory Card eat TD Indirect 7 a sfel Fl PD Indirect 2Jelole r n eLslelelol n DANE Station No 1 22 3fa u Station No 0 22 3fa u E SKS 3 off fen Cancel Refer Cancel Refer e Refer button When comments for memory addresses are listed in a file it is possible to set the memory address while referring to the contents of the file The list file must have the file extension lst When setting the temperature control network or PLC 2Way function the
212. ction 2 10 Chapter2 Screens Overlap This option is active when normal overlaps are placed on the screen Select whether or not to display the overlaps Check the box M of the desired overlap number Uncheck the box when it is not displayed For more information on overlaps see Chapter 2 Overlap in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Detail By checking the desired option its detailed information is displayed DIV No Displays the division numbers of parts Memory Displays the memory addresses assigned to parts Area Displays the area of each part by dotted lines DIV No Memory O CH DI mp O gt a lt lt O 3 D gt Ap CO D mme EL gt O Y Paint Dsp When there is a graphic drawn with the Paint icon on the draw tool bar it is displayed as painted When this option is unchecked only x appears to indicate the paint start point For more information on paint see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools O Graphic Relay Dsp This option is active only when the graphic relay mode is set The ON OFF status in the graphic relay mode can be checked For more information on the graphic relay mode see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function O Message Dsp This option is active when the relay mode or message mode is set Messages specified in these modes can be displayed in the display area or on switches lamps on
213. cuted Multiple parts are selected simultaneously by clicking the first part and then while holding down the SHIFT key clicking the last part APP3 36 Appendix 3 Part Editing 6 If you want to copy different parts select Change Display from the Display menu The item selection dialog is displayed Choose the desired part and click OK Display Window PA Status Bar Change Display Ehange around 7 In addition to copying by dragging as explained above copying by designating part numbers is also possible Select Copy by Specifying No from the Edit wndow The item selection dialog is displayed Choose the desired part and click OK The No Designation dialog is displayed Specify the desired numbers for Copy Source No and Copy Target No Edit Display Window de Eut Erie Ho Designation Switch Copy Ctrl C Bi E S 20 Poste DEE y Copy Source Mo D FS ei Delete gt Copy Target No jo coa 0 o bes 1 D lt D 5 D Q O 3 O 5 Fe Select All Copy by specifying No a Delete 8 Tosave the copied parts select Copy Target Save or Copy Target Save As from the File menu 9 To quit select Quit File Managing from the File menu APP3 37 Appendix 3 Part Editing Part Editing Menu Use the following commands to create new parts or to edit existing parts In a Part Edit Window File Menu e New Choosing this command creates a new part fil
214. d W I D D d D H H e 7 A Chapter 4 Registration Items Incremental Input When changing a graphic specify incremental coordinates in the minus direction e Specifying coordinates Based on a placed graphic position regarded as 0 0 specifying a positive coordinate value in memory moves it in the minus direction and specifying a negative coordinate value moves it in the plus direction When 200 200 is specified under Minus direction Incremental Input the graphic is moved ee as shown below from the initial position Minus direction Initial position e Specifying a number Valid for patterns and graphic call Based on a placed pattern or graphic number regarded as 0 specifying a positive value calls a pattern or a graphic of a smaller number and specifying a negative value calls a pattern or a graphic of a greater number 3 Pattern No 3 we No6 No 7 airy When 3 is specified under Incremental Input with pattern No 8 placed on the screen pattem No Sis called No Enter a number in this parameter field when Absolute Input Incremental Input or Incremental Input is selected This number designates the order of the allocated memory address Parameter C Ho Setting C Incremental Input P C Incremental Input D o SS O D o 3 si lt Chapter4 Registration Items Parameter Setting Items The following ta
215. d graphic data The basic part area is the area which possesses the part s function The part area is the area covering the whole part which is equivalent to the part s size e Switch part e Num data display part Basic part area Area for numericals only Graphic data Basic part area la switch area Graphic data Part area Dart ara e Bar graph part e Closed area graph part Graphic data Graphic data Part area Basic part area e Display area part Basic part area Graphic data APP3 2 Appendix 3 Part Editing fa Modifying Parts In Screen Data Files This section describes the procedure for modifying parts It is possible to slightly modify parts in screen editing keeping the original parts stored in the part file unchanged Parts Modifying Procedure Click a part placed on the screen Handles are shown around it Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon in the tool bar penal A 70000 1ALEL Screen 0 Edit The Modify Part window is displayed Modify the part Adjust the frame to fit the modified part ifnecessary The part modifying procedure is almost the same as the part editing procedure For more information see Modify Part window page APP3 8 in Editing Procedures for Each Part described in this chapter CE A ARA ES Tr OERE OO 1 zi ABC DEF SE fl Modify Part Screen 0 After
216. d When a file is imported into the ZM 71SE editor white on black or some other color line is used for display as default O Ignore Particular Layer Choose whether or not layers not to be converted are specified Specify the names of such layers instead of their numbers Graphic Library No O Specify When blocks are used in a DXF file choose whether or not they are registered in the graphic library After setting click OK Function 9 Convert to Rich Text Format The contents of the screen data can be converted to the Rich Text file with extensions RTF as the same image as printing This function makes it possible to check the screen setting or the image picture without using paper Finally only the necessary data can be printed out through a word processor application software on a personal computer 10 x S File Edit View Insert Format Help Osa aa al elel a pa A 5 e inlets ial For Help press F1 7 19 Chapter7 Useful Techniques Operation Procedure 1 Click Convert to Rich Text Format in the Tool menu The following dialog is displayed Tod Window x Error Check M System Setting List of Memory Use Memory Use Memory Address Use SE gt TC NetTablefEthenet TC Nethable PLe Screen Image J MultrLanquages Start Paste Bitmap e ONE Fla Conve FT Screen Le Basse Add Video Menu Video Pattern OF o I Graphic Library jo E
217. d Click the Select button The part is shown in the Switch dialog 3 Cancel Clicking the Cancel button closes the parts file and brings up the Switch dialog 4 JUMP Clicking this button brings up the dialog to specify a part number Specify the desired part number and click OK The part is selected 2 23 Chapter2 Screens 9 FEI Click either button to scroll up down the Switch List window 6 M Save Setting When this box is checked part change is possible while the dialog data is saved Thus dialog settings such as memory address or display type do not revert to the default When this box is unchecked the dialog data reverts to the default H a switch or lamp part is changed from 2 notch OFF ON type to 3 notch OFF ON P3 to P8 make sure to uncheck O Save Setting before selecting the 3 notch type 10D 7 Display Pattern This setting is active only when a switch or lamp part is selected The displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns can be shown 8 Comment field This field indicates the comment on the part Comment can be entered only during part editing Open the Switch List window during part editing and click this field It becomes active for comment entry 2 24 Chapter2 Screens Parts Placement Ex Switch 1 Click the Switch icon The Switch dialog is displayed SRCH mE S dE Main Character Detail Customize Color OFF ON Division No
218. d Display oom Display Environment Change All Display Environment Iw Memory Display Redraw 4 79 Chapter4 Registration Items Screen Library Parts of switches lamps entry mode etc that are used in common to multiple screens can be registered in screen libraries Once screen libraries have been registered screens will be created with ease just by placing the libraries Screen Library Structure A maximum of 1 024 screen libraries can be registered The maximum permissible memory for one screen library is 128 KB Screen library No 0 02 01 01 126S ASI MUE No 1023 A maximum of 1 024 screen libraries can be registered Calling a Screen Library Select Screen Library from the Item menu The Screen Library dialog is displayed Specify the screen library number to be opened and click OK Wen System Setting Screen Graphic Library Mult O verlap Data Block Message Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Multi anguages Screen Library wl gt Selmi 3 Cancel Animation 4 80 Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Library Editing ng Most parts valid on screens are valid in screen libraries as well Parts and graphics can be placed in the same manrer as on screens Notes on Editing e The functions below are not valid
219. d by enclosing with the mouse are displayed Check the menu and keep the Item List window open Then enclose the desired item s with the mouse for selection The mouse cursor on the screen changes to a mark with sel as shown below Click the Item List window to make the window active Only the selected items are displayed Screen 5 Edit DATA DISPLAY MENU HH DISPLAY r Item List Screen 5 0 Num Display 00100 27 102 155 133 Function No 1 29 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Hint By Selection can also be selected from the right click menu 3 Click the desired display format Closing the Item List Click the extreme left icon in the menu bar and click Close It is also possible to close the window by clicking the x button at the top right corner of the window E Item List Screen 5 Registration Order 1 1 E z xl amp Restore ib z C 0 0 No 2 Move ib C 0 0 Nord Size 15 90 DEC Minimize 15 H 165 BCD 205 165 BCD W SIGN 205 90 DEC D i SIGN ao am 05 240 focr 5 240 HEX Next ite E 5 315 BIN Grouping Start gt gt gt gt Box Paint 15 95 170 140 Box Paint 15 973 1 0 130 Box Paint 15 98 170 135 Box Paint 15 99 170 134 Box Paint 15 1015 170 132 Box Paint 15 1023 170 131 Box Paint 15 104 5 170 131 Box Paint 15 106 170 127 Box Pa
220. d cells PRIGI 12345 This height is applied to all cels izo 1734 12345 SS 12345 op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 Fe o gt a Q D re cr S PEIRE 12345 PEIRE 12345 e Align Character Cell sizes in a table can be so adjusted that the largest data item fits into a cell It is not necessary to specify the cell in the following manner Specify the table data display part handles are shown select Table Data Display Editing from the Edit menu and execute Align Character EE 5 ess gt 2 2345 3 12345 12345 e Cut This command is used for editing lines or columns The function is the same as that of Cut in the Edit menu e Copy The function of this command is the same as that of Copy in the Edit menu Paste becomes active after copy e Paste The function of this command is the same as that of Paste in the Edit menu When multiple columns or lines are pasted the cell designated as the target is placed at the top of the pasted data A data area larger than the table cannot be pasted 2 45 Chapter2 Screens e Insert This command is used for editing lines or columns When lines are copied or cut selected lines are highlighted they are inserted above the designated target When columns are copied or cut they are inserted on the left of the designated target e Delete This command is used for editing lines or columns The function is the same
221. d from the System Seting menu press the SYSTEM key and then F 1 key on the ZM series The ZM series is brought to the Moduar Jack 1 Editor Port in the Modular STOP mode Main Menu local main screen Jack dialog under System Setting D Y 9 5 Chapter5 Transfer Data Transfer on Ethernet Screen data is transferred on Ethernet while a computer and a ZM series unit are connected via LAN cable Arrangements e LCD control terminal ZM series e Ethernet cable With a cross cable data transfer is possible between a computer and a ZM 300 High function display 1 1 even if they are not on a network e Ethernet communication interface unit ZM 80NU 80NU2 This optional unit is necessary for Ethernet communications with ZM 200 or ZM 43 to 82 Since ZM 300 High function display is equipped with a built in LAN port the optional unit is not necessary Computer 0000000 ZM series S E s With ZM 300 PLC ZM 43 bo 82 ZM 80NU 80NU2 5 6 Chapter 5 Transfer Data Transfer to CF Card For ZM 300 High function display only A CF card to which screen data has been transferred from the ZM 71SE software computer is inserted into a ZM 300 and the data is transferred from the card to the ZM 300 Arrangements e CF card For recommended CF cards see the ZM 300 User s Manual or Chapter 23 CF Cord in the ZM 71SE Instruction Man
222. d is not necessary click on the pull down menu The following lines of text can be reviewed this way so that you can search forthe necessary text x Operacion Preparada OFF sl Operacion Preparada OFF Error Bateria PC Error CPU PC Descompresion de Aire Tapa de Seguridad Descompresion de CO Descompresion de Aire 3 21 Q Q O lt D a gt O CL GA Chapter3 Drawing Tools o oD 3 22 4 Once you have selected the text to import click OK Text is imported into the text field in the Text tab window Ej Dar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Tent Line Box Circle Text Faint Cot Op eracion Preparada OFF Enlarge E BEGG KO Goeee IZ Text File Me Rotate Normal gt Transparent Italic Direction RGT sl Ge Normal 1 4 Bold Shadow Screen Drawing ee Foreground Background Only one line of text can be imported A paragraph delimited with a return a line break in the text file is regarded as one text on the editor Placing Text 1 Enter the desired text in the text field and set text properties enlargement etc 2 Dragging the mouse on the screen draws a dotted frame ofthe same size as the text to be placed ae Drag 3 Release the mouse being dragged in the desired position The textis shown in the position EE Release the mouse 7 Text is shown in the released position Clicking or drag
223. d then Open The bitmap can be previewed in the dialog D Free 00017253 bmp Color Type for Convert Lg C16 C 128 O For information on the setting items in the dialog see the next page 3 The bitmap size is indicated in the dialog Choose the desired number of colors from Color Type for Convert ZM 42 to 82 8 16 or 128 colors ZM 300 8 16 or 128 32 000 colors 4 Click OK A mover tool and a dotted box of the bitmap size are displayed on the screen 5 Click the mouse in the position for placing the bitmap The bitmap is pasted to the screen The same bitmap can be pasted repeatedly by clicking the mouse while the mover tool is displayed on the screen 7 14 TI O op Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Note that the bitmap is pasted each time you click the mouse To cancel bitmap placement click the Select icon and clear the mover tool File Edit Display Draw Batt ltem FIRE LEA Wem Haack gt oh When the size of a bitmap file is too large it is partitioned automatically and stored in several boxes when it is registered in pattern editing The capacity of patterns that can be registered in one box is 128 KB When changing the setting of O Use 3D Parts in the Environment Setting tab window of the Unit Setting dialog the palletis changed and colors ofthe placed bitmap are also changed To reset paste the bitmap again Bitmap Preview Dialog The following setting items are included
224. data Test 237 File Edit Display Window i roa nn ee ok Click first File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data Test 237 oi Hold down the SHIFT key and click l 6 Drag one of the selected screen to the copy target box All the selected screens are copied to the target file window at one time by releasing the mouse Ed 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data 2m3 1sa 237 File Edit Display Window Ce dees ix 017 0 14 gt Fl File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data 2m371sa 237 uow peue oi 7 31 Chapter7 Useful Techniques Io 7 32 7 When selecting screens to be copied individually click the screens one by one while holding down the CTRL key E 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data Test 237 File Edit Display Window Dae mes o F G e oF File Manage Screen Copy Source File F 2M300data Test 237 8 Drag one of the selected screens to the copy target box All the selected screens are copied to the target file windowat one time by releasing the mouse Even if screens to be copied are selected individually their copies appear in the consecutive boxes in the target file window Change toa Different Item 1 Select Change Display from the Display menu with the screen list window open 2 The Change Display dialog is disp
225. der number of each copied part check this option M e Step Specify the increment when increasing the display order number of each copied part 1 36 IOC Chapter 1 Basic Operation Memory INC This setting is effective when using a switch amp or data part as the copy source Specify the top memory address forthe copy source Memory addresses are allocated forthe number of copies Memory and Step become active Memory Specify the top memory address of the copy source Step Specify the increment in words or bits when increasing the memory address consecutively When 1 is entered the allocated addresses are incremented by one word or bit When 2 is entered the allocated addresses are incremented by two words or bits Copy to the Selected Screen The item selected on the edit window or on the Item List window can be pasted on multiple screens at one time Follow the steps described below 1 2 3 Click or drag the desired item onthe screen Or click the item on the Item List window Select Copy to Selected Screen from the Edit menu The following dialog is displayed Specify the Target to Paste 3 x V Not Paste to the Unregistered Screens Range Designation rar 4 Cancel M Not Paste to the Unregistered Screens When the selected item should not be pasted on unregistered screens check this box To paste the selected item on unregistered screens remove the chec
226. dicated with x Ifa closed area graphic does not have a vertex in the vertical direction from the paint start position the graphic cannot be painted correctly See the figures shown below Ex as is not a vertex in this position Direction E wm mm ml mm mm mm mm mm mm Direct ion Th IS area Loa a camot be painted Paint start position lt 6 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part See the figures shown below gt 7 Close the Modify Part window Closed Area Graph Part Edit window 8 The former edit window is displayed The modified closed area graph part appears in the window APP3 28 Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Display Area Parts for Data Sampling Display area parts for data sampling are required for data sampling inthe sampling mode A display area part for data sampling consists of a basic part 3 6 area graphic data and data display Data display AAA AAA CY 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 12341 Graphic data i Part AN 1 This data display differs from data display part It exists only in a display area part for data sampling Data displays are located on the top line of the basic part area The position can be changed horizontally Basic part area It can be moved horizontally On y 1234 1234 1234 4 1234 7 1234 A maximum of 16 data di
227. displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns can be shown Select the desired switch part and click Select The selected part is previewed in the Switch dialog The above step completes a part selection A For other settings such as memory see the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function APP2 12 Appendix2 3D Parts Numerical Data Display Character Display Message Display Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter Statistic Grap h Closed Area Graph and Calendar Parts This section explains the procedure for setting 3D numerical data display parts Also follow the same procedure when placing the other parts 1 Click the Num Data Display icon ES U y Main Type Char Prop Detail Customize dy Division No p 3 Memory Parts Select Cancel pp 2 The Num Display dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button 3 The Num Display List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Num Display List E Program Files ZM715 PARTS Parts 23P x 0001 0002 wo TRANSPAREN w0 TRANSPAREN w0 TRANSPAREN Cancel 0003 0004 0005 ua TRANSPAREN w 0 TRANSPAREN TRANSPAREN w 0 TRANSPAREN TRANSPAREN 0006 0007 0008 70 TRANSPARENT TRANSPARENT w 0 TRANSPAREN TRANSPAREN W O TRANSPAREN TRANSPAREN Click the Parts File button APP2 13 Appendix2 3D Parts 4 The Select parts file dialog is displayed Selec
228. dit window is displayed pp Ee the numeral O for the switch in gt ol the Character tab window of the partit Switch dialog 6 Create additional switches for a keypad Follow steps 3 to 5 APP3 16 Appendix 3 Part Editing L Characters on a Keypad h When Text Num is selected from the switch function pull down menu enter characters numerals for the switches in the Character tab window of the Switch dialog When a switch is pressed the character or numeral of the switch is recognized Characters numerals registered in the graphic library can also be used for switches in screen editing See Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function In this case however the character or numeral is not recognized whena switch is pressed L Multiple Copies h When creating a keypad consisting of the same shape switches create one switch and copy it using the multi copy function Then set their functions and characters numeralsin the Switch dialog Several switch parts for a keypad are registered as a keypad part When placing a keypad part in screen editing the switch parts are grouped To relocate the switch parts ungroup a keypad part into single parts Joa Editing Graph Parts 33 tt 33 6 There are seven different types of graph parts bar graph pie graph panel meter statistics graph bar statistics graph pie
229. drag its handle until the part is enlarged as desired Select the calendar part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 8 The Modify Part window for the calendar part is displayed Edit the part or change its size 9 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part YY MM DD YY MM DD KH The frame automatically Created text fits the calendar part including the text 10 Close the Modify Part window Calendar Part Edit window 11 The former edit window is displayed The modified calendar part appears in the window Editing Display Area Parts The display area part is used in relay mode or in message mode to display messages or in graphic mode to display graphics Editing Procedure The procedure for editing display area parts is almost the same as used for overlap parts See the procedure explained on page APP3 7 However the frame setting is used for display area parts Unlike overlap parts the basic part area and the part area of the display area part are independent This makes it necessary to reset the frame in editing Graphic O Part area Basic part area APP3 33 o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa Appendix 3 Part Editing Printing the Part Part File An explanation of how to print out the contents of t
230. dure Import of Screen nee into Word Seet e NEE FUNCIONE Paste BILMAD E Operation Procedure usos traerla tii Bila Preview Dialog ei iii FUNCIONO DXF File CONVEN 24 4 va Geta ds Operation Procedure comicidad di ii Detail Seting DPS eek aes eee ee ee Function 9 Convert to Rich Text Format Operation leie nl Function 10 Add Video Menu Function 11 Custom Part Operation Procedure Se Registration in Bregen Parts File Pasting a Custom Part to the n E E E O A Function 12 Tray Operation is Ee Registration Deletion letzen EEN Pasting Partin Tay EE Tay Display C Hange td o Sd Funcion 13 Tag Ke EH Ele Managemen esia daa Pile Management QUIN dl ect Deeds File Management FUNCTIONS A AE EE EE EE coco EE EE EE rr cor Files for File Management EE Screen Data File Management Part File Manage mentada a A da at A abana lise File Management Screen Data tie cnn no anes no reesen essere me Copying Screens between Windows Change to a Different Wem PRET Copying Items by Designating ieni Mob Change to a DIT e lll Other Setting Items a File Menu for File Ma as at File Management Part File EE a eciet es aah ca Aenean oh OO File Menu for Parts File IEN Geen HESE File Management File N 7 39 File Management File Deletion Au AE EE AE AE AE EE conc EE EE anna ue AO File Management File Division and Combination e LAT File Did ea eee SAA File Combine ez ii daa cs AZ
231. dure see Installation attached to the ZM 71SE editor Starting o S gt O y 5 Q O cr 5 de Start your computer and check that Windows runs correctly 1 Click the Start button of Windows and click Programs Zm 71se then ZM 71S It is possible to start from the ZM 71SE shortcut icon A 2 The ZM 71SE initial screen is displayed Eile 1 1 Chapter1 Basic Operation Opening a File Opening a New File 1 Click the New icon in the tool bar or select New from the File menu File L Dinew ct OD a gt Open gt fed et Ge amp ol EI Transfer or Send AT command Printer Setting E Print Ctrl P CF Card Manager File Managing 2 The Edit Model dialog is displayed Select the model name and click OK Edit Model 2 377 640 480 ZM 38 5 800 600 ZM 37 5 800 600 Z M 37 T 640 480 ZM 36 5 800 600 2M 35 D 640480 ZM 82 800600 12 1 model 2M 725 800 600 10 4 model ZM 72 640 480 10 4 model ZM 52 640480 7 7 model ZM 42 320240 5 7 model 640 480 16 color reservation 640 480 8 color 640 480 Monochrome 320 240 16 color 320 240 M onochrome IT For the edit models see Chapter 1 System Setting in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 3 The Select PLC Type dialog is displayed Select the PLC model and click OK Select PLC Type SHARP JW series
232. e e Open Choosing this command brings up an existing part file name list e Save Choosing this command saves the most recent version of the opened part file and deletes its previous contents e Save As Choosing this command saves the opened part file with a new file name different from the original e Printer Setting Choosing this command allows you to specify the settings for printing a part file For more information see page APP3 34 e Print Choosing this command prints out the part files For more information see page APP3 34 e CF Card Manager The CF card manager starts For more information see the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function e File Managing Choosing this command allows you to copy parts between part files For more information see page APP3 36 e Quit Part Edit Choosing this command closes the part edit window e Quit Application Choosing this command quits the editor Edit Menu The Edit menu commands are almost the same as those for screen data files except for the Place New Part command e Place New Part A new part is placed in the opened part edit window The New Part icon functions in the same manner ZG EPS Sie ee mw eC APP3 38 Appendix 3 Part Editing Display Menu The Display menu commands are the same as those for screen data files except for the Display Environment command e Display Environment Open the Menu Dsp tab window in th
233. e Display Environment dialog The Background option can be used to change the base color of a part edit window Display Environment x Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others I MLIB Mark Disp y o r m 2 5 O lt D 5 c Handle Color H Mii Background Edit Part Menu e Overlap Choosing this command allows you to edit overlap parts e Switch Choosing this command allows you to edit switch parts e Lamp Choosing this command allows you to edit lamp parts e Num Display Choosing this command allows you to edit numerical data display parts Char Display Choosing this command allows you to edit character display parts Message Disp Choosing this command allows you to edit message display parts Key Pad Choosing this command allows you to edit keypad parts Bar Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit bar graph parts Pie Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit pie graph parts Panel Meter Choosing this command allows you to edit panel meter parts Stat Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit statistic graph bar parts APP3 39 Appendix 3 Part Editing e Stat Pie Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit statistic graph pie parts e Trend Graph Choosing this command allows you to edit trend graph parts e Data Sampling Disp Area Choosing this command allows you to edit display area parts for data sampling e Calendar
234. e Screen LIB icon brings up the dialog shown below screen library list Sam _ Cancel 0003 0004 0005 E E WE 0006 0008 E E WE Placing Screen Library Element 1 Inthe Screen Library List wndow click the desired screen 0007 screen library list 0002 2 _ Cancel 0000 E B 0003 0004 0005 e To call the screen click the JUMP button 3 37 O o 5 O lt OD er gt O o 0 Chapter3 Drawing Tools 2 Click Place A dotted line box is displayed with the cursor 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The screen is placed with the SLIB mark at the clicked position Immediately after placement the LIB mark is attached to the cursor Clicking the mouse again places the same screen as long as the LIB mark is displayed To cancel screen placement click the Select icon The LIB mark disappears loc v The reference position of placing a screen is the offset position on the screen AS library For more information on the offset see Chapter 4 Registration Items SLIB position on the screen OFF position in screen library 3 38 S TZ Registration Outline of Registration eme Al Contents of Registration Items e 4 2 OC CS A e Caling a SES EE 4 3 ej o o AAA ZX A 4 3 Graphic Library e AA Graphic Library Structure cono nono meree anno me 4 4 Calling the Graphic Library oocococccnonc
235. e Screen List Window Screens can be moved copied or deleted easily on the Screen List window Clicking the desired screen on the Screen List window highlights the screen number Screen List Screen e Sp MAIN MENU AUTODEMO 5 DATA DISPLAY DATA TABLE 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 gt Ma 10 i Sp SSR EEF ENTRY_2 DATA BLOCK CHAR ENTRY 1 25 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Right clicking brings up the drop down menu including Copy Paste Delete etc Selecting a command performs the selection action Screen List Screen Un wo da at SO E Cut Ctrlex a SC Bee MAIN MENU AUTODEMO IEA ve 6 Delete Select All DATA TABLE 13 e TN Li al mmm SESR E 3 ENTRY_2 DATA BLOCK CHAR ENTRY 15 16 17 To select multiple screens click the top screen hold down the SHIFT key and click the last screen The selected screen numbers are highlighted Click Screen List Screen 3 S i le Een MAIN NEN AUTODEMO DATA A DISPLAY Hold down the Shift key and click 1 26 Chapter 1 Basic Operation It is possible to copy the desired screen by dragging it to an empty screen position TREND GRAPH 33 N TREND SMPL DATA SMP
236. e bitmap file ans A 2 Will register to Mo 0 No Cancel 4 Clicking No brings up the Specify Bitmap Read No dialog Enter the top pattern number to be imported and click OK The bitmap data is imported Specify Bitmap Re Start No D Cancel Dialog for Bitmap Import O Dither When this option is checked dithering can be performed to make the colors of the bitmap closer to the original The option is invalid when 32K is selected for Color Type for Convert D Free 00017253 bmp Color Type for Convert ca 16 128 O Pseudo Gradation Depiction in pseudo gradation is performed With the use of 3 D parts on the ZM 42 to 82 series however this option and Dither cannot be selected Pseudo gradation is to be set automatically 4 50 Chapter 4 Registration Items Detail This option brings up the detailed menu for Pseudo Gradation as the following D Free 00017253 bmp TE sl Reduction of colors Cancel om Ce Adaptive Error Diffusion Eror Diffusion Dither C Nathing Convert Diffusion 0 E Redraw Color E E E 196 278 Green 8 et St Iv Pseudo Gradatior Ordered Dithering 0 D Ka gt Color Type for Convert Pos CIE e 128 vn Adaptive Error Diffusion Error diffusion adapted to each individual part of the image can be performed This function places emphasis on smoothness of image more than the following Error Diffusion does Erro
237. e procedure for placing and setting parts from tool bars Setting Procedure Ex Relay Click the Relay Mode icon on the tool bar The relay mode tool bar is displayed at the upper right nNo oy Josh DEF Ze aw If the tool bar is hidden from view drag it so that it comes into view entirely Dae loon Sk 0 0 14 Sg Division Mo 0H Renn EE EAT ZA Ba A A IS OA E A 2 28 Chapter2 Screens The relay mode tool bar consists of the following icons Display area Switch Lamp Up down switch Detail Icon In the case of a tool bar containing a Detail icon its setting must be made to make the part operable Start setting from the Detail icon 1 Click the Detail icon on the relay mode tool bar 0 o er lt D on a S Si U T O O 3 O 5 fb 2 The Relay dialog is displayed When the dialog setting is concluded click OK Main Char Prop Detail Division No i Memory Dom 00 00 o Start Message GNo jo No 0 D 1 d Executing Relays ei Action rea Area e Lines per Relay fi a Sub Action No v Screen Block p lt q The Relay Mode icon is registered in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen IT For more information on the tool box refer to the following 2 29 Chapter2 Screens e About the Part auxiliary tool box Modification When the Relay dialog from the Deta
238. e desired bitmap file click the Refer button and select the desired one The bitmap file is copied to the ZM 71SE Parts User folder and displayed under Bitmap Selection Main Character Customize Color E Flash Bitmap Selection Delete Use this button to delete Custom Bitmap pe unnecessary bitmap files OFF Jon from the AZ2M7 1SE Parts User folder Deleting a file currently being used causes error No 91 on the ZM series Parts stored in the AZM7 1SE Parts User folder are listed File arm Cancel Apply 4 The selected bitmap and its file name are displayed The file is opened In the case of a lamp part as many tabs as the notch number of the part are provided therefore a bitmap can be selected individually Perform step 3 in each tab window Main Character Detail Customize FT Flash Bitmap Selection Delete OFF MV Custom Bitmap Refer Ca D arrowooft File arrowoon Cancel Apply IA For information on O Flash refer to Flash Function page APP23 in this chapter APP2 24 Appendix2 3D Parts Notes on Usage e f the ZM71SE Parts User folder in the computer you are going to operate for screen editing does not store a bitmap used in the screen data the bitmap file is automatically created at the time of opening the screen data and is registered in the folder If another bitmap file having the same name already exits the above men
239. e fe det deg SS Se pan in T 6 Bell e Bel r Bell Wall Dee iech r r r Bell ee La Part redes mat property eet Cross eference 6 10 Chapter 6 Print Ex Graphic Library ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Cross reference Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name DAZM 300datalZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 Bee Capit Library Ai Wu BR aii Bea Lee Nees When Animation is Checked ZM 71SE Ver 2 00 DATE 2002 02 26 TIME 11 30 58 Selected PLC MITSUBISHI ACPU Port File Comment File Name DAZM 300datalZM 300DEMO_ZM 381SA Z37 Ter Amimatian Fran SGnipma at kon Ao D D 5 er H Si O el E 0 6 11 Chapter6 Print M EMO Please use this page freely 6 12 Chapter 7 Iseful Techniques EE Cal Be Ment LEi EE 7 1 Function 1 Error Check oo cee cece cess cess sense cess cono reser cono es 7 2 Function 2 Memory ke 7 4 Function 3 Memory Address Uee cess cece cece enes cono ee 7 5 Function 4 Change Memory uses ccc cece sesse cee cess conca cee no 7 7 Function 5 Copy Image to Patten 7 10 Function 6 Copy Image to Clip Board ccoo cee eee 7 12 Function 7 Paste Bitmap 0 00 nuso cee cece cence cono cono conan ees 7 14 Function 8 DXF File Convert s a s nusas aese oense aare oere seere seee 7 17 Function 9 Convert to Rich Text Format 7 19 Function 10 Add Video Menu 7 21 Function 11 Custom bart 7 21
240. earching downward from the cursor position are replaced with the string for Replace with When searching the Message Edit window entirely move the cursor to the top o in advance Message Display Environment Setting The Display menu contains commands for messages Font Bold When this command is selected message characters are displayed in the bold style similar to the Bold option available on screens Under line This command is checked as default Only the registered messages are underlined For registered messages containing spaces etc this command can be used when counting the number of characters in the messages Display ltem System Setting Tool Y Tool Bar Iw Status Bar Jump e Beview mb Next Dr Skip Font Bold FA Under line Display Environment Change All Display Environment Display Change Display Environment Selecting this command bring up the Display Environment dialog This setting is valid only when the language selection function is in use IT For more information on the function see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 4 35 lt OD CO ge Q Q D Chapter4 Registration Items Display Change This command is valid only when alarm display in the sampling function is in use Selecting this command switches the display as the following File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window PLACAS NAL wo Fe
241. ect button brings up the Overlap List window Select the desired part and click Select The previous Overlap Normal dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Overlap coordinates X Y 0 0 is the reference point A and Y coordinates are at intervals of 4 dots and 1 dot respectively 2 34 Chapter2 Screens Editing in Overlap When placing items such as switch parts or graphics change over the editing layer from the base to an overlap 1 Right click the mouse The menu is displayed Select Overlap 0 or 1 or 2 The editing layer is now changed from the base to an overlap Icons for drawing and parts except for overlap become active U Q gt Undo Ctrl Z a Redo Ctrl y y a 3 gs de Gut Cerler y 3 Copy Ctra Gi Paste Ctrl V D Delete 3 Ch ON Grid am Grid Display S Grid Type gt Q lv Base Overlap 0 bh G Overlap 1 2 Overlap 2 Hide overlaps with Base checked Ghange All On line Editing a On line Run 2 Place desired parts or graphics on the overlap When an overlap is selected as the editing layer the overlap cannot be moved or enlarged reduced To allow these operations select Base from the right click menu 10 L Editing Layer SW When creating a screen the target to be edited is one of four layers consisting of the base screen overlap No 0 overlap No 1 and overlap No 2 When st
242. ee Chapter 1 Basic Operation Chapter2 Screens Screen Structure Screen Resolution Screen resolution varies with models of LCD control terminal There are three kinds as shown below X axis dots 0 319 639 799 Y axis dots o LO e D D mD 5 O 3 CH O D O mD San ZM 42 43 479 599 ZM 36 S 37 S 38 S ZM 72S 82 2 5 Chapter2 Screens Lines and Columns Lines and columns are used as units to designate coordinates of overlaps or sizes of character displays 0 8 16 24 dots Column 1 column 8 dots 1 line 20 dots ZM 352D 37 T ZM 52 72 80 24 ZM 36 S 37 S 38 S ZM 7 28 82 Line Screen Capacity Available memory on a screen is limited to 256 KB for the ZM 300 series and to 128 KB for the ZM 42 to 82 series One screen data file is capable of storing 1 024 screens The memory capacity of one screen data file differs depending on the model of LCD control terminal as well as the font type in use IT For more information on the memory capacity of one screen data file see Appendix 1 Fonts Make sure to check the use environment and available memory when registering screens If a screen data file stores a screen exceeding the maximum permissible memory the scre
243. een data files Operation Procedure Opening Closing the List of Memory Use 1 Select Memory Use from the Tool menu 2 The List of Memory Use window is displayed BB List of Memory Use Pale Ea List of Registration Number 0 50 100 es ee Memory Address Use 509780 5775360 byte O Screen 34 O Multi Overlap 74 O MR400 Cal 0 O GraphicO 25 O Data Block 12 O MR400 Register 0 O Graphic1 0 O Message 8 O Modbus Slave Table 0 O Graphic2 0 O Pattern 124 O Animation Frame 0 O Graphic3 Ta O Macro Block 78 O Graphic4 0 O Page Block 24 O Graphic5 1 O Direct Block 0 O Graphic6 0 O Screen Block 0 O Graphic 0 C Ex Char 16 0 O Graphics 34 O Ex Char 32 0 O Graphicg9 4 O Data Sheet 0 O Screen Library 33 O Temp PLC2Way 0 3 To close this window click the x Close button at the upper right or the click the upper left icon and select Close Bringing Up the Detailed List of Edit tems 1 Click the box of the desired item on the List of Memory Use window 2 The list of items is displayed The boxes with registration are shown with an oF 3 To go back to List of Registration Number click the O List box BB List of Memory Use Pale Ea No of Screens 34 Memory Address Use 509780 5775360 byte L The list of the desired items can also be chosen from the Display menu while AS the List of Memory Use window is d
244. een data is changed When the editor software ZM 71SE has been updated choose I F Driver for transfer to the ZM series IO D Transferring Procedure 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu Za The list below shows PLC models and their corresponding I F drive files PLC model QnH A series CPU QnH Q series CPU MelQHCpQ tpb MelQHCpA tpb 9 21 LD 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed Select I F Driver for Transfer Data Q Oh f i f g D 3 Click the PC gt button The Open dialog is displayed Select the I F driver 5 file corresponding to the PLC model Q D 4 Look in Tpa El Kal cl laa Fam3_e tpb laa FlexPc_J tpb laa Juy_f tpb 2 al Fam3r_fl tpb al General ob al Keyence t D al FL_Net tpb al GESnpx tpb al Kopo_GE al FlexCom tpb al HidicH tpb al Koyo_K tp al FlexCpu tpb al HidicS tpb al KoyoKSeq a FlexPc tpb a HidicS_J tpb la Ky700Cpu e File name Files of type iF driver TPB D Cancel Chapter5 Transfer MITSUBISHI QnH Q series CC Link Mel CC tpb QnH Q series Ethernet MelQnA_E tpb FX series CPU MelFx tpb FX2N series FX2N seres CPU FX1 See series CPU JW series series Sharp tpb HIDIC S 10 ABS HIDICS10 ABS O Y OKOG AWA Yokogawa tpb FA PAAR FA A aoo FA M3 FA MSR Ethernet FAM3_E tpb FA M3R aaa FAM3R_FL tpb CP9200SH MP900 FUJI MICRE X F series MicrexF tpb MICREX F series ZM 41 70 comp
245. elect Find from the Edit menu The Find dialog is displayed Find ax Find what Emdi West Direction Cancel IT Match case C Up Ge Down Enter the string to be searched for into the Find what field o 4 Select an option from Direction Select Up when searching the window upward from the cursor position Select Down when searching the window downward from the cursor position 5 Check O Match case to make a distinction between upper case and lower case letters during searching messages Clicking Find Next starts searching the window in the selected direction O Replacement 1 In the Message Edit wndow check the position of the mouse cursor 2 Select Replace from the Edit menu The Replace dialog is displayed Replace Find what Fira Text Replace with Heplace Replace all Cancel IT Match case 3 Enter the desired strings respectively into the Find what and Replace with fields Check O Match case to make a distinction between upper case and lower case letters during searching messages Chapter 4 Registration Items 4 Clicking Find Next starts searching the window downward from the cursor position When Replace is clicked the string for Find what if found during searching downward from the cursor position is replaced with the string for Replace with and search continues When Replace All is clicked all the strings for Find what if found during s
246. em modular socket E EE E ff oa cin F 7 al EE EA Send side LI Telephone line D modular socket RS 232C cable straight 3 accompanying the modem ai 5 2 gt n Moduar cable D Mode m PW ER OH CD DA O 0000 accompanying the modem LINE REN Er gt 7 Connection between ZM Series and Modem e Connect the ZM 80C to the modular jack MJ1 on the back of the ZM series e Connect the RS 232C cable accompanying the modem to the RS 232C connector on the back of the modem e The cable to connect the ZM 80C and the RS 232C cable accompanying the modem should be arranged for by the customer Cross Cable Connection The ZM 80C is a cross cable To bring the signal connection to a straight state manufacture another cross cable to be comected Spin connector Modem 9 pin ZM 80C 9 pin Signal Pin No Sign al Pin No Eig Sea Pinte 2 of the modem eee For amodem that is not capable of flow control setting short circuit RTS and CTS 9 37 Chapter5 Transfer 25 pin connector Modem 25 pin ZM 80C 9 pin of the modem E er Fora modem thatis not capable of flow control setting short circuit RTS and CTS e mm pm mm mm mm mm mm mmm me Connection between Modem and Telephone Line Connect the modular cable accompanying the modem between the modular jack LINE for telephone line on the back of the modem and the telephone line
247. em Comm Baud Rate using the arrow buttons T V Press the Setting Finished button to finish the selection Options 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 After the Setting Finished button is pressed the switches and function switches on the Main Menu screen do not work for 15 seconds To L Pressing the Setting Finished button sende AT commande to the modem AS automatically and sets the baud rate between the ZM series and the modem 3 The Main Menu local main screen is displayed automatically Modem Connect Mode automatically appears under Editor MJ1 4 When a modem is not used for screen data transfer specify Not Used for Modem Comm Baud Rate For screen data transfer while a computer is connected with ZM 80C specify Not Used for Modem Comm Baud Rate TOD Stat No 192 168 1 6 PORT 10000 MAC 0050FF000035 Y POWER Pressing Editor MJ1 brings up the Extended Function Setting screen Ed Seting Valu Ethernet Informati Trans Speed 10E tat No PORT 10000 MAC 0050FFO00 Pressing Setting Finished brings up the Main Menu local main screen again 5 36 Chapter 5 Transfer Description of Connections Receive side RS 232C cable straight ZM 80C cross cable RS 232C cable accompanying the modem 1 Mode m PW ER OH CD DA 00000 ZM series lt 2 Modular cable Telephone line ph accompanying the mod
248. en For more information on XOR effects see Chapter 9 Graphic Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 3 8 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Parallelogram 1 Click the Parallelogram icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the desired options for O Paint Foreground Background Tile and Line Type Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale buli Tent Line Box Circle Text Faint Dot Foreground Background D W Paint Frame Color kg Frame Tile Line Tye Ee Special Edit y When M Paint is checked O Frame becomes active It is possible to select whether or not to draw the frame of the painted box When this option is checked Frame Color can be selected OP aint Y Paint M Paint O Frame M Frame LJ MY 2 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point of the upper side Drag Start point End point 3 Drag from the end point of the upper side to the corresponding point of the lower side y DH DH e DH Drag 4 Clicking draws the parallelogram 3 9 O o 5 O lt OD er gt O o 0 Chapter3 Drawing Tools Polygon 1 Click the Polygon icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Text Faint Dot Ol o E GR
249. en editing a pattern it is possible to view the actual screen background color When you click this command the Color dialog is displayed Select the desired color and click OK The pattern edit window background color changes Display Transform Draw ltem Sy Color lx Tool Bar j Basic colors Y Status Ba a a mE Jump Mi TL PI WE PS g s WI P E Em WPS zm tel tt i A e S EERE A E E Custom colors COC OE Ore fe ee ef ee Define Custom Colors gt gt Geet 4 53 Chapter4 Registration Items Placing a Pattern Registered patterns can be placed on screens or in the graphic library using the Pattern icon on the drawing tool bar IA For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools oda 312 After a pattern placement the Pattern No can be changed and Rotate Mirror operations can be performed Double click the placed pattern within 4 088 dot size or select it with handles and click Detail Prop Change icon The Pattern dialog is displayed Pattern Pattern Ho E Refer Rotate Mirror Normal sl Cancel Size of a Placed Pattern e If a pattern size is 128 KB or less the maximum permissible size setting is 800 dots horizontal and 600 dots vertical However if Rotate Mirror operation is performed on a pattern placed on the screen orin the graphic library the size is limited to 4 088 dots or less pattern size X size x Y size When animation is performed
250. en may not work normally after the file is transferred to the LCD control terminal Make sure to create every screen within the capacity Iloc If a screen data file exceeds the maximum permissible memory an attempt to transfer the file causes an alarm message The size is too large to communicate and results in transmission failure Iloc Chapter2 Screens Operation Environment Setting This chapter explains the environment setting procedure for screen editing Background Color Setting Follow the procedure below to set a screen background color Select Screen Setting from the Edit menu The Screen Setting dialog is displayed Screen Setting i E Ei P1 P2 Superimpose Setting Animation Wallpaper Setting F Back Color F AO EA fav E Xi Da E7 7 RA O CH DI mp O gt a lt lt O 3 D gt Ap CO D mme EL gt O Item Select Memory Receive Slice Level jo Options F foreground color B background color and T tile under Back Color are provided to set the screen background For more information on the color setting procedure see page 2 57 Other Screen Setting Items The Screen Setting dialog has the following items as well P1 Tab Window Switch Output This option is active only when the LCD control terminal switch type is the matrix type For more information see Chapter 3 Switch in the ZM 71SE
251. eries v When pressing the space key with the memory selected by cursor the bit device can be reversed Regarding the way to reverse multiple bits simultaneously see page 8 20 8 18 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Testing Word Memory The procedure for changing the numerical value of the data display is described here As an example the value D100 will be changed 1 Double click on the setting value on the data display Double click here 2 The Write Memory dialog is displayed 3 Enter the desired number into the box 4 If necessary change the format of the value that you enter As an example 123 is entered in decimal notation de Write Memory A FFF A INCIEMENO GE AR MAREA FEAPS IS SEET 5 Click on OK to close the dialog 6 123 is displayed on the ZM series 8 19 Y 3 CG O 3 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 8 20 NM Setting Resetting Multiple Bits Simultaneously 1 2 3 Select the bit memory that will be set reset multiple selections possible Select sequentially by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking the mouse Select randomly by holding down the CTRL key and clicking the mouse Pressing the space bar sets the bits Pressing the space bar again resets the bits Entering Numerical Values for Multiple Pieces of Memory Simultaneously 1 Select the memory that you wil set numerical values for multiple selections possib
252. es and Placement Part Types This section explains the functions and types of available parts as well as notes on their placement on the screen There are the following types of parts The display area and keypad parts are not included in this table These parts are available with MP parts and do not function independently GREG EN NE EI EN EN IN SF CEC EN ERR Tbe daa aspay O KSE ANN NA Rear DMP message Pe ety DMP ECC EN CACT E NGN CL NN NENE EN NE ECN NN NE EI AN lrereet EN esaa EN DMP ore me eanes E CMP Trendsamping O me Datasamping O CMe Btsarping ANN me Reaysamping E a SSES E MEAN E EN me memopad RSC E rearme e Memovers 0 o 3 P lt D n D o H T O O O 5 E Chapter2 Screens Animation Not available wth ZM 42 to 82 and ZM 352D Video display Available wth ZM 300 only JPEG display Available wth ZM 300 only SP Single part functioning singly selected from a parts file MP Combined parts functioning in combination with other parts I Item functioning as per dialog setting Screen library is not a part It is used to place a screen library element including registered parts etc on screens Before placing a screen library element check its registered items For more information on the screen library see Chapter 4 Registration Items Notes on Parts Placement When placing parts on the screen check available memo
253. es will pri a change switch Lamp Data Lanp Trend Sampling LS 4 a 8 29 Hi 3 CG a O Q Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 8 30 Right click Menu A menu like the one shown here is displayed when the right mouse button is clicked Cut B Copy a Faste i Delete Change Display Address Change Setting Value Display Type Setting ltem Setting Comment Setting However the following menu items are only active for a new file e Cut e Paste e Delete e Change Display Address e Item Setting e Comment Setting Help Menu Help functions are accessible from the Help menu Information such as the operation method can be displayed on the personal computer by clicking on Help Index and Help Topics Additionally version information can be checked by clicking About V Simulator or the About V Simulator icon Help Help Index Help Topics About Simulator Bilon 2 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Error List The following errors may arise on the ZM series screen during communication between the ZM series and simulator computer Communication Error Error code received 05 Computer Simulator running
254. exts on switch and lamp Numerical data Numerical data display Variable display Relay mode Message in display area Vanable in displa y messages on switch and lamp area Limited to 12 points on switch and lamp INES Relay sub Message in display area Message mode Message in display area Message in display area Variable in display messages on switch and lamp messages on switch and lamp area Limited to 12 Requirements Block is Requirements Block or points on switch and selected for Action select and Message is selected for lamp Internal for Command Action select and External for Command Limited to 12 points Data sampling Numerical data and character displays Bit sampling Message in display area Relay sampling as mentioned for Relay as mentioned for mode Relay mode Limited to 12 points Alarm display Message in display area Limited to 12 points numerical data display Memory card mode File number and record File name andrecord name Variable number displays in display displays in display area area text Time display Time display Table data display Numerical data display and text Character and message Variable in drawing displays Refer to the notes on the following page APP1 10 Appendix 1 Fonts Q In the case of the matrix type ZM 72 82 Spacing of characters is different between the matrix type and the analog type O The matrix type shows c
255. fer Device p Transfer Data C Display Mere Sereen Data 2 The Transfer dialog is displayed C IF Driver Select Memory card for Transfer F Use Simulator sz diced Device and Screen Data for A A es eye Transfer Data A Oo 3 Click the Detail Setting button ae S i Select a computer serial port to be he kodon comp Transfer computer and the memory card ZM 1REC Click OK ES GG 4 Click the PC lt gt button Screen data comparison starts between the memory card ZM 1REC and the Detail Seting computer used anda baud rate between the EE Screen Data Transfer between Memory Card ZM 1REC and LCD Control Terminal ZM Series With a ZM 300 For the description of screen data transfer between a memory card ZM 1REC and a ZM 300 see Chapter 2 ZM 300 Operations in the ZM 300 User s Manual With a ZM 42 to 82 For the description of screen data transfer between a memory card ZM 1REC and a ZM 42 to 82 see the ZM 42 to 82 User s Manual Ip Operation of ZM 42 to 82 Main Menu in 1 Hardware Specifications Chapter 5 Transfer Transfer of Other Data This section explains options for Transfer Data other than Screen Data I F Driver Extension tpb Only when the screen data is transferred to the ZM series first the I F driver file is also transferred Afterwards I F driver file transfer will be executed automatically if the PLC model in the scr
256. fer the table data to the ZM series 9 27 0 O Q D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L Chapter5 Transfer Ladder Comm Prg This option is valid when Modular Jack 1 or 2 Ladder Tool is selected for QnH CPU Port as PLC model setting When the screen data is transferred to the ZM series first the ladder communication program is also transferred automatically It is not transferred automatically afterwards When the editor software ZM 71SE has been updated choose Ladder Comm Prg for transfer to the ZM series Modbus Comm Prg This option is valid when Modbus slave communication is in use When the screen data to be transferred contains Modbus slave communication settings that are differentfrom the settings in the ZM series the Modbus communication program is transferred Afterwards the program transfer will be executed automatically if any changes are made to the Modbus slave communication settings in the screen data When the editor software ZM 71SE has been updated choose Modbus Comm Prg for transfer to the ZM series System Updating 5 28 The Up date of System button is provided for updating the entire ZM series system It is recommended that system updating be executed when the editor software ZM 71SE has been updated The files below are updated by the Up date of System button e F driver file e ZM series system program e Font data Follow the procedure below 1 Click the Transfer icon or
257. for drawing and parts except for Overlap become active File Edit Display Draw Part ltem System Setting Tool Window D SAlam gl 2 0 14 amp CI E MON E wile Mo wer b Pa S RR rhea Mine co Bi EI Oe ig 3 Place desired parts or graphics on the overlap When an overlap is selected as the editing layer the overlap cannot be moved or enlarged reduced To allow these operations select Base from the right click menu 1O _ 4 22 Chapter 4 Registration Items Other Settings Make the following settings as desired for multi overlap Base Screen Display During multi overlap editing a screen can be placed behind the overlap to check the actual image Only a multi overlap Multi overap displayed on a screen 2 ef oe l_e l_e l ue s_e owl i 1 5 eJow o lar cel o lar cel lt e I O lt Y D O 1 Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed 2 Check O Base Screen Dsp Screen becomes active 3 Click Screen and specify the desired number 4 Click OK The selected screen is placed behind the overlap Display Environment E Detail Menu Dap Grid Others Edit Lauer Base Switch Lamp OFF Language f venap E Net Neit Woe Detail IT DivNo FP Memory W Area M Paint Dan l Graphic Relay Dep E OM OFF IT Message Dsp Graphic Library Re Wem Ha Data Block Dep FP Display path of Animatio
258. for starting online editing Select On line Editing from the File menu or the right click menu The ON line RUN icon on the icon bar becomes inactive Screen Data Transfer via Modem With modems it is possible to transfer screen data to the ZM series in a remote place Ine 9 32 Preliminaries and Procedure Arrangements Receive side ZM series e Modem Accessories RS 232C cable modular cable AC adaptor e ZM 80C e RS 232C cross cable page 5 37 e ZM 71SE or communication software HyperTerminal etc Send side computer e Modem Accessories RS 232C cable modular cable AC adaptor e ZM 71SE Data Transfer Procedure Receive side ZM series 1 Connect the modem on the receive ZM series side to a computer according to the instruction manual 2 Transfer AT commands to the modem see the following page 3 Disconnect the modem from the computer Connect the modem to the ZM series See page 5 37 4 Seta baud rate between the ZM series and the modem see page 5 36 Send side computer 1 Connect the modem on the send computer side to a computer according to the instruction manual 2 Start up the ZM 71SE software Transfer AT commands to the modem see the following page 3 Make settings for communications between the computer and the modem see page 5 38 4 Transfer screen data Online editing is not allowed Chapter 5 Transfer AT Command Setting 1 Start up the ZM 71SE software
259. ful Techniques In addition to the function as mentioned above the following are also available e Copying files e Deleting files e Partitioning a file occupying large amounts of memory e Combining the partitioned sections of a file Part File Management The desired parts can be copied between part files File Management Screen Data File 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select Screen Data File The File Manage Screen Data dialog is displayed 3 Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target respectively Files can be selected by clicking Reference File Manage Screen Data X r ES Specify copy source and copy target Copy Source FZM s data Test 237 Reference Copy Target Jee 300data m30123 237 UK Cancel 4 Click OK The File Managing dialog is displayed The contents to be displayed vary somewhat depending on the selected item from the dialog File Managing ES ZE gt Please Select Item Graphic Library Multi O verlap Data Block Message Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Animation Frame Animation Tahle z Cancel 1 29 D uow peue oi Chapter7 Useful Techniques Copying Screens between Windows e The copy source and target file wndows are displayed as shown below when any of the following items are selected from the File Man
260. g versions are recommended Forthe hardware version of the ZM 42 to 82 series see LOT NO on the sticker put on the back of the ZM 42 to 82 series Recommended hardware versions SE ZM 72TS F or later Matnx type ZM 82TCM Other than D ZM 72TCM All versions ZM 72DM Other than D If the used ZM 42 to 82 is not in recommended versions ZM 52 72 82 open the Memory Expansion tab window in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu and uncheck O Memory Capacity 2M Without this setting the memory use list Memory use from the Tool menu will not indicate correct values If using 3D parts with the ZM series in any version other than recommended it is recommended that Sharp Corporation optional memory cassette ZM 4EM or ZM 43EM not available with ZM 42D 42L and ZM 62E be installed for memory expansion With either memory cassette ZM 4 EM installed open the Memory Expansion tab window in the Unit Setting dialog from the System Setting menu and select 4M Memory Extension 1 Memory Capacity 3D parts need more memory than memory for ordinary parts Check the current status of memory use by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu Ifa message The size is too large to communicate is given during data transfer even though there is available memory check the hardware version of the ZM series APP2 21 Appendix2 3D Parts Parts File Sharp Corporation provides
261. g word device make settings for display format data length with without sign and ASCII code display non display For the display contents see page 8 13 6 Click OK For adding memory will be added to the end of the sheet For inserting memory will be inserted immediately above the line that was selected Testing Testing will be explained using the screen shown below as an example M103 M104 O 3 WE ESCH ESCH MESS WERT WER PERE WER E9 MES NES 9 2 2 S H e 8 17 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Testing Bit Memory e From the ZM series to the Simulator Use the Simulator to check the output signal As an example M101 is set as output memory on the Auto switch on the far left side 1 Press the Auto switch on the far left side of the ZM series 2 M0101 will turn on at the Simulator The left icon will change from OFF to ON EE p00100 D00101 D00101 D00102 D00102 D00103 D00103 D00104 D00104 D00105 D00105 DOD106 D00106 D00107 D00107 GE 00108 D00109 Po MOO101 En moo101 P M00101 Moo0101 De MOO102 Dt M00102 e From the Simulator to the ZM series Use the Simulator to turn the lamp on As an example M104 is set for lamp 4 on the far right side 1 On the Simulator click the OFF icon for M104 lamp memory 2 The icon will change from OFF to ON Lamp 4 will light up on the ZM s
262. gen TTT Cancel L Trend sampling Trend sampling function in the sampling mode is established on completion of setting Click the Next button 9 12 Chapter 9 Wizard 3 Fourtypes of graphs are previewed Trend Display lt Back Cancel Pull down menu Select a color as desired Click the desired type from the four The upper right type is selected in this example The selected type is enclosed in a red frame Click the Next button 4 The selected display image is displayed Trend Display X Top Memory 00200 H Timing for storing data in buffering area C BitON GUDD SCD Periodic 1 El ES Number of Sample 100 LG lt Back Cancel S Q C O Q GC O m x A 3 2 D n Top Memory Specify a memory address for data sampling D200 is specified in this example Timing for Storing Data in Buffering Area Specify the timing for storing data in the buffering area 1 sec is specified for Periodic in this example Number of Sample Specify the number of sampling times 100 is specified in this example Click the Next button 9 13 Chapter9 Wizard 5 Number of Graph Specify the number of lines in the trend graph 2 is specified in this example Trend Display X Number of Graph gE Points of x direction ho Graph Max po Graph Min g al Word Count Word C 2Word lt Back Cancel
263. ging the mouse again places the same text on the screen To cancel text placement close the Screen Drawing dialog or click the Select icon Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Pattern This command is used when placing a pattern registered in the pattern edit area on the screen INE For pattern registration and pattem edit area see Chapter 4 Registration Items Clicking the Pattern icon brings up the following pattern list window Pattern List 0000 0001 EN M Place gege Cancel a g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Placing Patterns 1 Inthe Pattern List window click the desired pattern x n M Place Place Cancel 0003 0004 To call the pattern click the JUMP button Pattern List 0002 3 23 Chapter3 Drawing Tools 2 Click Place A dotted line box as large as a pattern is displayed with the cursor RO A E E A ee eee Se ee E EN E E 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The pattern is placed Clicking the mouse again places the same pattern on the screen To cancel pattern placement click the Select icon 10D Placing Multiple Patterns Continuously This is useful when placing split registered patterns in alignment 1 In the Pattern List window click the M Place button The Multiple Pattern dialog shown below is displayed The following options are included in the dialog Multiple Pattern El Sta
264. h part Ex The switch and lamp parts on the following screen use 58 patterns 2 notch x 26 pieces 3 notch x 2 pieces 58 Each bottom right value indicates the notch number ofthe part 000 oo HHDH 2 2 o 7 A 0 0 O dy z AE 9 Only one part an Cem is the target to oJ Pi j j count because UU they are of the me l same type in the same size deg 3 notch parts They are the same type partsin different sizes They are counted individually APP2 2 Appendix2 3D Parts Setting Procedure Switch and Lamp This section explains the 3D switch parts setting procedure Also follow the same procedure when placing lamps IT The procedure vares for ZM 42 43 52 62 82 compatible 3D parts 3Dfront z3p 3Dside z3p Referto page APP2 10 in this chapter 1 Click the Switch icon O U U o d 2 The Switch dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button Switch E Main Character Detail Customize Color OFF on Division No T Output Memory T Lamp Memory otputbAchon Parts Select Draw Mode Op REP Function No Function Change APP2 3 Appendix2 3D Parts 3 The Switch List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Click the Parts File button Switch List E Program Files 2M71S51PARTS Parts_e 23P x
265. h the cable during program transfer If communication is suspended turn the power off and on and transfer the program again ZM MDD Transfer Utility N Starting 1 Click in the order of Start gt Programs gt Zm 71s gt ZM MDD Transfer Utility 4 2 The ZM MDD Transfer Utility dialog is displayed A Select COM port SS Ej 1 com x Cancel Send M MDD Information 2 Mie Connection Refer to File Path A EM Program Files M7 1547 pasdpprg mdd It is possible to start from the ZM MDD transfer utility shortcut icon v KM S M MDD Transfer Utility 8 33 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 8 34 TD I O Closing Click the Close button in the ZM MDD Transfer Utility dialog The ZM MDD transfer utility is closed ZM MDD Transfer Utility Dialog Select COM Port Select the port to be used ZM MDD Information Click the ZM MDD Information button The following dialog is displayed Check the ZM MDD program version and the PLC model M MOD Information Program Version 1080 Type to be connected bn AL When the ZM MDD Information or Send button is clicked again after communication with the ZM 1MD2 was performed the message Time Over for waiting Receiving is displayed Turn the PLC power off and on and try again File Path The target location of the ZM 1MD2 program file mdo file is displayed As default
266. haracters based on dots at regular intervals The space between characters varies with the specified number of points a pS 20 point size characters in the relay mode P Touch switch Analog switch Touch switch Matrix switch 9 7 O Machine Error Machine Error 5 System Error o Communication Error system Error Emergency Stop RUN Mode Stop setting Value Over Emergency Stop Communication Error Manual Font Setting In the case of the HK fonts character codes used on screens will be recognized automatically or manually depending on the used functions part or mode see the table on the previous page Automatic Font Setting By means of automatic font setting character codes used on the screen are recognized and only partial sections of the font data including the codes are transferred to the ZM series There is no special operation to be performed by the user Manual Font Setting When text data for instance to be displayed on a character display or message display will vary such text data is not determined on the software In sucha case select probable items of font data to be used and transfer them to the ZM series This operation is a manual font setting Itis necessary to check the number of points specified for the placed text as well as the function mode or part in which the text is placed Whether or not to make manual font settings is determined as aresult See the table on page APP 1 10 in this chapter
267. he Move start end angles separately icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 20 Symmetry Pie Graph This command is used to symmetrically adjust pie graph or panel meter part angles The Symmetry icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 21 Same Start End Angles This command is used to modify pie graph or panel meter part shape forming a complete circle The Same Start End Angles icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 21 With Internal Circle This command is used to add or delete an inner circle to or from a pie graph With Internal Circle icon functions in the same manner For more information see page APP3 21 Paint Position Setting Fit Area with Graphic This command is valid only forthe closed area graph part For more information see page APP3 28 Appendix 3 Part Editing Display Menu The Display menu commands are the same as those for part edit windows e Item List When modifying a part including complicated graphics the contents of the part are known from the Item List window The part and graphic data are indicated separately in the list This list is useful for changing only graphic properties etc Display EditPart ltem To Tool Bar Iw Status Bar Jump ae Preview oi 3 m Q 5 O lt D 5 Open the Item List window L een o to edit this switch p
268. he Paste icon on the edit tool bar The specified messages are copied to the position a EEN File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool 4 Ow S md CEART S 8 e lt im te So EE Sim E ae Ek b Ha ot ee ee ae EMS c QT st 28 te v The Paste command inserts messages into the specified position so that the AS following lines move down accordingly 4 32 Chapter 4 Registration Items Deleting Messages 1 Specify messages to be deleted by dragging the mouse The messages are highlighted File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window AECA O Al IM e h gt gt Hea we WW os BEBER rn B Message 0 Edit lt P ge S Q O 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu or the right click menu The specified messages are deleted File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool window Dt on S amp ml BZ A Si Co tn Hebb ZE EBRO o ES Message 0 Edit z eprori errorb Select All L When deleting all messages from the group select Delete All from the Edit menu The confirmation message as shown on the right appears A x AN Will clear all the screen The cleared data cannot appear again OK To delete all messages click Yes 4 33 Chapter4 Registration Items 4 34 Message Search and Replacement Searching for or replacing messages is possible Search 1 In the Message Edit wndow check the position of the mouse cursor 2 S
269. he Size Change dialog is displayed Ex For ascreen with three normal overlaps Size Change x M Bas E GG OVLPO A Size En SS Y Size 480 E M DWLP1 gt Color H mb B Color 16 Color i 126 Color 32k Color Cancel 4 Specify X Size and Y Size of the pattern They can be set to the screen size Chapter 7 Useful Techniques 5 Choose the number of colors of the pattern ZM 42 to 82 8 16 or 128 colors ZM 300 8 16 or 128 32 000 colors 6 Click OK The message Will Register to No x appears When the registration destination is the correct one click Yes To change the destination click No Q will register to Mo 0 Clicking No brings up the Specify Bitmap Read dialog Specify the desired number Start No m Cancel Ex Ifthe following screen is converted to a pattern it changes as shown below S Screen size 800 x 600 Pattern size 120 x 90 Chapter7 Useful Techniques Function 6 Copy Image to Clip Board 7 12 The screen being displayed on the computer can be copied to the clipboard The copied image can be imported into word processing software etc The following edit items can be copied to the clipboard e Screen e Graphic library e Multi overlap e Data block e Screen library Operation Procedure 1 Bring up the desired screen on the computer 2 Select Screen Image from the Tool menu The sub menu is
270. he Line End Position B aye Keele EEN Drawing Method VE EE ie 3 39 co 330 3 35 Multi text Text Field taeda sents Number of aaa E UE Eet dados Selecting A ee i E E ae Ke ele Placing Muli EE cu 3 37 3 37 Screen LIB ree Placing oe SCHER Element Chapter 4 Registration Items Or Tare Ee Screen Edd WE Grapci Uranio Graphic Library STUdUrO ii rt ates Meeialeilahe Wi eaaened Calling the Graphic LIDI Vesta N Graphie Library Ginn a a eee Lec Offset Position SEN da n Mee Onset POSTON neita lore aerate ark ee hed ea ate lae Changing an Offset POSITION n e cc nenene ee cece cece cece ae cee ee ee ce eee ee ee eeeeae ca nn re en rr Parameter Seting EE OUTING of Paramete russia dust rd ici Parameter Setting Procedure oocococonococonocononeconnnecononecononenononecnnnnennnn no conan cenas Parameter Setting Dialog oococococonocococonococonononocncnnnnn coco nono E Parameter Seting E Data Display Outline of Data Display in Graphic ca ore Data Display Setting Procedure cono cron rememorar mene Data Main Tab Window oocococonocinncococicnconoccnnconocnon cono cnonconocnan ocn rnanar nen rs Parameter Setting for Data Display ooocicoconicicnnonococncononocncococonnconocnon neneme mememe Data Char Prop Tab Window 0 00 0 ccc cece cece ee cece ce cece ee cece ae cece ae nenene nenene ca rene ren 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 36 3
271. he ZM 300 series and the ZM 42 to 82 series Io File Comparing 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Comparing 3 The File Comparing dialog shown below is displayed Specify the files to be compared File Comparing E F qu Specify a file to compare Po Reference Po Reference l 4 Click OK File comparison is started and the result is reported in the window shown below When the files are consistent Data corresponds is displayed El 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 File Comparing F ZM300data Test 237 F 2M300data 2m300test 237 File Display Da o mga 0 S 0 4 2 E File Comparing F 2M300data Test 237 F 2M300data 2m300test 237 TES PLC Type Setting is different Edit Model is different Comm Parameter Setting is different Unit Setting is different Font Setting is different Buffering Area Setting is different Check Level is different Message 0 is different Message 1 is different Pattern 15 is different Pattern 16 is different Pattern 17 is different Pattern 18 is different Pattern 19 is different Pattern 20 is different Pattern 21 is different Pattern 22 is different Pattern 23 is different Pattern 30 is different Macro Block 0 is different uow peue oi 7 43 Chapter7 Useful Techniques About Menu Items Save to TEXT File File Menu The contents after comparison can be saved in a
272. he part file is provided below Printing Procedure Option Setting Dialog While a part edit window is opened select Printer Setting from the File kb menu File Edt Display Edit Part lte _ New Open Dave Save Ag Property Coen Frnt flr CF Card Manager File Managing Quit Part Edit Hut Application 2 The Option Setting dialog is displayed M Screen Output Part graphics are printed O List Output Items set for parts are printed O Table Print The table of parts is printed When this option is checked the Screen Output and List Output options are not active The parts are printed in reverse video Only the white and black portions O Reverse are reversed O Monochrome If the printed part is difficult to see check this box Legibility may be improved Page Setting Set the margins and header and footer lines Printer Setting Set the printer mode paper size and portrait or landscape mode After setting click OK APP3 34 Appendix 3 Part Editing Printing 1 After specifying the above settings execute printing Select Print from the File menu File Edit Display Edit Pat Ite New Open Save Save As Property ZF Print Cp CF Card Manager File Managing Quit Fart Edit Hut Application 2 The Part Print dialog is displayed Check the necessary options for printing Specify the starting part number and ending part
273. henthe dialog setting is concluded drag the mouse on the screen A dotted line box as large as the data display is displayed with a cross cursor Drag E el elt RE eil el ir NR ei 3 Release the mouse being dragged in the desired position The data display is shown in the position a gt 1234 Release the mouse Data display is shown in the released position Chapter4 Registration Items Data Main Tab Window Graphic Library Drawing Line Bow Circle Test Paint Cot Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Data Main DatajChar Prop Muli Test Digit F Decimal Point jo E Spacing Parameter f Display Type DEC e T JISZ55Cl Ge te 1 word 1 byte M Zero Suppress e but Style gt gt Input Type DEC Data Length 1w Parameter Setting for Data Display Two kinds of parameters are provided for data display e For value change Specify a value for Parameter This number designates the order of memory address allocated for value change on the data display Graphic Library Drawing Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Data ap DatalChar Prop Muli Text Digit p El or je Spacing P Parameter f Display Type DEC e kl sg Ce b s e For movement Click a data display placed in the graphic library Click the Parameter icon on the drawing tool bar The Parameter Setting dialog is displayed
274. his menu Modify the part as desired For more information see Appendix 3 Part Editing Detail Setting Used for property modification Select an item placed on the screen and click this menu The Prop Change dialog is displayed Select Environment For more information see Select Environment page 1 41 Division No Setting Changes the division number indicated in the upper right corner Screen Setting Used for specifying the screen background color etc For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Edit OPEN Macro Edit CLOSE Macro Edit CYCLE Macro Used for setting the macro for the currently open screen For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Local Function Switch Setting Used for setting function switches for each screen For more information see Chapter 1 System Setting in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Select All Selects all items placed on the screen Delete All Deletes all items from the screen Clicking this ES menu brings up the dialog shown on the right A da When Yes is clicked all the items are deleted from the screen UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Display Menu Tool Bar Shows or hide the tool bars Clicking this menu brings up the Tool Bar dialog When the box is unchecked the corresponding tool bar disappears from the screen Check the box to show the to
275. ick OK ltem System Setting J Screen Graphic Library Mult O verlap Data Block Message Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Ca sheet gt uff 4 Screen Library Cancel Data Sheet wl MultiCanguages Animation Data Sheet Editing It is necessary to set the size of a data sheet the number of characters etc in the Data Sheet Page Setting dialog Select Data Sheet Setting from the Edit menu The Data Sheet Page Setting dialog is displayed Edit Display Draw ltem System Setting T os ele lge al Hedo Lier Data Sheet Page Setting E Memory Di 6330 ER Characters Line Ed z Lines Fage e Paper TF Use Character Graphic Print cos 4 76 Chapter 4 Registration Items Set each option in the dialog referring to the description below Memory This option determines the first page of printing The details of memory are as follows Number of pages to be printed For more information on usage see Chapter 14 Data Sheet in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Characters Line 16 152 Specify the number of characters per line of data sheet Lines Page 2 152 Specify the number of lines per page of data sheet Paper Clicking this button brings up the sheet size selection dialog Select the sheet size and the sheet orientation O Use Char
276. ies the QnA series or the FX series Computer Mitsubishi A QnA FX series oto Th ih a Ladder transfer cab le Slide switch connecting model sele cti on 1 A series ACPU port 2 QnA series QnACPU port A FA series Note Set the slide switch before tu rnin g the power on Composition The ZM MDD transfer utility is automatically installed when screen creation software ZM 71SE is installed 8 32 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Operation Procedure 1 Connect the ZM 1MD2 to the RS 422 connector at Mitsubishi s A QnA FX series CPU 2 Connect the computer and the ZM 1MD2 on the GPP port side using the ladder transfer cable 3 Turn the PLC power on The ZM 1MD2 is activated at the same time Be sure to set the ZM 1MD2 slide switch before turning the power on 4 Start up the ZM MDD transfer utility on the computer and transfer the ZM 1MD2 program file dpprg mdd L About mdd File h The mdo file dpprg mdd is located in the Tpa folder that is installed with the ZM 71SE editor To check the program version of the ZM MDD the ZM MDD transfer utility must be used The latest mdo file can be downloaded from Sharp Manufacturing Systems Web site y For the procedure of starting and operating the ZM MDD transfer utility refer to ZM MDD x Transfer Utility in the next section Do not remove or attac
277. ight rag Releasing the mouse zooms A red dotted line box is displayed in the enclosed area The zoom varies depending on the enclosed area size Pressing the Home key on the keyboard resets the zoom to 100 In addition Ctrl key Page Up Zoom Out Ctrl key Page Down Zoom In The above shortcut keys can also be used for zooming 1 31 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Right clicking Menu Right clicking a mouse brings up a menu that contains some commands The commands included in the menu vary depending on the screen condition When No Items are Selected Right clicking a mouse brings up the following menu 1 Undo Ctrl z 2 Reda Ctrl 9 amp Cut Ctrl x 1 0 z Copy Ctrl C 11 A Paste Ctrl4y 1 2 Delete 3 4 5 ON Grid Grid Display Grid Type w Base Overlap 0 Wer ip Oyerlap 2 Hide overlaps with Base checked 6 13 T wi On line Editing 8 H On line Run Change All 1 Undo 2 Redo Same as Undo Redo in the Edit menu 3 ON Grid When this command is clicked once a check mark is added to the command The screen becomes the on grid status Clicking the command again clears the check mark The on grid status is canceled 4 Grid Display When this command is clicked once it is che
278. il icon setting is concluded and you click OK the Relay Mode icon is registered in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen The icon in the box indicates the division number specified in the dialog When checking or modifying the data of the dialog click the icon in the Part auxiliary tool box lts tool bar or dialog is displayed e Deletion 1 Click the icon to be deleted from the Part auxiliary tool box 2 When its tool bar is displayed click the Delete icon When its dialog is displayed click the Delete button J IEFIRLSCTODIOCK TIMO Iu Ea Or Process Cycle Low Speed y 3 The confirmation message appears Click Yes when deleting the icon The icon is deleted from the Part auxiliary tool box e Copy When copying the function registered in the Part auxiliary tool box bring up the tem list 1 Select Item List from the Display menu Display Draw Part Item System Set Tool Bar gt v Status Bar Jump EY Preview Next Item List Switch Lamp Display Grid Display ON Grid 2 30 Chapter2 Screens 2 The ltem List window is displayed Items containing no mouse coordinates correspond to icons in the Part auxiliary tool box E Item List Screen 5 e Screen Lib 0 0 No 2 Screen Lib 0 0 No 1 Char 15 90 DEC Char 15 165 BCD Char 205 165 BCD W SIGN Char 205 9
279. il is displayed L Refer to ZM 71 SE Instruction Manual Function for more information on the following For alarm display see Chapter 10 Sampling For sound output see Chapter 20 Sound For e mail see Chapter 27 E Mail 4 36 Chapter 4 Registration Items Pattern Patterns are the areas where bitmap files are imported and graphics are drawn in dots and then registered Pattern Structure A maximum of 1 024 patterns can be registered Pattern No 0 No No 5 No 6 No 1023 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 XQ Beer Soda The maximum capacity per pattern is 128 KB The maximum permissible number of dots are the same as the number specified for the edit model 800 x 600 dots 640 x 480 dots or 320 x 240 dots 0 Y gt Calling a Pattern Select Pattern from the Item menu The Pattern dialog is displayed Specify the pattern number to be opened and click OK Wen System Setting Screen Graphic Library Mult O verlap Data Block Pattern x Message C D gt Wea Macro Block Cancel Fage Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Multi arnaguages Animation 4 37 Chapter4 Registration Items Pattern Editing The following tool bar is provided for pattern drawing Pencil Icon Clicking this icon brings up the Pattern Drawing dialog Pattern Drawing Pattern
280. imation For the ZM 300 series except for ZM 352C 4 85 Animation Function Structure 20 cc ce cscs cono cono ener nooo 4 85 Calling the Animation Function 0 cc ccc cece cono cono conan anos 4 85 Animation E GUNG EE 4 86 Frame EC NING EE 4 88 Chapter 4 Registration Items Outline of Registration Items ZM series screen data files consist of areas called screens Parts and graphics can be placed on screens Meanwhile data items or graphics the contents of which will vary according to circumstances cannot be placed on screens Thus these items are registered in different areas Parts such as switches or lamps that permanently exist on a screen are placed directly on the screen Screen O Cc a 5 D S A D e A o O 5 T 3 OI Memory error Power supply error Cyli nder error SCH ti me over Pattern Timeout Tank error Data mis match Commun cation fa lure Graphic library Message Items that will vary according to the circumstances are registered in different areas These areas are called registration items When editing these items start from selection from the Item menu Chapter4 Registration Items Contents of Registration Items The following table indicates the contents of the registration items and their uses Registration Item Screen Page 4 3 Graphic library Used for graphic call drawing tool graphic mode Page 44 graphic relay m
281. in combination with other parts like switches or display areas Screens in these modes can be created with ease by following the instructions to be given Opening the Wizard Dialog Open the Wizard dialog when using the wizard function Select Wizard from the Part menu The Wizard dialog is displayed Fart ltem System Settir rm Parts available with the wizard function Finished image JI Overlap Switch Lone Data Displ GE SE E Select the part to plane E Belay ES Helau zub gei E E Vu Lamp E hum Display E Entry Char Display Error Display Keypad Password 112 Data Block Area Graph Display pi Trend Display a Graphic Display Histrical Display E33 Graphic Relay Graph Display Calendar Display D I sampling Memo Pad Hp Time Display Calendar Note Pad MI Macro e l Explanation SS Place switches and radio buttons BS Memory Card Gq Animation SN video E i ad JPEG Display d Sound eg 1 Select the desired part from the list while referring to Image and Explanation in the dialog and click the OK button Follow the instructions to be given on the screen 9 1 Sumo Chapter9 Wizard Wizard Usage Examples Radio Button Creation This section explains the procedure for creating four radio buttons with output memory D100 0 to D100 3 L Radio buttons oper
282. in different sizes They are counted individually 3 notch parts APP2 17 A 2 sped Or Appendix2 3D Parts Setting Procedure This section explains the 3D switch parts setting procedure Also follow the same procedure when placing lamps 1 Click the Switch icon 2 The Switch dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button Switch E Main Character Detail Color OFF Jon Division No T Output Memory Lamp Memory SEET Draw Mode GG x0R REP AAA Function No Function Change Place Cancel Apply 3 The Switch List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Click the Parts File button NO FRAME TYPE 1 TYPE 2 Cancel 0003 0004 0005 NN Display Pattern or y TYPE 3 AREA R2 0006 ooo 0008 R2 R2 R2 APP2 18 Appendix2 3D Parts 4 The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Select a 3D parts file 3Dfront_128 z3p or 3Dside_128 z3p axi Look in ED PARTS e Dirr ES Parts3D laa 3Dnow_P4 23P LJ User al 3Dnow_P5 Z3P el 3DFront Z3P al 3Dnow_P6 23P m Parts_e Z3P 3Dfront_126 23P ls 3Dnow_P7 z3P a Parts _e128 23P 2J3Dnow_P2 23P a 3Dnow_P8 z3P s std Z3P al 3Dnow_P3 z3P a 3Dside Z3P sa Std_128 23P O U v o d File name Files of type Z3P e Cancel 0000 0001 _ Select Display Pat
283. ing No Setting a SS No Setting NN Po No Setting ON No Settina 20 Click around this point Chapter 4 Registration Items 2 The Direct Block setting dialog is displayed Direct Block No 0 EEE BBB eL ZA do do 2 NA RES loa laa Maa o E Ww wy 131 o ES LL a jo y O Y O O el 4 Specify numbers for Message Group and Line line number Click OK 5 The next No 1 button becomes active Perform the same procedure using the button Direct Block No 0 L Clicking a set number button makes the Copy Insert and Delete buttons AS active Use them as necessary Direct Block Mo 0 0 4 67 Chapter4 Registration Items 4 68 6 When the dialog setting is concluded click OK The previous window is displayed Perform the same procedure for the next block number Fs File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window D a on ix 4 e gt g Sp Reg EEE AU ee leen ees EE ee E eebe A Ss L i o eebavei o RIlI COemmeeb 3 1 mm Block No 0 0 3 error3 1 2 error 2 0 6 errorb Gi No Setting SS PS No Setting SS 6 No Setting Copying and Pasting or Deleting Direct Blocks Follow the procedure below to copy and paste or delete page blocks Click the block number to be copied or deleted 2 The clicked line is highlighted entirely Select Copy or Delete from the Edit menu E3
284. ing the mouse 2 Right click on one of the selected lines and then click Change Setting Value 3 Setthe memory counter according tothe procedure described on the next page The way to set reset multiple bits simultaneously is the same as setting the memory counter Simultaneously Starting or Stopping the Memory Counters 1 Select all the memory that has a timer setting 2 Press the space bar All the timers will start simultaneously 3 Pressing the space bar again will cause all the timers to stop simultaneously 8 24 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Testing Sampling Mode with a CSV File By creating simulation data with a CSV file and then reading that data with the Simulator it is possible to display a sampling screen on the ZM series that is very close to the actual image Conditions for a Test The following conditions must occur if you wish to perform a test on a ZM series screen data file by using a CSV file e Inthe Buffering Area Setting dialog the O Memory Designation box should be checked e Sampling Method should be Constant Sample or Bit Synchronize 7 8 3 10 on o Jt ECH 3 Ja fs fe Info Qutput Memory Sut 6340 E MV Use Sample Buffer Store Target No of Words Ce Internal Buffer Sampling Time C SRAM C CF Card No of Samples Full Processing Dotoutbiehe 0 Ge Continuous Message GN 0 C Stop M Use Operation IT Use St
285. int 15 1073 17 0 120 Box Paint 15 108 170 125 Box Paint 15 110 170 123 Box Paint 15 111 5 170 122 Box Paint 15 113 5 170 122 Box Paint 15 114 5 170 119 Box Paint 15 115 5 1 0 118 Grouping End ccd Box Paint 25 100 160 135 C 07 Num Display D00100 C 27 102 155 133 Function No gt 4 b fo O Maximize pn Ll Ll L Ll L L Ll LIL LL LI L Ll LL ENE NE NEN ENE NEN ENE NEN ENE NEN ENS Useful Operations Useful operations in placing or editing parts and graphics are explained Copy amp Paste Copy amp paste operation can be performed by using Copy and Paste in the Edit menu or the Copy and Paste icons in the icon bar Also the following operations can perform copy amp paste operation 1 Click the original item to be copied 2 Hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and drag the item to the desired position Hold down the Ctrl ceva ane drag The same effect as copy amp paste operation 3 The copied item is placed 1 30 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Zooming In Out The edit window is displayed at 100 zoom as default The display size can be changed by selecting Zoom from the Display menu Hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and right drag the mouse on the screen A red dotted line box is displayed When the mouse is released the area in the red dotted ine box is zoomed in Sas oe Hold down the Ctr ke y and r
286. ion Clicking OK brings up a dotted box and a mover tool cross cursor Click it in the desired position The table data display part is placed To bring up the Table Data Display dialog again double click the placed part or click the Detail Prop Change icon 2 41 TU Q 3 D Q O D 3 D Q o YN D er cr O Chapter2 Screens Property Change for One Data Cell 1 Click the table data display part Handles are shown all around 2 Right click the mouse on a cell for property change The cell is highlighted and the right click menu is displayed at the same time Align width Align heigh fut Copy Paste 3 Click Detail Setting The Table Data Display Num Display dialog is displayed Table Data Display Num Display a 12345 12345 Align character FF Detail Setting E x Typel Type2 Char Prop Detail Setting Display Function None e El Memory In Memory Doo 49 eeng CG RGT e a Digit E E Decimal Point jo Display Type DEC wo sign y JW Zero Suppress Input Type r Data Length C BCD 1 Word C Flush Left DEC 2MWord Flush Right Center Specify Range nput Range fo to 6 553 Dis play Han qe a Cancel Apply 4 Set the options in the dialog Select a necessary data display type from numerical display character display message display or text in drawing
287. ion icon E sa e aaa aaa ajaja a viel 8 8 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Setting Items Necessary for Communication IOC This describes how to make settings necessary for communication between a personal computer and the ZM series To check the communication setting stop the communication with the ZM series If the following settings are made incorrectly the ZM series and personal computer will not communicate normally Click on the File menu Make settings for PLC Type Baud Rate COM Port and Memory Setting Eile wiew Communication Helg New Chrl h Open Chrl 0 PLE Type Baud Rate COM Port r pply zM data Memory Setting Exit 1 PLC Type Set the PLC type corresponding to the screen data transmitted to the ZM series 2 Baud Rate Set the baud rate for communication between a personal computer and the ZM series This has no relation to the actual communication baud rate between the ZM series and the PLC 3 COM Port Set the RS 232C COM port for the personal computer 8 9 H 3 CG v O Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 4 Memory Setting The starting address is either O or 1 for each device Determine the starting address for the device and then enter the correct number of words For example Ifyou check O Make All Data Cleared all the memory values for the SIM file will be cleared Memory Setting No of Words x Pe
288. ion is available only when 16 24 32 bit full color is selected for Windows screen setting and invalid when 256 color is selected pr M Interlock Text in the Switch When a switch lamp or calendar part is enlarged reduced while this option is checked the texton the switch or the lamp or YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN of the calendar part is also enlarged reduced When this option is unchecked the text or the YY MM DD hh mm ss SUN is not changed in size O Limit of Edit Model Area When this option is checked items can be moved within the available screen area of ZM When it is unchecked items can be moved beyond the area O Enlarge Items including Circles in the Opposite Angle When this option is checked the selected item can be enlarged reduced only in the diagonal directions Dragging handle A or B results in dragging handle 1 Likewise dragging handle C or D results in dragging handle 2 When enlarging reducing a graphic consisting of circles and lines boxes the graphic shape is not changed with this option O Not Display Overlaps when Base is Selected The function of this option is the same as Hide Overlaps with Base Checked included in the right click menu For more information see Chapter 1 Basic Operation Windows 2000 NT4 0 Paint Processing When Windows 2000 or Windows NT4 0 is used painting may not be performed normally Check this option in such a case 2 16 Chapter2 Screens Part Typ
289. is copied at the flipped position while the original one remains in place When this is not checked the graphic item is flipped Clicking OK performs flip operation Align Items can be aligned onthe screen Clicking this menu brings up the following sub menu Switch Lamp Centering Flush Right Flush Left Align Top Align Bottom Vertical Align Horizontal Align Align Setting Switch Lamp Centering This command is valid when there are characters on the switch orlamp Select the desired switch lamp and click this command The characters are center aligned 1 39 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation 1 40 Ioc lO Io Also characters on the switch or lamp can be center aligned by clicking the Centering button on the Character tab window of the Switch dialog This command is valid only when characters are entered in the Switch Lamp dialog If characters are placed as graphics use Align Setting for centering Flush Right Left Top Bottom Select the desired items at the same time and click the command The items are aligned as commanded Vertical Align Select the desired items at the same time and click this command The selected items are vertically aligned Horizontal Align Select the desired items at the same time and click this command The selected items are horizontally aligned Align Setting Cli
290. is option is necessary when something other than No Designation is selected for Block Specify the same division number as the one where the mode selected by Block is registered Block No Library No This option is necessary when something other than No Designation is selected for Block Specify the block or library number of the contents that are applied to the sub display of the original relay message O Same Screen Click M this option when the original relay mode screen and the screen to be called as a screen block are the same In the case that relay messages are linked to different data blocks respectively it is convenient that only the data block numbers are switched on the same screen according to the currently active message For this operation in the Screen Block Edit window change only the numbers for Block No related to the same screen Register several screen blocks of the same screen number with Same Screen checked M With these settings a screen call is set where different blocks are displayed depending on the activated relay bit activation Set the previously described Screen No to be the same as the relay mode O screen number With this screen block settings are finished 4 71 LO e OH D mD w O O el Chapter4 Registration Items Tile For painting a graphic such as a box or circle a paint pattern can be selected from eight default types and eight patterns th
291. ision number 2 3 Chapter2 Screens 2 4 When Using Screen Library With the use of an editing area called screen library the same part can be placed repeatedly on multiple screens Before using the function checkthat the division number registered in a screen library is different from the division numbers of parts already placed on screens In the case of parts limited in number using the same division number may prevent these parts from working normally For more information on screen library see Chapter 4 Registration Items Ifthe alarm display relay mode has division No 0 i i nm YY MM DD_hh mm ss The time display ina screen library must have a division number other than 0 Menu Division Number Check To check the division number of a part placed on the screen follow the steps below Select Display Environment from the Display menu In the Detail tab window check O DIV No for Detail Display Environment E x Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others Swich Lamp ERIE Language H Overlap M No0 M Noll No 2 Detail Y DIVNo Memory M Area Je Paint Dsp l Graphic Relay Dsp ON GFF TT khasasna Mar TT Rrsmbia theses Canina K Or select Item List from the Display menu to open the item list All division numbers used on the screen are listed For more information on Display Environment setting see page 2 10 For more information on the item list s
292. isplayed 7 4 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 3 Memory Address Use It is possible to retrieve memory addresses that are used in the files currently being edited Operation Procedure 1 Select Memory Address Use from the Tool menu 2 The Memory Address Use dialog is displayed Specify the memory addresses for Start and End Memory Address Use EM AIGA Chart suo0000 End DEER F Crozs eference Display Ge Word Bit T Display only Screen OF Cancel 3 Click Word or Bit for Display 4 When O Cross reference is checked cross references are shown If no cross reference is necessary do not check the box 4 Q 0 AM When Cross reference is checked BR List of Memory Address Use 1 1 Memory Address Use Cross reference u00000 u01000 Macro Block No 7 Line 5 FO Macro Block No 7 Line 11 FO Macro Block No 14 Line 3 FO Macro Block No 17 Line 3 FO Macro Block No 7 Line GEO Macro Block No 7 Line 12 FO Macro Block No 15 Line 3 FO Macro Block No 18 Line 3 FO Macro Block No 7 Line 7 FO Macro Block No 7 Line 13 FO Macro Block No 16 Line 3 FO Macro Block No 19 Line 3 FO Memory Card l F Memory Memory Card F Memory o When Cross reference is not checked BF List of Memory Address Use 1 1 u00000 u01000 Memory Address Use Word u00000 u01000 ee ae 8 ee OR RM RR He FE DESEE 1 5 Chapter7 Useful Techniques 7 6 v
293. item The procedure is described below 1 Go to the File menu on the Simulator and click on New to create a new file Or click the New Word icon to create a new file PE Untitled 2 Open screen data with the ZM 71SE editor and display the screen that will be tested As an example a screen with lamps arranged is shown here El 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 271 2M 72 640 480 10 4model Screen 0 Edit File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window DAA om ix 0 17 0 14 e Division No MAA EEE A A CEE OS E BARINAS lao eR OOS 1 15 Screen 0 Edit 0601250560056 tebe bet 2602 5561 2565 5061 25564 050125055 MA A 0 Wi mm Wi 012 06125013 66125614 b6612615 66120515 661251 J66125620lb6125621fbb12022 8 21 H 3 CG O Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 8 22 3 Click on a lamp to select it and then hold down the CT RL key while dragging it to the Simulator A EE Q Fie Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window E 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 271 2M 72 640 480 10 4model Screen O Edit A CN REA Division No Jenni a EE RI ao BE Wie ES ES bet E f HANA A 4 Memory addresses will be displayed as follows in the new file PZ scrnoooo JA 0012000 0012001 LAMP 0012002 LAMP 0012003 LAMP 0012004 LAMP 0012005 LAMP 001
294. ition after registering a screen library 4 83 eidg Ue alos Chapter4 Registration Items Placing a Screen Library Registered screen libraries can be placed on screens using the Screen LIB icon on the drawing tool bar IA For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Notes on Placing a Screen Library Depending on the part type only one piece can be registered on one division When placing a screen library containing such a part on screens make sure that the same division number is not used for multiple parts Take care of division numbers of parts at the time of registering parts in screen library To avoid a problem like the one described above division Nos 100 and higher should be allocated to screen libraries because such numbers may not be used generally Also take care not to use one division number repeatedly in different screen libraries There are cases in which only one part entry mode memory card can be used on one layer or only one part memo pad can be used on one screen Take the above note into consideration when placing a screen library containing such a part on the base screen or overlaps Multi languages This area is provided for the use of the language selection function IA For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 4 84 Chapter 4 Registration Items Animation For the ZM 300 series except for ZM 352D
295. ive Set them using the arrow buttons or entering alphanumerics through the keyboard Si File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window OSA ere Bee ee Pane SIE ee ea ey AE b ECG SRS SQM ARO eR OOC OSS d a ia oe Be Screen No Bloch HO Page Block Jo es Block No Sa ae OOOO E No Setting Poo No Setting o o O Al No Setting oo o O OS No Setting 6 No Setting o o O PW No Setting oo o O a Ma Gatti seg a Checking O Same Screen shows Same Screen in the cell under Screen No 4 Perform the same procedure for block No 1 and after 4 70 Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Block Edit Window Setting Set each option in the window referring to the description below Screen No Specify the screen number to be used as a screen block Block Select the part type included in the screen that is specified for Screen No e Page Block Direct Block These blocks are available when the message mode is selected Select either one in accordance with the block used in the message mode on the specified screen Graphic LIB When the graphic mode is used on the specified screen choose this option Data Block When Block is chosen for Type in the Entry dialog for the entry mode or a data block area is set on the specified screen choose this option No Designation When no part mode as the above is used on the specified screen choose this option Division No Th
296. jo 1 D I Ze DEENEN wl ses Fi DESEN Q Gu RK Graphis call Places graphics registered in the graphic Page 3 27 LIE library a Bar graph scale Draws bar graph scales Page 3 29 Pie graph scale Draws pie graph scales Page 3 31 Trend graph scale Draws trend graph scales Page 3 33 ie Multi text Produces text in multiple lines Page 3 35 Screen LIB Places a screen LIB mark Page 3 37 Chapter3 Drawing Tools Basic Operations Clicking an drawing tool icon brings up the dialog for drawing In this section basic operations on the Screen Drawing dialog are explained Screen Drawing Dialog 3 2 For example when you click the Line icon the following Screen Drawing dialog is displayed Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot Z N Color IN BEH Line Style SENNIE Ls lz LE Erasing the Dialog The draw mode is in effect while the dialog is on the screen The mouse turns a cross shaped cursor To cancel the draw mode erase the Screen Drawing dialog To erase the Screen Drawing dialog click the Select icon in the icon bar or click the Close button on the Screen Drawing dialog D R 5 amp be cst ge JL ot SES Sa EI S A MeOH e ae fe Trend Graph Scale Multi Text Text Faint Dot v If you drag the cursor over the dialog during drawing the dialog is temporari
297. k Sas a abou chide taeston telesales vee 6 9 oso 6 10 6 10 EXIME SS eS EE EX Graphic Ia o a o ido ici When Animation is Checked cocococcoconocococococococononocononocononocononocnnnno cn nono cnn no cn na System Setting Memory Use List CH When Use Cross brenda IS s Checked Chapter 7 Useful Techniques MU a S Funcion Eror Ghee E E N beat bet Operation EIERE eege tte Reading Ihe Error Check EE Checking Method for Details RIOREGICK VE UE wun 1 4 wan 1 4 Bringing Up the Detailed List of Edit IEN ee EE Function 2 Memory Use Operation Procedure l is Opening Closing the List of Memor TER Functions Memory ele EE Operation Procedure ai A A a AA ai When the Main Von Local Main s IS E dal ina t gege e 5 40 5 41 6 10 6 11 6 11 1 1 1 2 1 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 5 Function 4 Change Memory n s cece cece cece cece cece nenene nenene arnese cnn cr enana nr anar rr enn ar rr rr rn change AMEMO tias ti sde Operation Procedure cocococoncncococccnconcnncocnnncocnnnnocnonnocnnnnncnan nn cn ee rrue es nrun er eseeeneaeeseeae es Change Item Select Dialog AE EE nssr rennene semeren ne Changing Memory of Selected Items Only ccc cece cee cece cece ce cece cece eeaeae ca eeaeaeeaeae on Operation Procedure ste tie ese ee eld OPUO A SOU ING EE Function 5 Copy Image to Pattern EE Operation Procedure Function 6 Copy Image to ci Board Operation Proce
298. k mark Range Designation Set the range of screens where the selected items should be pasted Click OK Paste operation is performed When paste operation on the last screen number specified for Range Designation has been completed this last screen is opened If paste operation is performed on a layer such as an overlap where the number of items per screen is limited and the number reaches the limit the error message Do you cancel paste action to selected screen is displayed To cancel Copy to Selected Screen that you performed click Undo Paste to Selected Screen inthe Edit menu 1 37 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation o 1 38 Rotate Graphic The following graphic items can be rotated Applicable graphic items Line continuous line box parallelogram polygon circle arc sector ellipse elliptical arc paint including frame scale Operation Procedure Select the desired graphic item When handles are shown click Rotate Graphic or icon The following Rotate dialog is displayed At the top left corner of the graphic item a CENT mark is indicated CENT mark E Botat A cmg A8 dia EE Angle 90 180 270 Select the desired angle for rotation The center of rotation is the position marked with CENT Rotate Clicking this button rotates the selected graphic item Quit Clicking this
299. k the option in this example Click the Next button 9 8 Chapter 9 Wizard 6 Specify the number of error messages memory bits Error Display E Specify the number of messages bit memories 1d lt Back Cancel 10 is specified in this example Click the Next button 7 Register error messages Error Display X EEN Message Setting Message group No fo EZ of registered target Message registration field Message Color A lt Back Cancel Message Group No of Registered Target 0 23 Specify a message editing group number S Q C O Q GC O m x A 3 2 D n Leave the number setting as default generally To change select a number with o no registered message Message registration field Register error messages In step 6 10 is specified as the number of error messages Register ten lines of messages Message Color Select a message color as desired Chapter9 Wizard Click the Next button 8 Attached parts are available Error Display X Select the attached parts IV Scroll Switch Kleren lt Back Cancel O Scroll Switch Uncheck the option if message scroll switches are not necessary Click the Finish button 9 Across cursor is displayed Click it in the desired position El ZM Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 Z2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0
300. l network is used Check this box to include the port number of the temperature controller Compare File No Compare Record No Choose these options for specifying addresses in the memory card This is not available during on line editing Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Changing Memory of Selected Items Only Memory addresses ofthe selected screen items in the current editing file can be changed simultaneously Operation Procedure 1 Select the desired items for memory change 2 Select Change Memory fromthe Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Selected Item 3 The Change All Memory dialog is displayed 4 Check the numbered box Memory address selection becomes available 5 Choose Bit or Word Memory change is performed in units of bits or words as selected 6 Enterthe first address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change Start Mem No Likewise enterthe last address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change End Mem No 7 Enterthe desired first address after change for After Change Start Mem No in the same manner 8 Click Option and set the items of which memory addresses should be changed For more information refer to the next section 9 Click Change The specified memory addresses are changed at one time 4 Q e Gu Option Setting Click the Option button in the Change All Memory dialog The Change Item Select dialog shown below is
301. lay Word Bit Ki Itis possible to combine Word or Bit and Comment Display 8 14 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Creating a New SIM File The procedure for creating a new SIM file is described below When a new file is created you can set the memory that is displayed on the sheet as you wish You can also choose the SIM file name It is possible to create a new SIM file even when an automatically created SIM file or an SIV based SIM file is already displayed on the personal computer 1 Go to the File menu and click on New Or click on the New Word icon on the tool bar 2 A sheet with the title Untitled x is displayed Add or insert the memory that you wish to test LATE olx Saving a Newly Created SIM File The procedure for saving a newly created SIM file is described below 1 Click on the File menu There are two options Save and Save As H 3 CG v O 2 Choosing Save If this is the first time that you have saved the Save As dialog will be displayed Enter a file name and click on Save 3 Choosing Save As The Save As dialog will be displayed Enter a file name and click on Save 8 15 Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 8 16 Adding or Inserting Memory in the Sheet The procedure for adding memory that you wish to test to the end of the test sheet or for inserting this memory between lines is described below Memo It i
302. lay ltem System Setting Tool Window ae Sw 14 e ds KEE a E E BESS errors EH No Setting J Meee No Setting e a E setting 4 Perform the same steps for editing block No 1 and after o O D Y O O Q Copying and Pasting or Deleting Page Blocks Follow the procedure below to copy and paste or delete page blocks 1 Click the block number to be copied or deleted 2 The clicked line is highlighted entirely Select Copy or Delete from the Edit menu Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool w Es File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window tx Undo Die E dix 0 a G 4 9 55 Ch Gil FY j Fa e To EE Ee Undo wizard 0 0 error 3 error O FEAT OEI 3 No Setting 4 No Setting A So Setting Ka Gattines Eopyto Selected Scr Unido Paste to Select Delete Multiple Setting Q Delete Ai Ki These commands can also be selected from the right click menu L To select multiple block numbers at one time hold down the Shift key and click a top and bottom block numbers 4 63 Chapter4 Registration Items One Time Setting of Multiple Blocks H consecutive lines are registered in several page blocks by the same number of lines use Multiple Setting 1 Select Multiple Setting from the Edit menu or the right click menu Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Aw gt Undo Ctrl Z i a Rede tr E
303. layed Choose the desired item and click OK File Managing X Ed Please Select Item Graphic Library Multi O verlap Data Block Pattern Data Sheet Screen Library Animation Frame 3 The corresponding window appears Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Copying Items by Designating Item Numbers e When any of the following items are selected from the File Managing dialog the screen list windows are displayed and then the No Designation dialog is displayed on them Message Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block System setting options e Specify the desired numbers for Copy Source No and Copy Target No and click OK Copying is executed No Designation Message EX El i Source No i i jo Copy Target No jo E o Change to a Different Item 1 Select Copy by Specifying No from the Edit menu 2 The File Managing dialog is displayed Click the desired option and then OK l File Managing ES e ES Please Select Item Graphic Library Multi O verlap Data Block Message Pattern Macro Block Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Animation Frame Animation Tahle Y Cancel uow peue oi 3 The No Designation dialog for the option is displayed No Designation Macro Block X El Source No H l jo Copy Target No jo e Other Setting Items The fol
304. le APP3 34 cl ef ie el LEE APP3 34 Part File Management e nooo o APP3 36 Part File Managing Procedure asese aese cess cono es APP3 36 Part Editing Menu APP3 38 In a Part Edit VV le e EE APP3 38 In a Modify Part Wind Ow ccoo cette cono nooo ee APP3 42 Appendix 3 Part Editing Outline All items making up screens such as switches lamps numerical data and overlaps are called parts and are saved in part files The part file is an independent file and is separate from screen data files Any part can be copied from part files to screen data files at any time The same part can be placed in different screen data files Part file AAA Screen data File containing parts only files O SN part can be called up form part files Screen data files 1 Any part can be called up form part files Users can create and save their own parts together with the standard parts originally saved in part files With this feature the user can easily create a screen by using parts of their own design such as switches and graphs O Part file AAA Users can save their own unique parts APP3 1 O 5 OD Appendix 3 Part Editing Components of Parts Parts saved in a part file may be different in shape but have common components A part is basically composed of three different elements a basic part area part area an
305. le Select sequentially by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking the mouse Select randomly by holding down the CTRL key and clicking the mouse Right click on any of the lines that are selected and then click on Change Setting Value Setthe desired number and click OK The numbers of all the selected lines will be changed simultaneously Testing Overlap 1 Display the screen that has an overlap setting on the ZM series 2 Click on one of the icons for Overlap 0 to Overlap 2 The registered SS will be displayed on the ZM series D ECH SG E S E 3 Once the overlap is displayed on the ZM series the overlap test sheet with items registered on it will be displayed on the Simulator If you click on the same icon again the overlap on the ZM series and the overlap test sheet on the Simulator disappear 4 When an overlap switch registered on the screen is pressed the overlap will be displayed on the ZM series An overlap test sheet will be displayed on the Simulator at the same time Note In the case of a multi overlap with the internal command setting it is impossible to open the overlap from the Simulator Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Useful Operations Creating a New SIM File Using a Shortcut Key By directly dragging an item displayed on the ZM 71SE editor such as a switch or numerical display to the Simulator you can automatically display the applicable memory and comments for that
306. le When this module is used outside Japan these guarantee clauses are not applicable In addition the guarantee should be understood as a guarantee of the delivered product as a single unit and every other damages or losses due to damage or malfunction of the product will not be included in this guarantee Should you have any questions and inquiries please feel free to contact our dealers The whole or partial photocopy of this booklet is prohibited We are not held responsible for any damages created as the result of using this software nor damages claimed by the third party as the result of using this software 4 About the composition of this Manual This manual consists of the following chapters for your thorough understanding of the ZM 71SE editor Chapter1 Basic Operation This chapter explains the basic operation procedure structure and menu items of the editor Chapter2 Screen Composition This chapter explains the structure of screen its holding capacity limitations and methods of placing parts on the screen Chapter3 Drawing Tools This chapter explains the drawing commands and how to use these commands Chapter4 Registration Item This chapter explains the editing procedure of registration items Chapter5 Transfer This chapter explains the data transfer procedure from the editor Chapter6 Print This chapter explains the printing procedure from the editor Chapter7 Useful Techniques This chapter explains useful
307. le the current lamp data memory address draw mode etc is saved When this box is unchecked the data reverts to the default oa 5 The Lamp dialog is displayed Click OK The lamp has been replaced with the selected one 2 26 Chapter2 Screens Parts Enlargement Reduction When a part is clicked handles are shown all around denoting that the part is selected By dragging handles the part can be enlarged or reduced Clicking shows handles Enlarged vertically Parts Selection e When selecting multiple parts drag the mouse enclosing all the desired parts from the top left to the bottom right WR mn y o er lt D on a S a U T O O 3 O 5 fb e When selecting multiple parts individually hold down the Shift key and click eege E a 2 27 Chapter2 Screens Parts Movement e While handles are shown around a selected part drag the part avoid dragging the handles A cross cursor appears and functions as a tool to move the part S Drag with a cross cursor v While a cross cursoris displayed pressing an arrow key gt lt N M on the Xx keyboard moves apartor graphic dot by dot Parts Placement from Tool Bars When an icon for the entry relay or sampling mode is clicked its own tool bar is displayed It is possible to make settings including the Detail dialog for the corresponding part from the displayed tool bar This section explains th
308. lines When this box is not checked 0O the scale is drawn without lines Split No 1 255 Set the number of divisions of the scale Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button OO Long Line When this box is checked M long gradation marks are attached to the scale at the specified pitch When this box is not checked O long gradation marks are not attached Pitch 1 16 This option becomes active when M Long Line is checked Setthe pitch for long gradation marks Enter the numerical value in the data field or set the desired value using the Up Down button Short gradation mark Pitch we Line Long gradation mark 3 31 Chapter3 Drawing Tools 3 32 Drawing Method Depending on the selected draw type the drawing method varies Drawing from the Center 1 Select the left icon for the draw type A BM 2 Make the required setting on the dialog beforehand 3 Drag from the center to the desired radius 4 When you stop dragging a line is displayed Click the mouse at the start point of the arc 5 Move the cursor clockwise portion to be erased or counter clockwise portion to be drawn along the arc and click on the end point Counter clockwise O Start point End point 6 Clicking the mouse draws the pie graph scale Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Drawing from the Line End Position 1 Select the right icon for the draw type
309. list file is automatically read 1 21 Chapter1 Basic Operation Edit Window When the editor is started and a file is opened the Screen Edit window is displayed This section explains operations on the edit window Window Structure The Screen Edit window is taken as an example for explanation El 2M Editor for Windows Version 2 00 untitled 237 Z2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit 0 x File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help k GR ow w CB mz 9 Division No 0 Ime n Haapa g S BE HOPE AENOR S E E ASS A ot te o Al OO OOS 1 IER Screen 0 Edit Calling up the Window Previewl N ext Icons Clicking the Preview or Next icon in the icon bar brings up the previous or next window Jump in the Display Menu Click the Display menu and select Jump The dialog for specifying a screen number is displayed Enter the desired screen number and press OK The Screen Edit wndow of the specified screen number is displayed Display Draw Part Item System Set Tool Bar Y Status Bar Next 4 Skip l s Screen List Item List Switch Lamp Display gt Grid Display 1 22 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Double clicking on the Screen List Window Click the Screen List icon in the icon bar Or click Screen List from the Display menu The Screen List wndow is displayed DA on SK 0 2 Bn
310. lola lacada Option Selling Dialog 35 a o ea O PANINO A E Part File Manadement ENEE Part File Managing Procedure EA Part Editing Menu RENE a RATE il LENG MEMU EE EI RO EE Display EE See mers ad Wl EE Mon Rn EE TOO Menu EE PVVIFIDQOW IVIG EE Ina Modify Part WindoW ccc cee cece ce cece ce cece ce cn ee ceca cece case ae cece ae ensues eeeeeeeeeeae ease DPSS ME E EE EA MEN 16 leanecneen E eae eet pee mers e Ra et ere DISPLAYS olaa Draw EE UN COW MEA aula E eos sedate EA e APP3 33 lees APP3 33 APP3 34 nn APP3 34 lett a APP3 34 e APP3 35 APP3 36 e APP3 36 APP3 38 APP3 38 APP3 38 APP3 38 APP3 39 APP3 39 APP3 40 APP3 41 APP3 41 APP3 42 APP3 42 APP3 42 APP3 43 APP3 43 APP3 43 Chapter 1 Operation Starting and QuIttiNQ ocooococonocicccnnocococononn ll O 1 1 Opening a A TE 1 2 CUIT rra its 1 5 Basic Operation of the Editor aunean neoane 1 6 Names Of Components n os nense aooe onae sens sasse cono cono cess conos 1 6 Nenu Bai E 1 11 BE AA E A oo TE E E 1 17 lolo EE 1 22 O AA EE E E 1 27 Useful Operations o aonne nnno cece coco cece cee cents cono cuss canes anos 1 30 Useful Editing Commands 00 aese snese cece seee cree cess cates oo 1 35 Screen Data File bone 1 42 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Starting and Quitting This section describes how to start and quit the ZM 71SE editor For the ZM 71SE installation proce
311. lowing items can be copied to the clipboard when they are selected Animation Table System Setting Color Pallet 7 33 Chapter7 Useful Techniques 1 34 joa File Menu for File Management Before closing the copy target file window choose whether or not to save the copied data Clicking File brings up the following menu items Eile Edit Display Window Copy Target New Copy Target Open Copy Target Save Copy Target Save As Copy Source Open Quit File Managing Hut Application e Copy Target New Creates anew copy target file e Copy Target Open Opens a copy target file e Copy Target Save Overwrites the currently opened copy target file e Copy Target Save As Click this option to give a different name to the currently opened copy target file for saving e Copy Source Open Opens a copy source file e Quit File Managing Quits File Managing e Quit Application Quits the ZM 71SE editor Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management Part File 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select Parts File The File Manage Part dialog is displayed 3 Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target respectively Files can be selected by clicking Reference File Manage Part x e qa Specify copy source and copy target Copy Source E AProgram FilesizM715 PARTS Parts_ Reference Copy Target E AProgram FilesizM715 PARTSSZMTe Reference
312. ly AS erased and is displayed on completion of mouse dragging Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Moving the Dialog Dragging the title of the Screen Drawing dialog moves the dialog to the desired position Drag around here Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Test Line Bou Circle Test Paint Dot Color IN al Line Style Selecting Colors The procedure of color selection is the same as that used for parts For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Selecting Tiles Tile Tiles can be selected when painting boxes or circles A maximum of 16 tiles can be used Eight tiles are registered as default You can register additional eight tiles as required For the procedure of registering user defined tiles see Chapter 4 Registration Items When tile No 0 is selected the area is painted in the color set for Foreground When a tile other than No O is selected the area is painted in the colors set for Foreground and Background No 0 No 3 Foreground Foreground color color Background color 3 3 UU Q nm O O CH DI cr O d9 Chapter3 Drawing Tools Selecting Line Styles Line styles can be selected for lines boxes and circles There are six line styles available Line Style iy a No 0 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 Solid line Thick line Dotted line Dashed line Two dot chain line MON EN
313. m Tool Bars 2 28 Parts Placement and Setting e 2 34 A PPP cede aueepent ences dasheneecntenaeke 2 34 SWICH ANG LAMP cesta rra 2 39 Data Eege ee Ee EE 240 Relay Relay Sub and Message Modes 0 00000 246 Entry Mode and Data Block Area nss cee cece cee eens cocoa cos 247 Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter and Closed Area Graph ns cece cece cece cece conan sere cono serne eee 248 SEA eee hotest esas tare cee eee sees ace edd oes 249 Trend Graph usina tira miras 2 50 Graphic Mode and Graphic Relay Mode 00 2 50 A e PE A 2 51 TONS DIS OA AAPP PP 2 52 Calendar Display consonancia eebe S 252 MEMO PAU dcir cas 2 54 Macro and Interval Timer 0 0 0 cece cece manne sete cono eeren ees 2 54 Memory Card ccc cece orase cece cece case terse cess sense cess sees renee anes 2 55 ANIMANO E 2 55 o o A e Ur E EER EEE 2 56 JPEG DEP sisi ZE GEN 2 56 A 2 56 To be continued Color Types and Settings a n neoe ne neoe oo se oe oere df Color Ki EE 2 57 92 DU 0 COIR TUDO essiensa a ei 2 58 Ree WY Cv EE 261 Monochrome Tvpe e sasse cono nese nooo sense sees seen seen seas 262 Blinking Setting ee Ke Ve sees esses cono sense cess anes cess anes 263 Chapter2 Screens Screen Composition Each display of the LCD control terminal is called a screen A maximum of 1 024 screens can be registered in a screen data file This chapter explains screen composition and elements containing parts and graphics to be di
314. mber for them IT For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 8 Graph Display inthe ZM 71 SE Instruction Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button 2 49 op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 Fe o gt a Q D re cr S Chapter2 Screens Trend Graph Clicking the Trend Graph icon brings up the Trend Graph dialog e Trend Graph E E x S Ets e ad e A es TE E E Ee SE e ed IR Ce Main Setting Setting Settings 0 In 2 al Ke Bee Division No p i Control Memory F Use Link Parts Select D se KR Place Cancel Place IA For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter8 Graph Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Graphic Mode and Graphic Relay Mode Clicking the Graphic Mode or Graphic Relay Mode icon brings up the corresponding tool bar A a qa identical to the relay sub mode tool bar EES Delete IA For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28
315. menu 13 Change All This command is used to change division numbers or processing cycles of the parts placed on the screen at one time Select the desired part and click this command The Change All dialog is displayed xi m hange AiDivision Nos P H Change All Process Cycle Refresh Yv Change All Division No When this item is checked the division number can be specified Specify the division number to be changed for the selected part Change All Process Cycle When this item is checked the processing cycle can be selected Select the desired processing cycle Clicking OK changes the processing cycle of the selected part at one time 1 33 Chapter1 Basic Operation When a Normal Overlap is Placed 14 Base Overlap 0 Overlap 1 Overlap 2 for changing over the editing layer When clicked it is checked and selected The selected one becomes the editing layer gt Undo Ctrl Z Ca Redo Cl cut Cd 3 Copy Cla amp Paste Ctrl y Delete ON Grid Grid Display Grid Type V Base 1 4 Overlap O Overlap 1 Overlap 2 Hide overlaps with Base checked char qe All w On line Editing On line Run When a Table Data Display Part is Selected This menu appears when a cell cells in a table data display part is are selected by right clicking or right dragging 15 Align Width All cells are adjusted to the width of the top left cell in the selected cells 16 Align Height
316. n Printer tidas hd Command lists commande in alphabetical order Q O O w O CH si IT For more information on the command groups and the commands see Chapter 13 Macro in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Ex Selecting the MOV command 1 Click Transfer under Commands Classification The associated commands are listed under Command Command Commands Clasitication Command ox All FILL Cancel Mov Arithmetical operations Logic Operations Statistic Bit Process f WORD EA 2 Click MOV under Command 4 57 Chapter4 Registration Items 3 Select the desired number of words from WORD 1 word or DWORD 2 words Command 4 Commands Clasification All Arithmetical operations EE Cancel Logic Operations Statistic Bit Process Conversion Command WORD C DWORD 4 Click OK The Line No dialog is displayed again Line No 0 El u00100 5U00100 w FO bam Fl bon 00 FS ES d Condition Test Insert Pelete PENE Next 3 Set FO F1 and F2 as necessary for the selected command 4 Clicking Next brings up the Line No dialog for the next line Clicking Preview brings up the Line No dialog for the previous line Clicking Insert inserts the data setting into the position before the selected line The corresponding dialog is also displayed 5 Clicking Delete deletes
317. n cuca za If no screen is displayed select Redraw from the Display menu or press the Home key on the keyboard 4 23 Chapter4 Registration Items 4 24 oa oa L Macro Setting Overlap parts registered in multi overlap editing can be used with OPEN Macro or CLOSE Macro These macros can be executed when the registered overlap part is displayed OPEN macro on or erased CLOSE macro from the screen Macro is a function to execute computation processing for user programs using the ZM series commands For information on macro commands see Chapter 13 Macro in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function lf a registered multi overlap is set as a call overlap on the screen these macro settings become invalid Setthe overlap as a multi overlap on the screen when enabling the macro settings If you delete a multi overlap that is with an OPEN or CLOSE macro setting be sure to delete the macro as well Failure to delete the macro will cause an error during screen data transfer to the ZM Macro Setting Commande Select OPEN Macro Edit or CLOSE Macro Edit from the Edit menu The corresponding macro editing window is displayed amp Undo Ctrl Z Select All gt Delete il Macro Editing and Deleting The description is provided on page 4 55 Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Block Data blocks parts are provided as areas where data displays such as numerical data or
318. n The corresponding Part Edit window is displayed 7 Tochange a part for modification in the Part Edit wndow click the desired particon The Part Edit dialog is displayed J m etn SW oh o B e te bim ta E Vv Part Edit wl P No fi Cancel Specify the desired number and click OK The corresponding Part Edit window is displayed APP3 5 Appendix 3 Part Editing 8 Create a part See Editing Procedures for Each Part page APP3 7 e Outline Part Edit window New Part icon Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window Modify a part Icons edit menu options or right clicking menu options for the selected part are displayed Part Edit window y The base color of the Part Edit window can be changed so that the image of the part can be obtained when itis placed on the screen Select Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed Open the Menu Dsp tab window Choose the desired color for Background See page APP 3 39 Saving and Closing Part Files File Edit Display Edit bat Ike New Open Save q Property Printer Setting n Print Ctrl F CF Card Manager File Managing Quit Fart Edit Hut Application 1 For a new part file select Save or Save As from the File menu Give the file a name 2 When overwriting an existing file select Save from the File menu
319. n click Change Direction The Select Direction dialog is displayed Choose the desired direction and click OK The selected direction becomes valid Interval Pitch Choose either option for placing copied parts on the screen by pitch or at intervals For more information see the next page X Distance Y Distance Specify distances along the X and Y directions for placing copied parts The unit for these values is Dots or Line Column that is selected 1 35 UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q O wm Chapter1 Basic Operation Quantity X Quantity Y Specify the number of required copies The copy source must be included in this number Ex When a solid box is multiple copied Interval X Distance 20 Y Distance 10 Quantity X 2 Quantity Y 2 Copies are placed as shown below X 20 dots Copy source Y 10 dots Pitch X Distance 60 Y Distance 20 Quantity X 2 Quantity Y 2 Copies are placed as shown below X 60 dots Y 20 dots EE source Order INC This setting is effective when using a data display part as the copy source To increment the selection order number of each copied part check this option M e Step Specify the increment when increasing the selection order number of each copied part Display Order INC This setting is effective when using a switchllamp function mode part as the copy source To increment the display or
320. n the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To recheck the dialog data click this icon 2 37 op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 Fe o gt a Q D re cr S Chapter2 Screens Video Display Clicking the Video button brings up the Overlap Video dialog ZM 300 ZM 7 2 82 Main Display Movement Snap Main Division No Division No m Placement m Placement Video 5 etting Video Setting Delete Cancel Note The ZM 300 is provided with the Video function to show video images For more information see Chapter 18 Video Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function IT For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 2 Overlap inthe ZM 71SE L Instruction Manual Function By clicking OK the Overlap icon is registered in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To recheck the dialog data click this icon 2 38 Chapter2 Screens Switch and Lamp Switches and lamps can be placed in the same manner When placing switch parts click the Switch icon When placing lamp parts click the Lamp icon For more information on placing these parts see page 2 25 e Ss Kime gt lt Main Character Detail Customize Color Division No fo m OFF Jon SL CA gt D00100 00 Output Memory D00100 00 Lamp Memory Momentary
321. ne died ng ee DEE Macro aa ie UR TIME EE Memor e DEE A A A ae RED JPEG DIS stats tact cs cea ches as bod EE are SON DEE Al A O SOTA een Ke Notes on el leie El DEE PP teeters ca tae a anatase emai ha ea uitede am ianiaede eave ener tase ciate Monochrome Type serasa EE E E Blinking Setting Blinking Setting procedure BIKING TIME ele Te EE Chapter3 Drawing Tools BASIC Operation EE 3 2 Screen Drawing Dialog EE e Erasing the Dialog WEE E MOVING the Vidlo EE Ce A A oO Selec Mies loo oa Ada SOLO Se gl Le Be A A O eee Limitations on ie OO Drawing ee aria AA dae 3 0 Line EE DO Single Lines A AAN Continuous a 3 6 BOK EE a a O RECIO ii Ce Chamiered BEE tele DE A A ia AS EOI lacas O ER A A E Circle ld li ill deis El Arc and Section Ee O Drawing om the Santer SE Ee Drawing from the Line End on reno 3 14 Ellipse Gu EE ke Elliptical Kie See Elliptical Seo shod seh testa a os SO LOD Drawing from the Diagonal IN 3 16 Drawing from the Center EE nn lf Text Seele Text Field eeh E e BEE Kalbe Ee ee DEE Text EST 3 18 Selecting Col odia EVO Keele EG NS Placing DEX EE eae iun kane anaes Ome Pattern E a a O OS Placing ES Ge E e Placing Multiple Patterns 6 onanuously EE Ome A A O O E a A a Placing Sra ein e o da ida EZ A o EE Bar Graph calera EE Drawing MENO as acc A A XA Hne 9792 ssi 3 32 3 33 Drawing Method Drawing from fe Centar Drawing from t
322. ng the pentagon handles are shown at its comers When the drawing method icon on the nght is clicked dragging one handle allows the pentagon to rotate At this time the corner on the right of the dragged handle becomes the base for rotation LC Polygon P Rame Chapter3 Drawing Tools Circle Clicking the Circle icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Test Faint Dot O o o ele o ofa Foreground Ei A M Backoraund Paint Frame Ealar I Frame me ene SS EE MEE TES Circle 1 Click the Circle icon in the Screen Drawing dialog Select the draw type Drag trom the center tor the radius O Start point End point Drag from one side to the other for the diameter O Start point End point is drawn el Drag from the start point to the end point of the box where an inscribed circle E O Start point 4 Endpoint Select the desired options for O Paint O Frame Foreground Background Frame Color Tile and Line Type 2 Drag from the start point to the end point A circle is drawn Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Arc and Sector Click the Arc or Sector icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Tent
323. nt Tray lcon Display Tray 0 Tray 1 Change Window Display Arrange Icons Cut Ciy Copy Ctrl C Paste had Delete Select All CG Property Item Information Comment Al UP DOWN KEY iy Size 1 KB 983 Byte ltemNo 2 o ON P3 SW LP OFF y Start ltem Switch 4 Q 0 7 25 Chapter7 Useful Techniques e Click Display on the Tray Icon Display window be selected from four options Change Window Display Iw Large Icon Arrange Icons Small Icon List de Cut Etrit Detail Copy Cha E Paste trits Delete Select All Property Large Icon Large tray icons are displayed The display format can a Trap lcon Display Tray Small Icon Small tray icons are displayed ma Tray lcon Display List All tray icons are listed Tray Tray 1 UP DOWN KEY Detail The number of registered parts and each tray are displayed E Tray Icon Display bytes and the top part of HEEE Brot 1KB Brot 1KB BR urvooWwN KEY 1KB Function 13 Tag Table This option is valid only when Allen Bradley s Control PLC model 7 26 Start ltem H Switch 5 Switch 2 Switch Logix is selected for the Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management This feature makes it possible to copy or delete any screen data file It is also possible to copy only a selected item included in a file such as
324. nt For more information see Chapter 2 Screens Chapter 1 Basic Operation Change All Display Environment Changes the display environment for screens at one time The set environment becomes valid for all the screens Redraw Refreshes the screen display Draw Menu For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Part Menu For more information on the menu items see respective chapters Item Menu For more information on editing of each item see Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen Allows you to perform screen editing Graphic Library Allows you to perform graphic library editing Multi Overlap Allows you to perform multi overlap editing Data Block Allows you to perform data block editing Message Allows you to perform message editing Pattern Allows you to perform pattern editing Macro Block Allows you to perform macro block editing Page Block Allows you to perform page block editing Direct Block Allows you to perform direct block editing Screen Block Allows you to perform screen block editing Tile Allows you to perform tile editing Data Sheet Allows you to perform data sheet editing UU D v O O CH DI cr O Sa e D a a O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Screen Library Allows you to perform screen library editing Multi Languages Used for the language selection function Animation Used fo
325. nt or Change All Display Environment from the Display menu The Display Environment dialog is displayed Display Environment x Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others Edit Layer Base gt Switch Lamp OFF O D Language fi Overlap MV No0 M Nol No 2 Detail M DIYNo Memory M Area Je Paint Dsp l Graphic Relay Dsp ON OF Message Dsp Graphic Library Key Dsp No Data Block Dsp Display path of Animation e Screen CO Muli Uverlap LIB L Select Display Environment when making display environment settings for AS one certain screen Select Change All Display Environment when making display environment settings for all screens in a screen data file Detail Tab Window Edit Layer This option is active for a screen with overlaps normal Select Base or Overlap 0 2 for the layer you are going to edit For more information on overlaps see Chapter 2 Overlap inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Switch Lamp Select from ON OFF and P3 P8 for the status of the switches or lamps displayed on the screen The current status is indicated on the icon bar as well as the status bar For more information on switches and lamps see Chapter 3 Switch in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Language Use this option to select the language used on the screen For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Fun
326. nt is placed at coordinates 0 3 The maximum number of one byte characters which can be displayed on the one byte character grids depends on the ZM model Refer to the following table when placing messages or texts on the screen Switch When matrix switch ZM 72 82 is used the switch operating area is determined based on the switch grids The grids are based on the unit 16 x 20 dots the unit of switch 14 x 18 dots plus spaces 2 x 2 dots The reference point is placed at the coordinates 1 1 2 13 Chapter2 Screens Mode The mode grids are equivalent to the one byte character grids but their reference points differ The mode grids are based on the unit 8 x 20 dots The reference point is placed at 0 0 Lines and columns are used to indicate item positions as the figure on the left When specifying overlap positions etc by external signals indicate their column and line numbers 0 1 2 3 Column Line Free Your desired grids can be set by specifying the following options X Offset Y Offset X Pitch Y Pitch L Relationship between Offset and Pitch Grids are placed from the offset point atintervals specified by X and Y pitches Ex 1 Ex 2 X Offset 0 X Offset 10 Y Offset 0 Y Offset 10 X Pitch 20 X Pitch 20 Y Pitch 20 Y Pitch 20 Offset point 20 0 40 0 Offset point 30 10 0 0 0 20 0 40 2 14 Chapter2 Screens M Place Switches on Switch Grids
327. number for Start and End respectively 3 Click Print at the bottom left of the dialog Printing starts APP3 35 y 2 5 5 Q er gt OD D N 3 e U o l 1 D Appendix 3 Part Editing Part File Management Parts from different part files can be copied into other files Close the current file Copying is performed by bringing up the copy source file and copy target file windows Part File Managing Procedure L Clicking File Managing brings up the menu The File Copy File Delete File Divide h and File Combine commands are not active for part file management 1 Select File Managing from the File menu and click Parts File File Edit Display EditPart ltem Tool window New Open Save Save As Property Printer Setting d i Print Ctrl F CF Card Manager Screen Data File Quit Part Edit Parts File File Managing Quit Application File Copy File Delete File Divide File Combine File Comparing 2 The File Manage Part dialog is displayed Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target and click OK 3 The item selection pull down menu is displayed Choose Switch for example Click OK 4 The copy source and target file windows are displayed The source file window is placed above the target file window 5 Drag the desired part from the copy source file window to the target file window Copying is exe
328. nvert to Rich Text The printing image of a screen datais saved asa Page 7 19 Format Rich Text file format Add Video Menu The ZM 300 video display function can be created Page 7 21 Video and placed with ease Custom Part Custom parts are registered Page 7 21 Parts oritems to be used often are stored in trays Page 7 23 Tag Table Set the tag table when using Allen Bradley s Page 7 26 Control Logix 2 4 4 Q e Gu Chapter7 Useful Techniques Function 1 Error Check The files can be checked for errors If any error is found its cause and remedies are displayed Operation Procedure 1 Select Error Check from the Tool menu 2 The check result is indicated in the Error Check window File Display ltem System Setting Tool Window Sap 0 1710 1943 E EC e EE LEEA e ete e a o LC E Oe Es DEF BS Error Check Y When no error is found No Error is displayed 3 To close this window click the x Close button at the upper right or the click the upper left icon and select Close amp Error Check Gbreae Switch DIV U screen No Setting Move Size Minimize O Maximize Next Ctrl F6 Reading the Error Check List When an error occurs the following Error Check window is displayed 2 Error Check E Each line is composed of the following information E error W warning Layer Function Division No Error occurring position E Error
329. o one part o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa A D Pi BECKER x A A B C D E F A keypad part consists manmi GIH LIJ KIL ofagroupofswitch 4 5 pw 7 LAIL L6 Jou RCT OTR Aur DEE e selected from Entry Io Thiel 0 When creating a switch for a keypad there is no option for choosing the number of notches The parts for the keypad must be 2 notch However a function must be chosen from the switch function pull down menu zw e mm mm mm mm mm mm mm APP3 15 Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon The function pull down menu is displayed ELELEE AA Tenkey Pad Part 0 Edit Text Num Enter Clear Toggle Sign Space Backspace Delete 1 1 Move to Left Move to Right Move Up Move Down Move Cursor to Right Move Cursor to Left Conwert Graphic Library 3 Choose Text Num for example A dotted box and a mover tool appear Click the mover tool in the desired position A new switch part is placed in the window 4 Createthe ON and OFF displays of the switch as explained in Editing Switch Lamp Parts steps 6 to 14 on page APP3 10 5 After editing the switch close the Modify Part window The former e
330. o use ZM 371TA 2002 4 1 09 28 30 S FONT VE DRV VER 1 210 SYSTEM PROG VER 1 000 VER 1 300 1 000 1 000 SHARP JW series HK Gothic Error Stoj Screen Data PLC Type SHARP JW link module Information Comment Size 5832704 Signal Level RS232C PLC Stat No 0 Editor MJ1 STOP mode Communicating POWER d Make sure to connect the cable to the modular jack MJ1 on the ZM series 9 12 KN Chapter 5 Transfer When Modular Jack 1 Editor Port is specified in the Modular Jack dialog selected from the System Setting menu in the screen data file data transfer between the computer and the ZM series is executable while the PLC and the ZM series are in either RUN or STOP mode When any setting other than Modular Jack 1 Editor Port is made press the SYSTEM key and then the F1 key on the ZM series to bring it to the STOP mode Main Menu local main screen and start data transfer Screen Data Transfer to ZM Series 1 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu The Transfer dialog is displayed Select Display for Transfer Device and Screen Data for Transfer Data Click the Detail Setting button The Communication Detail dialog is displayed Select a computer serial port to be used and a baud rate between the computer and the ZM series Click OK Click the PC gt button Screen data tran
331. ode parts etc Multi overlap Used for multi overaps parts Page 4 20 Data block Used for data block areas parts Page 4 25 Message Used for relay mode message mode bit sampling Page 4 28 alarm displays parts Pattern Used for patterns drawing tool Page 4 37 Marica Used by CALL commands in macro programs or Page 4 55 macro mode parts Page block Used for relay sub mode or message mode parts Page 4 61 Direct block Used for relay sub mode or message mode parts Page 4 65 Screen block Used for relay mode parts Tile Used for drawing Data sheet Used for data sheets Screen library Used for screens and overlaps Multidanguage Used for changing the language used on the screen Page 4 84 ee Used for animation only for the ZM 300 series Animation except for ZM 352D Page 4 85 Chapter 4 Registration Items Screen A screen is an editing window to be opened at start up of the editor software Calling a Screen To go to a different screen from the current screen or while a different registration item window is opened select Screen from the Item menu METERTE gt m No a Cancel CS Graphic Library Mult Overlap Data Block Message Pattern LO e D D mD Macro Block Fage Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Muli anguages Animation The Screen dialog is displayed Specify
332. og The Color Select option is valid to change the color The above step completes a part selection IT For other settings such as memory see the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function With the Model ZM 352D This section provides notes on 3D parts usage and the setting procedure for the ZM 352D Read the following thoroughly in advance Notes on Usage Parts File Sharp Corporation provides two 3D parts files for the ZM 352D During installation of the ZM 71SE software the files are stored in the Parts folder included in the Zm71S folder e 3Dfront_128 z3p Switches lamps e 3Dside 128 Z3p Switches lamps Do not move the Parts folder and bitmap files in the folder to different storage places Do not change their names 1 APP2 15 Appendix2 3D Parts APP2 16 E 1O _ Memory Capacity 3D parts need more memory than memory for ordinary parts Check the current status of memory use by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu If a message The size is too large to communicate is given during data transfer memory expansion by installing an optional memory cassette ZM 300EM is recommended Color Pallet Use the color pallet for 3D parts instead of the ordinary color pallet when setting the colors of 3D parts Open the Environment Setting tab window in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu Check Use 3D Parts The message below appears CT S Read the pale
333. ol bar Status Bar This menu is checked as default The status bar is shown at the bottom of the editor screen Uncheck the menu when the status bar is not necessary Jump Used for screen calling Preview Brings up the previous screen Next Moves to the next screen Skip Skips screens that are not registered when scrolling screens Screen List Brings up currently editing screens or graphics in the graphic library in a list form For more information see page 1 23 Hem List Brings up the switches lamps and graphic items placed on the screen in a list form For more information see page 1 27 Switch Lamp Display Allows you to choose the status of a switch or lamp on the screen The OF F ON P3 to P8 options can be selected when this menu is clicked Clicking each option changes the switch lamp display Grid Display Shows grids when this menu is checked Unchecking this menu clears grids from the screen ON Grid Selects the on grid screen environment when this menu is checked Unchecking this menu cancels the on grid screen environment Grid Offset Position Becomes valid when Free is chosen for Grid Type in the Grid tab window Click this menu and then click the desired position on the screen The grid offset position is determined Zoom Brings up the sub menu containing 400 200 100 and 75 Choose the desired option to change the zoom Display Environme
334. ollowing tool bar Ke O E onQ 9 identical tothe relay sub mode tool bar D I HH YY For the setting procedure using the tool bar to be displayed by clicking an icon see page 2 28 For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 12 Memo Pad in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Macro and Interval Timer L L 2 54 Clicking the Macro Mode icon brings up the Macro dialog Clicking the Interval Timer icon brings up the Interval Timer dialog Macro j x Interval Timer E x wee Si Division No H a Division No H ed S MacroBlock No jo e Merton DO0100 00 S al Time up Time jo y P 100msec No of Relays wel Start Mem Designation D00100 00 EX LEE Macra at Star l Stop timer after execution of macro ON Macro fi 7 ONMacroBlock No fo E OFF Macro fi F GFFMacroBlock No fo E Process Cycle Low Speed y Process Cycle Low Speed Delete Cancel Delete Cancel For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter 13 Macro in the ZM 71 SE Instruction Manual Function When the dialog setting is concluded the dialog icon is shown in the Part auxiliary tool box in the lower left corner of the screen To bring up the dialog again click the icon Chapter2 Screens Memory Card Clicking the Memory Card Mode icon brings up the following tool bar Delete Detail Memory card record name Memory card record num
335. on 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 Signal Level RS232C Data Lebgth 7 PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 Parity Even Send Delay 0 msec A A A A POWER d Never turn off the ZM series during system program transfer Font Data Extension ftd Only when the screen data to be transferred contains font data that is different from the font data in the ZM series the font data including the Main Menu local main screen data file is also transferred automatically Afterwards font data transfer will be executed automatically if any changes are made to the font data in the screen data The list below shows the font types and their corresponding font data files Chinese simplified Fnt_chn ftd Korean Fnt_kor ftd Y 12 point font data is automatically transferred for the fonts of Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic and EnglishWestern Europe HK Times It is not necessary to select these files 5 26 KN Chapter 5 Transfer Temp PLC2 Only when the screen data to be transferred contains the temperature control network PLC 2Way settings that are different from the settings in the ZM series the temperature control network PLC2 program is also transferred Afterwards the temperature control network PLC2 program transfer will be executed automatically if any changes are made to the program in the screen data When the editor software ZM 71SE has been updated choose Temp PLC2 for transfer to the ZM series
336. one division can contain multiple parts or only one part depends on the types of parts For more information on the limit on the number of parts see page 2 18 e When placing parts on a division the division number is shown on the icon bar Chapter2 Screens e The ZM 71SE automatically performs division number allocation while judging the maximum permissible number of parts per division for each part to be placed You do not need to worry about allocation of division numbers generally A part that executes its function singly such as a switch lamp numerical data display or bar graph has no limit on the number of parts per division page 2 18 It is not necessary to worry about division numbers for placing these types of parts LO e D D mD O O 3 CH O D O mD Multiple switch parts can be placed on one division ki gt ki gt Ea Only one piece can be placed on one division depending on the type of part as described below Combination of Parts Different parts may be combined to execute one function Such parts must share the same division number e Error message display relay mode e Numerical data input on the ZM entry mode If the parts are given different division numbers they may not work correctly Correct their division numbers Allocate the same division number to the display area and the scroll switches Temperature Error Trend Graph 1 Same div
337. ong switch grids Keep M Place Switches on Switch Grids checked With analog switches switches can be moved dot by dot regardless of switch grids To do this select Display Environment from the Display menu open the Grid tab window and uncheck O Place Switches on Switch Grids Preparation for Creating the ON Display of a Switch Part When creating a switch part the ON display is placed on top of the OFF display When the ON or OFF state of a switch is distinguished only by color change the ON and OFF displays of the switch must be in the same position To create the ON display after the OFF display has been created copy the OFF display in the Modify Part window then paste the copied display to the Modify Part window for the ON display and finish it as the ON display 9 After editing the OFF display copy the display for creating the ON display 10 Close the Modify Part window The former Switch Part Edit window is displayed The OFF display as created appears in the window Switch Part Edit window 11 Create the ON display of the switch Click the ON icon in the tool bar 12 Click the switch part and click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 13 The Modify Part window for the switch part is opened Edit the part for the ON display Paste the copied OFF display to the window After editing reset the part frame by choosing Frame Auto Fitting bg PO Y A
338. opened can be stored in a bitmap file extension bmp 1 Select Save As Bitmap File from the Tool menu The following dialog is displayed Tool window axi Error Check Save in lol My Pictures sl e E pr ES Memory Uze 17 bmp Memory Address Use untitled bmp Change Memory d Convert to Rich Test Format Add wideo Menu iden Read from Bitmap File Save As Bitmap File gt RTE save as type bmp e Cancel E Tag Table 2 Give aname to the file and click Open The pattern is now stored as a bitmap 4 52 Chapter 4 Registration Items Pattern Environment Setting The Display menu includes the following Commande Display Environment The following dialog is displayed Display Environment KS RS Cio C 200 C aog fe On A a A A A EE Lancel oom W Grid Display kg Blink Display FT Monochrome 0 gt D Ka gt Zoom 100 200 400 800 Select a zoom in for display Default is 800 M _Grid Display Select whether or not to display grids in the background M Blink Display It is possible to distinguish the color set to flash on the pattern When unchecked the color set to flash is indistinguishable from the normal color O Monochrome With ZM 42 43 monochrome type or ZM 62E checking this option depicts patterns in 8 or 2 gradation colors Therefore patterns are made closer to images depicted on the ZM Background Color Wh
339. or more information on use and setting items seethe relevant chapter inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function PM EE AA E E E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 6 17 8 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 4 3 1 Overlap 13 Bar Graph 25 Alam Display 2 Switch 14 Pie Graph 26 Time Display 3 Lamp 15 Panel Meter 27 Calendar Display 4 Num Data Display 16 Stat Graph 28 Memo Pad 5 Char Display 17 Trend Graph 29 Macro Mode 6 Message Display 18 Closed Area Graph 30 Interval Timer 7 Table Data Display 19 Graphic Mode 31 Memory Card Mode 8 Relay Mode 20 Graphic Relay Mode 32 Animation ZM 300 series only 9 Relay Sub Mode 21 Trend Sampling 33 Video ZM 300 seres only 10 Message Mode 22 Data Sampling 34 JPEG Display ZM 300 series only 11 Entry Mode 23 Bit Sampling 35 Sound ZM 300 series only 12 Data Block Area 24 Relay Sampling Edit Tool Bar IA Each icon has the function shown below For more information see Edit Menu page 1 12 b HE G ii a hha atin E Cut Point Search Copy Redo Paste Undo Multi Copy Change the Setting of a Part Placed Move to Front Flip Move to Back Rotate Graphic Group Ungroup Chapter 1 Basic Operation Draw Tool Bar IT Each icon has the function shown below For more information see Chapter 3 Drawing Tools HQS Bees dos Ae D I Me Line Screen Library Box ulti Text Circle Trend Graph Scale Text Pie Graph Scale Pattem Bar Graph Scale Paint Dot Graphic Call UU
340. ottom are selected Click the Copy icon Clickthe top number of the copy target lines Click the Paste icon The copied lines are displayed from the specified top line 4 59 Chapter4 Registration Items 4 60 Deleting Lines Click a line number to be deleted and select Delete from the Edit menu The selected line is deleted SG File Edit Display ltem System Setting Tool Window Unda Re hal Heda hier eje Cut Ctrl 5 Copy Ctrl C Este Chic Eopyto Selected Sereen Undo Paste ta Selected Sereen ttt it When deleting multiple lines at one time click the top number of the lines hold down the Shift key and click the bottom number of the lines Selecting Delete from the Edit menu deletes the lines from the specified top to the specified bottom Chapter 4 Registration Items Page Block Registered messages can be divided into groups and registered in page blocks Page blocks are used in the relay sub mode parts or the message mode parts Page Block Structure A maximum of 1 024 page blocks can be registered One page block can contain 256 lines Message Page block Message group No 3 Block No 0 0 No 0 Control box emergency stop 2 No 1 Control box emergency stop O No 2 EMER GEN CY STOP button is o N i pressed on the control box EMERGENC Y STOP button is 5 o 3 Reset the button pressed on the control box O No 4 Re set the button x No 5 No 6 Operation bo
341. ource image color is selected Ordered Dithering Error diffusion pattern is made closer to regular pattern Diffusion 0 3 standard 1 Specify a level of diffusion Color 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to brightness or color for depicting When a specified number gets smaller brightness takes priority over color Green 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to blue green based color or red yellow based color for depicting When a specified number gets smaller green based color takes priority over other colors Convert Clicking this option depressed brings up the preview of the placed image Redraw When any setting O Dither or O Pseudo Gradation has been changed click Convert depressed and Redraw The image according to the change is previewed 7 16 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 8 DXF File Convert A DXF file can be imported into a screen data file as graphic data Operation Procedure Select DXF File Convert from the Tool menu The DXF File Select dialog is displayed 2 Choose the desired DXF file and click Open The Convert Setting dialog 1 is displayed Covert Setting 3 Specify Zoom in the range of 10 to 250 4 When setting conditions for file import click Detail Setting Detail Setting Been piri NA For more information see the next section 7 17 a Chapter7 Useful Techniques 5 Click OK The cross cursor with
342. own below The cursor changes into Drag it until the cell is adjusted to the desired width eee A AN A A A AO A AAA eer 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 123458 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 ce TI e When changing the height of the cell specify a demarcation line in the first column as shown below The cursor changes into SE Drag it until the cell is adjusted to the desired height semen 12345 12345 12345 12345 ei 45 12345 12345 123451 112345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 l om Right Click Menu When cells are selected by right clicking or right dragging a pop up menu is displayed The same menu without Detail Setting is displayed when Table Data Display Editing is selected from the Edit menu Forthe description of Make Browser File selected from Table Data Display Editing in the Edit menu see Chapter 28 Web Server in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Align width Align height Align character UE Copy Paste Insert Delete ER Detail Setting 2 44 Chapter2 Screens e Align Width All cells are adjusted to the width of the top left cell in the selected cells This width is applied to all cells iA 1234 12345 12345 12345 12345 EPZ 12345 5 e Align Height All cells are adjusted to the height of the top left cell in the selecte
343. panel meter closed area graph 2 48 relay and relay sub modes occcoonccococoo co 2 46 Sampdoria ads 2 51 SONA A acre T S 2 56 statistic grapi ade 2 49 switch and lamp WEE 2 39 ine A EE a a a 2 52 ERE NG GRAIN ica ares como nares 2 50 VIA EE 2 56 o ite ee EE dee 2 17 IS UE 2 21 Let e EE 2 21 E EE S aac ae aad E 2 22 Parts tab WINGOW cece cee nanne sees cess cono senne ones 2 17 DSS WON tei terete cet ites iat i datas lee nes 1 42 sereen dal oi 1 42 paste DIM aras 7 14 A AE 4 37 ok ele DE 3 23 DEUDA la tee T iat ae 2 48 Point Search NEE 1 41 PUNUNG EE 6 1 available printers A see renne rerema 6 1 Option Setting dialog eee cee nanea oo 6 2 DIG a ao E neCee pt AP P3 34 prelimina es occcconocononcn cono onae cess cono nono snes cnn 6 1 preliminary steps 2 n ce cece cece nono cette eee cents cnn es 6 1 Print Setting dialog moocooocooo cette eee es 64 printing currently opened window 05 6 printing example ln le EE 6 11 SEOD ss EEN 6 8 memory address use list 6 10 Screen OU pd Gis ds 6 8 SYSTEM Seting tara 6 9 A cent cue taeda ese eatnasian 6 9 Use Cross reference 0 ccc nss cece cee cono eee 6 10 POOLAT EE 5 25 POPE EE 1 42 INDEX R ele te HONT aaa A 4 1 Cla wg e NEE 4 85 CON a red 4 2 data DIOCK EE 4 25 environment setting n s sese cess eee cocoa cos 4 27 data Mee iu a 4 75 ss A
344. play Calendar Display Memo Pad lt Explanation gt Display error messages according to ON OFF status of the error bits It is possible to memory the error history S Cancel 9 6 Chapter 9 Wizard 2 Select whether or not error history records are necessary It is necessary to know the errors currently occurring in this example Therefore select Not Necessary Click the Next button Error Display 3 Select in which order error messages are to be displayed Select Order of Registered Messages Relay Error Display N Q Cc gu DI D m x lt D 3 d Relay The relay mode is established on completion of setting Click the Next button 9 7 Chapter9 Wizard 4 Four types of message displays are previewed Error Display X lt Back Cancel Pull down menu Select a color as desired Click the desired type from the four The upper right type is selected in this example The selected type is enclosed in a red frame Click the Next button 5 The selected display image is displayed Error Display X Target memory setting D bel O FE a Sub display Dear att OM lt Back Cancel Target Memory Setting Allocate a memory bitfor error message display MO is allocated in this example O With Sub display Relay sub Check this when detailed information should be displayed as a sub message Unchec
345. played File Name The screen data file name is displayed File Comment The comment for the current screen data file can be entered A maximum of 16 1 byte characters eight 2 byte characters can be entered The comment entered here is transferred to ZM as well when screen data is transferred Change Password Use this button when setting a password for the screen data file or when changing the existing password A maximum of six alphanumeric characters can be set The password should be entered when opening the screen data file or downloading the transferred data on ZM A password ensures security against unauthorized access Manage the password on your own Note that Sharp Manufacturing Systems is o not liable for any damages resulting from unknown password 1 42 IOC Chapter 1 Basic Operation Memory Use Tab Window Some information that is displayed by selecting Memory Use from the Tool menu is displayed in this tab window Property E File Information Memory Use Environment The Number of Byte Used 566 Byte Registration ltem R Screen 1 Graphic Library 0 0 Graphic Library 1 0 0 0 Graphic Library 2 Graphic Library 3 Graphic Library 4 Property E x File Information Memory Use Environment MV Create Backup File Auto save 60 minute intervals O Shorten the Title Display Check this box when you prefer short window titles that are displayed on top
346. position Data block display area on the screen Offset position on the data block A Line A Setting Data 1 1234 Data 2 1234 Line A Setting Dates 1234 Data 1 1234 Data 4 1234 Data 2 1234 Data 5 1234 An offset position on the data block is shown with an OFF mark Every data block has an offset position at coordinates X Y 0 0 as default To change the position follow the procedure below 1 Click the Offset icon on the drawing tool bar OO POR 1 2 Across cursor marked with OFF appears LL OFF 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The offset mark is displayed at that location Changing the offset position prior to registering a data block is not valid Set an offset position after registering a data block Chapter 4 Registration Items Data Block Environment Setting Environment setting for data block is also started from Display Environment in the Display menu as performed for screen editing Therefore this section explains the display environment settings that are different from those in screen editing Base Screen Display While editing a data block a screen or multi overlap can be placed behind the data block to check the actual image 4 Only a data block Data block displayed on a base Change set value y D Line A setting D Data1 1234 Datat 1234 Data2 1234 Data 1234 Q Data3 1234 Data3 1234 2 sf o ue Data 4 1234 Data 4 123
347. r GU 3 Manual font setting page APP1 11 in this chapter When automatic font setting is not valid for any function setin step 2 make a manual font setting 4 Data transfer to the ZM series page APP1 13 in this chapter Transfer the screen data using the HK font to the ZM series APP1 7 Appendix 1 Fonts APP1 8 o Font Type Setting In the Font Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu select EnglishWestern Europe HK Gothic or EnglishWestern Europe HK Times for Font If you attempt to change a Font setting from English Western Europe to EnglishWestern Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times the following alarm message appears CT x Will change the character size to match the Font IF changing the size it cannot be restored Please make the backup File before changing the size When Yes is clicked the English Western Europe font is converted into the HK Gothic or HK Times whichever is selected that is in the number of points closest to the X enlargement factor of the English Western Europe font If no backup copy of the screen data is saved click No and save a backup copy If you attempt to change a Font setting from English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times to English Western Europe an alarm message appears as well The table below shows the character sizes in relation to font conversion English Westem Europe gt HK Fon
348. r Diffusion If a color of the source image is not included in the color pallet two bits in similar colors are placed alternately so as to reproduce the color Nothing A pallet similar to the source image color is selected Ordered Dithering Error diffusion pattern is made closer to regular pattern Diffusion 0 3 standard 1 Specify a level of diffusion Color 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to brightness or color for depicting Whena specified number gets smaller brightness takes priority over color Green 0 15 standard 8 Assign priority to blue green based color or red yellow based color for depicting When a specified number gets smaller green based color takes priority over other colors Convert Clicking this option depressed brings up the preview of the placed image 4 51 Chapter4 Registration Items Redraw When any setting Dither or Pseudo Gradation has been changed click Convert depressed and Redraw The image according to the change is previewed In the case of the ZM 42 to 82 series When the O Use 3D Parts in the Environment Setting tab window opened in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu setting is changed the pallet is also changed and the colors of the placed bitmap vary accordingly To bring the bitmap to the initial condition repeat pasting operation of the bitmap Io Storing in a Bitmap File The pattern currently being
349. r the animation function System Setting Menu The menu contains commands required for system setting For more information see Chapter 1 System Setting in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Tool Menu This menu contains useful commands for screen creation For more information see Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Window Menu Cascade Aligns and overlaps multiple windows Tile Aligns multiple windows like tiles Arrange Icons Aligns the minimized windows Window titles When multiple windows are opened their titles are indicated in the Window menu Clicking the title of a window brings it to the top Help Menu Topic Search Brings up the Help window The usage of the Help menu is the same as that in Windows Version Information Indicates the editor version information Dialog Chapter 1 Basic Operation Setting and Operating Technique in Dialogs Main Detail Division No Type Command Memory Di 6330 EEE Info Output Memory Sul 6340 SE 5 Pov Target Memory Input Item Select 3 d Aen C External Dutput Memory Internal 1 ph Scale Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Text Circle Text Paint Dot Enlarge X WE rennen ET ET Tar Enlarge Y Background MAMM T FREE E Text File Normal FT Transparent J Italic Box Use Writing Enabled Bit T ZM 30 Compatible jo
350. rently OTransparent Y Transparent Foreground color Foreground color only ABCD ABCD Background color Ditalic When Italic is checked the text is italicized O Italic M Italic ABCD ABCD Normal 1 4 Bold Shadow The text is displayed as shown below o Leen ABCD 1 4 ABCD ABC Do Background color SES Foreground color 1 4 is valid only for 1 byte characters Bold is valid only when 1 is set for O Enlarge X 3 20 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Text File It is possible to import data in a text file Follow the procedure below 1 Click the Text File button in the Text tab window The Open dialog is displayed Pie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi Text Box Circle Text Paint Dot Enlarge lt E MO E eey fH SE Con Normal Y J Transparent I Italic e ite pg tion sl Noma C 1 4 Bold C Shadow 21x Look in C ZM715 e e ES Wav S ADRCNY32 DLL WebServ 9 Callno dll ja Ldbtemp ldc la CB100_E Lst al Ldbtemp Idt gt ColorCombo dll a AD4402_E Lst gt ColorPalette2 dll laa AD4404_E Lst gt Comm20 dll A Files of type Text Data DI Cancel Z 2 Choose the desired text file and click Open The Text Read dialog is displayed Here you can confirm the text in the text file AAA a Operacion Preparada OFF r File Cancel 3 If the text that is displaye
351. rinting the MR400 format table register 6 5 5 P H S O O Cc Chapter6 Print 6 6 O Modbus Slave Table 0 to 255 This option is valid when Modbus slave communication is in use Select the option when printing the Modbus slave memory table O Animation 0 to 1023 Forthe ZM 300 series except for ZM 352D Select this option when printing the frame that is defined with an animation number The frame used for the specified animation number can be printed Start Page Specify the first page number to be printed Option Setting Button Clicking this button brings up the Option Setting dialog For an explanation of the options refer to Option Setting Dialog Print Button Click this button Printing is executed as specified Chapter 6 Print Printing the Currently Opened Window g Set the options in the Option Setting dialog in advance Select Printer Setting from the File menu Select Present Window Printing from the File menu At the same time a printing start command is given and the currently opened window is printed out as specified in the Option Setting dialog When the Memory Address Use List Is Opened The Memory Address Use list is displayed on the editor window as follows BF List of Memory Address Use 1 1 Memory Address Use Cross reference D00000 D00999 Comm Parameter Read Area Comm Parameter Read Area Comm Parameter Read Area
352. rmal gt Transparent f Italic Direction RGT sl GG Nom 14 Bold C Shadow Foreground Background L H you would like to enter two byte characters switch IME of your computer and operate as appropriate Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Selecting Colors Foreground and background colors can be set For the color setting procedure see Chapter 2 Screens Text Properties Enlarge X Enlarge Y This option is valid when the screen data contains fonts except the Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times font data The setting range for Enlarge is 1 to 8 The character size at each value for Enlarge is shown below Value for 1 byte W xH das Sech rage Sec ee 2 byte W x H dats 16x 16 48 x 48 64 x 64 96x96 112x112 128x 128 IT For the Gothic English Western Europe HK Gothic and English Western Europe HK Times font types this option changes to Point For more information see Appendix 1 Fonts g ei gt O lt D Fe O si a Rotate Depending on the selected option the text can be rotated as shown below me eco Direction Depending on the selected option the text can be directed as shown below A D B C Text ABCD C DCBA B D A 3 19 Chapter3 Drawing Tools OTransparent Depending on whether O Transparent or M Transparent is selected the foreground and background colors are displayed diffe
353. rred to the ZM series This section changes FONT VER 1 300 1 010 1 000 ZM 3TATA ra ee System Information UE DRV VER 1 210 SYSTEM PROG VER 1 040 SHARP JW series HK Gothic Screen Data PLC Type SHARP JW link module Error Stop Information Comment Time Out 0 50 sec Size 5832704 Retry 3 Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 Signal Level RS232C Data Length 7 PLC Stat No 0 Stop Bit 1 Parity Even Send Delay Omsec When screen data is transferred the 12 point font data is always transferred to the ZM series first APP 1 13 A 1 sjuoy Jo sed Appendix 1 Fonts Data transfer order Transferred Transferred Transferred Expansion font auto matic manual font setting gt Notes on Font Data to be Transferred If changes are made to the Manual Font Setting tab window during online editing the correct font data according to the changes will not be transferred Stop online editing and perform data transfer Error for the ZM series e ltem No 22 Expansion font e Error No as per the following The font data specified by manual font setting in the screen data does not existin the ZM series Texts specified by automatic font setting are Transfer the screen displayed normally However in the case offont data again data that does not exist on the ZM series texts are displayed in the 12 point size temporarily APP1 14 If Te
354. rt Item System Setting Tool Window Help To minimize the indication on the title bar click Property in the File menu and put a check mark M to O Shorten the Title Display on the Environment tab window The title bar shows the minimum information as shown below E ZM Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 Z2M 37 T 640 480 32K Color Screen 0 Edit Ee x File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Help Za SE N JIR E OG z IEA IEC NDA oK Division Wel 04 1 6 Chapter 1 Basic Operation Menu bar Clicking each menu brings up a drop down menu Operations and edit items available with the ZM 71SE editor are indicated IT For more information on the menu items see page 1 11 Icon Bar The icon bar contains the following icons UU D m O O CH DI cr O O e D dd Q ech O wem information New File creen List Open Ne xt Save Preview Transfer Skip Start Simulator Switch Lamp Display Print Onine Run Select Detail Prop Change Division Number The current division number is indicated This number should be used for identifying the division when placing parts or items IT For more information on the division number see Chapter 2 Screens Chapter1 Basic Operation Tool Bar The tool bar contains icons that are equivalent to some menu items in the menu bar There are three tool bars Parts Tool Bar IA Each icon has the function shown below F
355. rt Mo E pas fi D y fi Direction AGT BIM M No INC Cancel Start No Specify the top pattern number to be placed Qty X Y Specify the quantity of patterns along the X axis and the Y axis Direction RGT BTM Choose either direction of aligning patterns in multi placement No INC Check this box M No INC when placing patterns increasing the number by one When this is not checked O No INC the same patterns are copied for multi placement 3 24 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools 2 Click OK A dotted line box as large as the pattern is displayed with the cursor PS O o 5 O lt OD er gt O o 0 EE A A a TE a al A AI A EI E ee EE EE 3 Click the mouse in the desired position Multiple patterns are placed in alignment Pattem No 5 Pattem No 6 Pattem No 7 Pattem No 8 Clicking the mouse again places the same pattern on the screen To cancel o pattern placement click the Select icon 3 25 Chapter3 Drawing Tools Paint An enclosed area can be painted Clicking the Paint icon brings up the Screen Drawing dialog shown below Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot Foreground Background GR O Boundary Color for Foreground Select the boundary color to be used when painting When M Boundary Color for Foreground is checked the enclosed area is p
356. ry 1D Screen Parts Management Through Screen Library Should a part registered in a screen library be replaced after it has been placed on screens replace it in the screen library only The parts on the screens are also replaced simultaneously When the calendar part in screen library No 0 has been replaced the parts on screen Nos 0 to 2 are also replaced 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE el 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE Screen No 0 Screen No 1 Screen No 2 Screen library No 0 02 01 01 12 15 15 TUE Replace the calendar part in the screen library y Screen library is available for management of parts on screens 4 82 IOC Chapter 4 Registration Items Offset Position Setting Every screen library has a reference position called an offset When a registered screen library is called to the screen it is placed based on the offset position Offset position in screen library SLIB position on the screen Screen library shows the offset position with an OFF mark Every screen library has an offset position at coordinates X Y 0 0 asdefault To change the position follow the procedure below 1 Click the Offset icon on the drawing tool bar L e 2 A cross cursor marked with OFF appears 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The offset mark is displayed at that location Changing the offset position prior to registering a screen library is not valid Set an offset pos
357. ry per screen ZM 300 256 KB ZM 42 to 82 128 KB and the limited number of parts that can be registered on one division one layer base overlap 0 2 and one screen four layers The limitation and the maximum number of the parts are listed below IA For more information on divisions see page 2 2 Limit per Limitper Limit per screen division layer ZM 300 series ZM 5 2 7 2 82 52 HD ZM 42 43 62E GE EE Relay Relay sub Setting memory Entry Data block Bar graph Setting memory Pie graph Setting memory Panel meter Setting memory Message Chapter2 Screens Parts Limit per Limit per Limit per screen division layer ZM 300 series ZM 52 72 82 52HD ZM 42 43 62E Graphic relay 256 Setting memory Trend sampling 256 Setting memory Data sampling 256 Setting memory Bit sampling 256 Setting memory Relay sampling 256 Setting memory Alarm display 256 Setting memory Time display None Setting memory Calendar display Setting memory 1 Not available with ZM 72 82 matrix type DEER 286 setmana woas 1 4 4 SS PEG assays 1 286 setmana sunday AUTO 288 Setting memoy 1 A maximum of four memory card modes can be set on one screen four layers though there is a limitation For instance two layers of one screen cannot contain one list display each But itis possible that one layer contains one list display and a different layer of the same screen contains one format screen 2 When placing
358. s Parts File Ex Switch Clicking the Switch icon brings up the Switch dialog x m DA TA 1 Main Character Detail Customize Color OFF Jon Division No T Output Memory T Lamp Memory Draw Mode Ge XOR REP Parts Select Function No Function Change Place Cancel _ Place 2 22 Chapter2 Screens Click the Parts Select button The Switch List wndow is displayed Cancel 0003 0004 0005 NS Display Pattern OFF E 0006 0007 0008 0 o e lt D a a S Si U T O O 3 O 5 fb 1 Parts File Use this button to call up a different parts file The Std z3p file is chosen as default Click the Parts File button The Select Parts File dialog is displayed Choose the desired file and click Open Look in aj PARTS y e ES laa 3Dnow_P4 23P aa 3Dside_128 23P aa ZMTest 23 a 3Dnow_PS 23P a 3DStd Z3P al 3DFront Z3P al 3Dnow_P6 23P a Parts_e z3P laa 3Dfront_128 23P a 3Dnow_P7 Z3P s Parts_e128 Z3P la 3Dnow_P2 23P si 3Dnow_Pe z3P a std Z3P laa 3Dnow_P3 23P sa 3Dside Z3P la std_128 23P File name Z3P Files of type Es y Cancel di The file is opened IT For opening a 3D parts list or placing 3D parts see Appendix2 3D Parts 2 Select By clicking a part in the Switch List its number is highlighted in re
359. s headers or footers etc is available For more information see Chapter 6 Print Print Prints out the created screen data file from the computer For more information see Chapter 6 Print Present Window Printing Prints out the window currently opened Set necessary data by clicking Printer Setting in advance CF Card Manager Becomes active for the ZM series ZM 300 series and ZM 52HD handy type that is compatible with CF cards For more information see Chapter 23 CF Card in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function UU D v O O CH DI cr O Sa e D a a O wem Chapter1 Basic Operation Start Simulator Starts the ZM 71SE simulation software Simulator For more information see Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor File Managing Used for copying screens graphics etc between different screen data files For more information see Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Parts Edit Used for setting modifying or registering parts For more information see Appendix 3 Part Editing Edit Menu Undo Cancels actions that you performed Up to 7 times Redo Becomes active when Undo is performed Reverts the state before undoing Upto 7 times Undo Wizard Cancels wizard operation that you performed Cut Cuts the selected item and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected item to the clipboard Paste Pastes the
360. s only possible to add or insert into a newly created sheet white sheet aj seje Sort Memory Initialize Memory 1 Adding Go to the Edit menu and click on Add Or click on the Add icon Inserting Click on the line where you wish to insert memory to highlight it Go to the Edit menu and click on Add Or click on the Insert icon In ether case the Add or Insert dialog shown to the right will be displayed 1024 pieces of memory can be registered on 1 sheet Memory Add Fa P Bitzi W Block Number of Memories Display Type DEC sl Data Length 1Aword C word Sign Not provided Provided ASCII Display Ge Not display Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 2 Check the O Bit Device box only when adding memory in bit units When a bit device is specified as Top Memory described later a hyphen and bit number are displayed at the end ofthe memory and a test can be performed in bit units Note that if this box is not checked and a bit device is specified as Top Memory described later bits are treated as word units and memory will be added in 16 bit increments Ioc 3 Specify the top address for the memory that will be added to Top Memory 4 Ifyou click on the O Block box it is possible to continuously add multiple pieces of memory Enter the amount of memory that you wish to add in Number of Memories The maximum setting is 1024 5 When addin
361. s selected as the PLC type PLC Mem of Source Internal Mem of Target When you mainly use PLC memory for the macro and also directly use PLC memory for macro commands a read to PLC memory occurs and as a result the display speed is slowed To avoid this copy memory necessary for each cycle to the internal memory and execute macro commands in the internal memory Through this process speed down can be decreased Using these options specify the copy source and the copy target for each screen Superimpose Setting Tab Window For the ZM 300 series only This tab window is provided for the use of the superimpose function on overlaps For more information see Chapter 2 Overlap in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Animation Tab Window For the ZM 300 series only This tab window is provided for the use of the animation function For more information see Chapter 17 Animation in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Chapter2 Screens Wallpaper Setting Tab Window For the ZM 300 series on ly It is possible to use a bitmap file or a JPEG file as screen wallpaper O Use Wallpaper Check this option when setting wallpaper The following options become active File Type Select either Pattern or JPEG e When Pattern is selected Pattern No 0 1023 When using a bitmap file as wallpaper import a bitmap file as a pattern patterns This option is provided for specifying a pattern p
362. s were the MEM cursor is placed 7 To close this window click the x Close button at the upper right or the click the upper left icon and select Close Chapter 7 Useful Techniques Function 4 Change Memory Change All Memory Memory addresses allocated to the current editing file can be changed simultaneously Upto 10 different memory ranges can be set Operation Procedure k 2 Error Check Select Change Memory from the Tool menu The sub menu is displayed Click Change All Memory The Change All Memory dialog is displayed Memory Use Memory Address Use Change Memory Before Change Start Mem No Before Change End Mem No After Change Start Mem No Bit word D00100 Doo O Bi Screen Image Paste Bitmap DXF File Convert Convert to Rich Text Format Add Video Menu Video Custom Part Tray Tag Table 4 Q 0 Check the numbered box Memory address selection becomes available Choose Bit or Word Memory change is performed in units of bits or words as selected Enter the first address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change Start Mem No Likewise enterthe last address of the memory addresses to be changed for Before Change End Mem No Enter the desired first address after change for After
363. series 2002 4 1 09 23 30 System Information FONT VF DRV VER 1 300 SYSTEM PROG VER 1 540 VER 1 300 1 150 1 000 SHARP JW series HK Gothic Error Sto Screen Data PLC Type SHARP JW link module Information Comment Size 5832704 Connection 1 1 Baud Rate 19200 Signal Level RS232C 17 PLC StatNo 0 Sop Bi Parity Even Send Delay 0 msec gt Cable with EE the ZM 1REC or lt Memory card with a built in socket 2002 4 1 09 23 30 System Information SYSTEM PROG VER 1 540 Screen Data Information Size 5832704 Memory card EI ER ag Menu gt A memory card is not available to transfer screen data to a new ZM 42 to 82 Transfer the data from a computer directly Iloc 5 18 Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer between Memory Card ZM 1REC and Computer Screen Data Transfer to Memory Card ZM 1REC Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu The Transfer dialog is displayed Select Memory for Transfer Device and Screen Data for Transfer Data Click the Detail Setting button The Communication Detail dialog is displayed Select a computer serial port to be used and a baud rate between the computer and the memory card ZM 1REC Click OK Click the PC gt button Screen data transfer starts Transfer Device Transfer Data Display Memory f Screen Data C IF Driver Co Use Simulator
364. set icon on the drawing tool bar ACA E 1 ALS E 2 Across cursor marked with OFF appears gt OFF 3 Click the mouse in the desired position The offset mark is displayed at that location Click The OFF mark is displayed To y Changing the offset position prior to registering a graphic is not valid Set an offset position after registering a graphic Parameter Setting Outline of Parameter Graphics registered in the graphic library may be moved or transformed on the screen If data displays to be explained later are registered they also may be moved transformed or changed in displayed value These graphics or data displays require memory and consequently require parameter setting for memory allocation Setting parameters only in the graphic library is not sufficient for moving transforming or changing graphics Make sure to set parameters for each part on the screen O Chapter 4 Registration Items Parameter Setting Procedure 1 Click on a graphic in the graphic library to select it 2 Click the Parameter icon on the drawing tool bar The Parameter Setting dialog is displayed DA ABC Ee AE Y Parameter Setting Circle Fa Animate Center Mo Setting Se Center Y Mo Setting Sel Fiadius Ne Setting Sel Statene fo Se End gle lf Se Dok Kc Se Cancel For the description of setting the dialog refer to the following 3 When the di
365. sfer starts Transfer Device ee Ce Display C Memory Screen Data C LE Driver c IT Use Simulator Program go G i C Font Data t ta t S ead comments in data transfer C Temp PLC2 ia Alldata tarnster C Ex Font IT Transfer through Ethemet 0 0 0 0 C SRAM Data Station No Table C Ladder comm pra Modbus comm pra M MODEM Transfer PC lt PC lt gt Into A Up date of System Detail Setting Screen Data Transfer from ZM Series 1 2 Click the Transfer icon or select Transfer from the File menu The Transfer dialog is displayed Select Display for Transfer Device and Screen Data for Transfer Data Click the Detail Setting button Select a computer serial port to be used and a baud rate between the computer and the ZM series Click OK Click the PC lt button Screen data transfer starts Transfer Device Transfer Data Del C Ween Soroen Data C LE Driver C IT Use Simulator EES e ER C Font Data ead comments in data transfer C Temp PLC2 E Allid te transter C Ex Font FT Transfer through Ethemet 0 0 0 0 C SRAM Data C Station No Table C Ladder comm pra C Modbus comm pra MODEM Transfer O Infa Up date of System Detail Setting 5 13 CO O O D D UO DI er DI 4 DI gt a T Chapter5 Transfer Screen Data Comparison between Computer and
366. splay area part Handles are shown around the part 2 Click the desired data to select it Handles are shown around the data 3 Drag the selected data tothe desired position _ E _ MM a p E E E E e a 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234123461234 4 Lo 4 i H xq _ _ _ _ a __ _m a e ee a Appendix 3 Part Editing 7 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 8 Close the Modify Part window Data Sampling Disp Area Part Edit window 9 The former edit window is displayed The modified display area part appears in the window Editing Calendar Parts IOC A calendar part can consist of all calendar items year month day hour minute second and day of the week ltis also possible to create individual parts in order to use them separately This is one calendar part 02 06 15 17 20 15 Sunday Sunday These are separate calendar parts 1 l 20 Composition of Calendar Parts The calendar part consists of several calendar items Each calendar item can be enlarged or moved separately within the part area MM A Any calendar item can be moved within YY DD hh 6 SS oy the part area of the calendar part SUN gt mm Calendar items can be moved only within the area of the calendar part Determine whether or not to display calendar items of year month day hour minute second and day
367. splayed on screens Screen Outline Overlap LO Q D D mD 5 O 3 CH O D O mD Base A maximum of 1 024 screens can be registered One screen is composed of a base screen with a maximum of three overlaps Each ofthe base screen and the overlaps layers is composed of 256 divisions These 256 divisions are overlaid on a layer like invisible sheets Divisions 0 255 NS D i P A E E EEA vo e Ver La a eege beer ii TEE ee E L a a aa 2 1 Chapter2 Screens Divisions will contain parts page 2 17 for details These parts are given numbers identical to their respective division numbers Graphics will be directly placed on the base and overlaps These graphics are not given division numbers base Temperature Trend Graph No 0 123 C No 1 123 C No 2 123 C Error System Change DT ee rend 2 fa Edd e lp gt Menu Directly placed Ona division area onthe base ee met se i ee ike nth eS am er ee ie Se ie im ce i im seme ae AAA ic Gn it i i E ee i a ee Te oe et ae a 123 gt l No 1 Cl 123 No2 Cl system Temperature 123 3 Trend Graph 1 No 0 C Change renz DS Loa gt gt 1 Menu Switches numerical data displays display areas etc Graphics texts boxes scales etc What Is a Division e A division is an invisible area It is assigned to every part that functions on the screen Whether
368. splays can be placed ina part Whether or not to display data is determined in the Sampling Display Area dialog Sampling Display Area EX 3 To display data Main Detail check the box APP3 29 o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa Appendix 3 Part Editing APP3 30 oa Editing Procedure The procedure to create a new display area part including four items of data for data sampling is explained below Data Sampling Disp Area Part Edit window 1 The edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new data sampling display area part is placed A ou 123 W238 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 gt i 4 Double click the part The Sampling Display Area dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannotbe set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 5 Select the display area part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the data sampling display area part is displayed Edit the part or change its size Changing the Position of Data Data shown in the part data sampling display area part can only be moved horizontally 1 Click the data sampling di
369. t Minimum size 8 points ABCOEFG 9 points ABCDEFG 11 points ABCDEFG 12 points ABCDEFG Itis not possible to use the English Western Europe HK Gothic or HK Times font o in combination with the EnglishWestern Europe font APP1 5 Appendix 1 Fonts Points of English Western Europe HK Gothic HK Times The following sizes are supported IC IET CREOS lt When English Westem Europe HK de 12 point size is automatically recognized as the fontto be used and the data is transferred to the ZM series Display Function Specifications Characters Latin 1 Icelandic Irish Italian English Dutch Swedish available for Spanish Danish German Norwegian display Portuguese Finnish Faeroese French Character 6 x 11 dots sizes 12 points 8x 16 dots Displayed Display resolution 320 x 240 640 x 480 800 x 600 characters 8 points 53 characters 100 characters 100 characters x 21 lines x 43 lines x 54 lines 12 points 40 characters 80 characters 100 characters x 15 lines x 30 lines x 37 lines APP1 6 Appendix 1 Fonts Setting Procedure 1 Font type setting page APP1 8 in this chapter Select English Western Europe HK Gothic or English Western Europe HK Times for Font 2 Font setting for individual functions in use page APP1 9 in this chapter Specify the number of points as a character size in property setting when setting a part mode or text in drawing lt Kei D GU e T e 3 e
370. t a parts file 3DStd z3p or 3Dnow_p2 z3p aixi Look in E PARTS DI e Dirr ES L Parts3D al 3Dnow_P4 23P laa 2MTest 23 User a 3Dnow_P5 Z3P al 3DStd Z3P E 3Dfront Z3P a 3Dnow_P6 23P E Parts_e Z3P Drot 128732 s0 3Dnow_P7 Z3P aa Parts_e128 23P Nal 3Dnow_P2 23P a 3Dnow_P8 23P sa std Z3P al 3Dnow_P3 23P al 3Dside Z3P laa Std_128 Z3P gt File name RES Files of type Z3P D Cancel Make sure to select either 3DStd z3p or 3Dnow_p2 z3p parts file Any files o other than these two show only 3D switch lamp parts 5 3D parts are displayed in the Num Display List window Num Display List E Program Files 2M715 PARTS13DStd 23P 0001 0002 a Select be Ma Mac Cancel 0003 0004 0005 Color Select M Me e O 0007 0008 bal _ JUMP lt P These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part APP2 14 Appendix2 3D Parts Color Select This option is used to select a color from eight Num Display Main Type Char Prop Detail Customize Division No D Memory GA E dy Parts Select Color Select hg Cancel Apply Select the desired part and color Click the Select button 6 The selected part is previewed in the Num Display dial
371. tail Menu Dsp Grid Others goseessoseesoesesseseeosessooooesoesssse AA lw MLIB Mark Dsp Handle Color WETTER sr Backaround M Offset Mark Dsp This option is active during editing of graphic library or data block Choose whether or not to show the offset mark on the screen Y MLIB Mark Den This option is active when setting a call overlap or multi overlap Choose whether or not to show the MLIB mark on the screen to position the overlap Handle Color Choose the color of handles shown around clicked items 2 12 Chapter2 Screens Grid Tab Window Display Environment E x Detail Menu Dsp Grid Others grenoccnnncccccrcccanes l Grid Dsp TON Grid Grid Color MOT A Te Grid Type 1 Byte sl Y Pitch o Je Place switches on switch grids O CH DI mp O gt a lt lt O 3 D gt Ap CO D mme EL gt O Cancel O Grid Dsp When this option is checked grids are displayed O ON Grid When this option is checked on grid editing is enabled This on grid editing is not valid for items on overlaps Grid Color Select the desired grid color as well as the color of the dotted lines that denote the available screen area of ZM Grid Type A grid type can be selected from the following four 1 Byte The grids are based on the unit 8 x 20 the unit of one byte character 8 x 16 dots plus four Y axis dots The reference poi
372. tart angle or end angle to the desired size Drag the start angle to Drag the end angle to change it change it APP3 20 Appendix 3 Part Editing L B Symmetry h Unlike icon A this icon changes start angle and end angle simultaneously and symmetrically Click icon B and click the part area ofthe pie graph Handles are shown around the part Drag either handle to change both angles simultaneously and symmetrically R Drag either handle to change WM E Je n the start and end angles i simultaneously and Click this icon symmetrically C Same Start End Angles Click icon C and click the part area of the pie graph part Handles are shown around the part Click this icon Click the part Handles are shown Drag either handle on start angle or end angle They are puttogether The sector becomes a complete circle The start angle moves to the end angle This is the start angle and also the end angle The start and end angles can be moved as you like D With Internal Circle The circle atthe center of the pie graph is called the internal circle The graph looks ike adonut This circle can be created or deleted as you lke Click icon D once The icon is depressed and an internal circle hole is created in the pie graph part BW O Click this icon Itis depressed An internal circle is shown Click the depressed icon
373. te angle Item List 2 Set the graph area basic part area with a dotted box The graph area is recognized as a graph Move the graph area dotted box to the closed area graphic Adjust to the desired size by dragging a handle If you want to use the graphicas a graph area right click the mouse and choose Fit Area with Graphic from the pop up menu Wa Graph area basic part area L Fit Area with Graphic The graph area snaps into the drawn graphic Graph area 3 Right click the mouse and select Paint Position Setting APP3 27 A 3 yed y9e3 10 senpe9o01 4 Bump Appendix 3 Part Editing y Paint Position Setting Detemine the start position for painting a closed area graph Graph upper limit Direction a Graph area Graph lower limit Point start position Select Paint Position Setting from the right clicking menu Move the cursor to the graph area and click it Drag the cursor and release the mouse in the target position The paint start position x is moved along the horizontal line 1dot above the graph lower limit If painting is not performed correctly after the paint start position has been determined raise the lower limit of the graph area by 1 dotand set the position again When confiming the paint start position open the Detail tab window in the Display Environment dialog from the Display menu and uncheck M Paint Dsp Click OK The paint start position is in
374. techniques in editor operation such as Tool menu or file management function Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor This chapter explains applications attached to the editor such as Simulator Chapter9 Wizard This chapter explains screen creation using the wizard function Appendix 1 Fonts The setting and editing procedures of font available with the ZM series are explained Appendix 2 3D Parts The placement and editing procedure as well as notes for 3D parts are explained Appendix 3 Part Editing The part structure and editing procedure are explained Contents Outline Chapter1 Basic Operation Starting MUA e E a E A 1 1 Opening A rece this erie ate scans he etmeag ha eaetecteneeesiee Tee Opening a New EE E Opening an Existing Pie E Enn 174 Basic OperationsOr ine Elei A ade sunt owedteen ween aa 1 6 Names Of Components e 176 TIE TEE E Veiga CT A A O A Ee DIVISION NUDE o cs E Bell D AAA yq E le TOO EE E Edit Tool Bar A A e Draw Tool Bara iba A E Moving and E oming fie Tool Bas Ee E FIGINE Ine 1001 TEE nh Status Bar eet Ee Sang Hiding is Status Bar dal SO Ment Dat ida IE PS VICI bas Ek A A EN IR ANE UN EE FAW AVG FA WEEN et Part Menu O A Me nD Hem Menu Eed SIE System Setting Meni Ee NO T ool A eet egret 1 16 Window Men EEN HIG MGM cache a ne ee eae iA e Dialog PENNEN EE TS Setting See Seating EE in K IS E Ted Setting up Memory EES 1 18 EGE il ele EE
375. tern OFF RePopSw p RePopSw r RePopSw w 0006 0007 0008 m WW _ RePopSwy y 6 Thefollowng message appears Click Yes The 3D parts color pallet becomes available page APP2 15 in this chapter CC This part uses the palette different from the present palette When you continue it the palette will be changed OK JUMP lt gt These buttons scroll up down the parts list Parts File Click this button when selecting another parts file Select Click this button to select a switch part APP2 19 Appendix2 3D Parts Display Pattern This setting is active only when a switch or lamp part is selected The displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns can be shown Select the desired switch part and click Select 7 The selected part is previewed in the Switch dialog WOOL Geet The above step completes a part selection IT For other settings such as memory see the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function APP2 20 Appendix2 3D Parts With ZM 42 to 82 Series 1 Lee The notes on 3D parts usage and the setting procedure for the ZM 42 to 82 series are almost the same as for the ZM 352D This section therefore provides the notes associated with the ZM 42 to 82 series only Read the section for ZM 352D as well Notes on Usage Applicable ZM 42 to 82 Series O U v o d Using 3D parts may result in exhaustion of memory In terms of available memory the followin
376. terns This section explains the commands in the Transform menu Transform Draw ltem Syster E Rotate Graphic Mirror Horizontal Mirror Vertical Change Size Transparent color Setting Rotate Graphic Clicking this command rotates the registered pattern 90 Click RotateGraphic Click Rotate Graphic again The rotated The image is rotated AS image is rotated 90 further 90 3 ON Mirror Horizontal Clicking this command flips the registered pattern horizontally Click Mirror Horizontal The image is flipped horizontally zs e Mirror Vertical Clicking this command flips the registered pattern vertically Click Mirror Vertical The image is flipped vertically RS 4 47 Chapter4 Registration Items Change Size Use this command when changing the size Clicking this command brings up the Size Change dialog Size Change Size P l sie la ER El E Color i Color C 16 Color C 128 Color fe 32k Color Cancel The available setting ranges are as follows Width X 1 800 Height Y 1 600 Color 8 color 16 color 128 color 32K color If a size change is made during pattern editing or when a pattern has been o completed the created pattern data is deleted Transparent Color Setting When a pattern is animated in the graphic relay mode and the screen background is set to any color other than black the pattern is displayed in the XORed color With
377. the Communication icon is depressed Also Comm is displayed on the status bar of the Simulator during communications 2M Simulator Scrn0000 File Edit Communication View Window Help Osa ela o o aj le ele Siet H lgl TTT gt 55 foo Te A PZ System LL x PZ Scrnoo00 ar 002 OFF O D pressed Ready SHARP PG port Comm J When the Simulator is started from the Windows menu the communication is not started In this case start the communication by following the steps described below 8 7 H 3 CG O Chapter8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor 1 Choose Start from the Communication menu Or click the Communication icon The ZM series has established the communication with the computer Communication view vw Start End Gara with M70 2 The simulator state displayed on the screen is changed from Stop to C omm SHARP PG port stop Zz SHARP PG port Comm 4 Stopping Communication with the ZM Series 1 Choose End from the Communication menu Communication View omm with M70 Or click the Communication icon The communication between the ZM series and a personal computer stops The Main Menu screen is displayed on the ZM series automatically fam aE 2 The Simulator state on the status bar is changed from Comm gt Stop To restart communications click Start from the Communication menu or click the Communicat
378. the dot lined square is displayed Clicking any location on a screen shows the converted DXF file as the grouped drawings File Edit Display Draw Part Item System Setting Tool Window Osh ons Ke S AA on Division No 0 jme 7 HERB ODBHRUOCEE TVR E k lE AREA A Sa fi A MN EE e 1 BS Mi These figures are converted to the drawings inthe ZM 71SE editor The drawings are grouped The displayed color depends on the original DXF file Detail Setting Options The following items are included Standard for Fitting Diagram into Screen Area of Diagram Only areas containing graphics are read during file import Size of Plan Drawing sizes are read during file import Area of Diagram making Ifthe graphics could not be read in the above manner the ZM 71SE sets an area and the data within the area is read Display in making DXF file 8 color Display 16 color Display 256 or more color Display Choose the option specified for DXF file creation Way of Display O Not Convert Texts Choose whether or not text in DXF file is converted 1 character is converted into 16 x 16 dots O Ignore Dots Choose whether or not dots as graphics are ignored 7 18 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques O Ignore Measure Line Choose whether or not the dimension lines in DXF file are ignored O Monochrome Reverse Display Color Choose whether or not inverting to black on white is execute
379. the screen For more information on the relay and message modes see Chapter 6 Message Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function O Graphic Library This option is active when the entry mode or graphic mode is set For the entry mode graphics registered in graphic library can be displayed on the character entry keys provided that Use Graphic is checked Forthe graphic mode graphics can be displayed provided that Internal is chosen for Command See Chapter 7 Entry Mode for more information on the entry mode and to Chapter 9 Graphic Display for the graphic mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function O Data Block Dsp This option is active when the data block area is set on the screen The initial block number is indicated on the screen provided that Internal is chosen for Command For more information on the data block area see Chapter 7 Entry Mode in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Chapter2 Screens O Display Path of Animation This option is active when animation setting is made When the path of animated graphics should be depicted check this box For more information on animation see Chapter 17 Animation in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function O Base Screen Dsp This option is active during editing of graphic library multi overlap or data block When a screen or multi overlap should be displayed in editing check this box Menu Dsp Tab Window De
380. the screen number to be opened and click OK Screen Editing D Refer to each individual chapter in this manual for editing a screen For limitations on screen editing such as a limited number of parts see Chapter 2 Screens Chapter4 Registration Items Graphic Library Graphics or numerical data displays that will be displayed by bit setting ON are registered in the graphic library Graphic Library Structure A graphic library screen and a screen are the same in size A total of 2 560 graphic library screens are divided into 10 groups for registration Therefore one graphic library group is capable of storing 256 screens Group No 0 Group No 1 Group No 2 Group No 9 Graphic No 0 Graph ic No 0 Graphic No 2 Gra phic No 2 53 Grap hic No 0 Graphic No 2 Graphic No 253 Graphic No 0 Grap hic No 2 Graph ic No 254 Graphic No 255 Grap hic No 2 Graph ic No 253 Grap hic No 25 4 Graphic No 254 Graphic No 255 Graph ic No 255 Calling the Graphic Library Graphic No 254 Grap hic No 255 1 Select Graphic Library from the Item menu The Graphic Library dialog is displayed 2 Specify the graphic library group number to be opened and the desired graphic number 3 Click OK ltem System Setting J Graphic Library Screen vi Mr DS q Mult Overlap Ho Jo Data Block Message Cancel Pattern Macro Block
381. ting Attribute Table MR400 Format Table Modbus Slave Communication Setting Temp CTRL PLC2Way Setting Network Table Setting Initial Displayed Language fi E E By transferring screen data together with the selected font file to the ZM series the font can be displayed on the ZM series Generally only one type of font is available in one screen data file With the language selection function however it is possible to specify multiple fonts in one screen data file and to select one font For more information see Chapter 29 Language Selection in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Appendix 1 Fonts Available Fonts English Western Europe Fonts The following languages are included in the English Western Europe Fonts 3 LI Latin 1 Q e Icelandic e Irish o e Italian e English 7 e Dutch e Swedish e Spanish e Danish e German e Norwegian e Portuguese e Finnish e Faeroese e French Chinese and Chinese Simplified Screens in Chinese or simplified type Chinese can be created Korean Screens in Korean using the Hangul alphabet can be created APP1 3 Appendix 1 Fonts HK Gothic and HK Times Outline y On the ZM series it is possible to use fonts similar to the Windows True Type fonts Arial x and Times The font similar to Arial is called English Western Europe HK Gothic The font similar to Times is called English Western Europe Times ABCDEFG AECDEF D ABCDEFG ABCDE
382. tion 2 47 op A 3 E H D O D 3 D 5 Fe o gt a Q D re cr S Chapter2 Screens Bar Graph Pie Graph Panel Meter and Closed Area Graph Click the desired graph icon gt ER GES RR v2 The graph dialog is displayed Bar Graph Ss x Main Setting Disp Prop Alarm Setting Customize Division No JN Memory u00100 Parts Select caos IA For the description of setting the dialogs see Chapter8 Graph Display in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button 2 48 Chapter2 Screens Statistic Graph Clicking the Stat Graph icon brings up the following tool bar e e a Bde wl gt lt Statistic bar grap display Statistic pie graph Click either Stat Bar Graph or Stat Pie Graph icon The corresponding dialog is displayed Stat Bar Graph y x Main Setting Data D Prop Data 1 Prop Data 2 Prop Data 3 Prop Customize Division No el p Memory u00100 Parts Select Clicking the Display icon brings up a numerical data display part dialog To establish a link between numerical data display part and statistic graph specify the same division nu
383. tion Parameter Setting Read Area and Write Area These options are necessary for the ZM series to display the specified screen or confirm the currently displayed screen Each area is provided with 3 words as default Check that the memory addresses for these areas are not already in use For more information on the three words each given tothe read area and the write area see Chapter 1 System Setting in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Baud Rate Signal Level Parity Stop Bit etc Set these options in accordance with the corresponding PLC data For more information on the communication parameters see the ZM 300 User s Manual Other Settings Before data transfer to the ZM series check the following settings as well For more information see Chapter 1 System Setting inthe ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function ZM Series Setting Make settings for memory expansion backlight touch switch type etc Font Setting Set the font type to be displayed on the ZM series Modular Jack Make settings for the use of the modular jack MJ1 MJ2 Printer Setting Make settings for the printer its model etc connected to the ZM series Chapter 5 Transfer Screen Data Transfer There are some differences in preliminaries before screen data transfer as well as in procedure for data transfer from the screen editor software depending on the transfer method Preliminaries For a New ZM Series Just
384. tion interface units refer to their respective manuals Screen Check System Infi SYSTEM PROG VER 1 000 Editor MJ1 5 40 When the ZM series is in communication RUN mode with the PLC the ZM series brings up the created screen data When the Main Menu Local Main Screen is Displayed The ZM series stops communication with the PLC in the STOP mode and is not in the RUN mode Press the SYSTEM key on the right or at the bottom of the ZM series Menu options are displayed in a line vertically or horizontally Press the F1 MODE key next The status is switched to the RUN mode and the ZM series starts communication with the PLC Y 4 23 30 I F DRV VER 1 210 VER i Ge sad 000 MELSEC AnA N U Connection Baud Rate 19200 Signal ne oe Data Lebgth 7 C Stat a0 Stop Bit an Parity Send Delay ee msec Chapter 5 Transfer If an Error Occurs The following error message will be displayed due to faulty communication cable connection or PLC or ZM series parameter setting mismatch Check for these probable causes and restart communication RUN Communication Error Time Out Screen No Received Code No If the following error message is displayed a screen number that does not exist may be specified in the read area memory address n 2 After the ZM series starts communication RUN mode with the PLC itdisplays the screen specified in the read area address n 2 Check and
385. tioned automatic file creation is not executed Use the Refer button in the Customize tab window and execute reading of the bitmap file again A bitmap file registered by automatic creation is not completely identical to the original file O 0 P O 3 N 5 Q Switches and lamps are drawn in the REP mode Transparent color The ZM series recognizes areas on a screen colored black code 0000 as transparent When there is an area that should not be depicted on the screen color it black To depict black areas instead of transparent areas draw them using a color code similar to black APP2 25 Appendix2 3D Parts M EMO Please use this page freely APP2 26 RTE Part Editing O dn Components of Parts AHH A Modifying Parts In Screen Data Files APP3 3 Parts Modifying Procedure APP 3 3 Creation and Storage of Part Files APP3 4 Creating Part FIeS ooocccocccco coco conan cere cess cono nano anes APP 3 4 Saving and Closing Part Fies coo APP 3 6 Editing Procedures for Each Part APP3 7 Editing Overlap Parts APP 3 7 Editing Switch Lamp Hate APP 3 9 Editing Data Display bas APP3 14 e a Keypad AAA APP3 15 Editing Graph Pats n cesses cono sees cee cress cate senene APP3 17 Editing Display Area Parts for Data Sampling APP3 29 Editing Calendar bas APP3 3 1 Editing Display Area bas APP3 33 Printing the Part Part Fi
386. tment cannot be used for overlap parts because they have no frames e No graphic outside the basic part area is active Draw graphics within the area e A basic part area color can be specified in the Overlap dialog 7 After editing the part close the Modify Part window Overlap Part Edit window 8 The former Overlap Part Edit window is displayed The modified overlap appears in the window APP3 8 Appendix 3 Part Editing Editing Switch Lamp Parts oa Editing procedures for switches and lamps are almost the same Unlike other parts different displays for ON and OFF P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 should be created Notches A maximum of seven types of the switch or lamp part are available such as two different displays for ON and OFF three different displays ON OFF and another etc The relation between patterns and notches is shown below 2 notch OFF ON 2patterns OFF ON another type 3 pattems OFF ON other 2 types 4 patterns Determine the number of notches when placing a new part Note that once the number of notches has been chosen it cannot be changed later For a 2 notch switch or lamp part two different displays for ON and for OFF should be created Fora 3 notch part three different displays are required Likewise register as many graphics as required for the notches 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 of the switch or lamp part 2 notch re D 3 notch STOP gt Sc Editing Procedure E
387. ts HK Fonts gt English Western Europe Points X enlarge ment factor X and Y enlargement factors 12 A 36 8 72 72 72 72 ou Appendix 1 Fonts Font Setting for Individual Functions With English Western Europe HK Gothic or EnglishWestern Europe HK Times selected for Font the character property setting made for a function part or mode is altered to the setting for the HK font Ex Text in drawing created from Draw and Text Screen Drawing xj Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Multi T ext Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot Foig 12 Foreground B i TX is Background Rotate Foo I il fansparen Direction RGT sl Ge Nom 1 4 Bold Shadow When either HK font is used specify a character size in points in the dialog Both X and Y sizes are enlarged reduced equally according to the specified number of points 1 4 and Italic options are inactive in the property setting For each function part of mode the number of character points and whether automatic or manual font setting is to be made for placed texts differ as the table on the following page indicates Note For automatic font setting and manual font setting mentioned in the table refer to Manual Font Setting APP1 9 lt po D o Q TI O 5 e gl Appendix 1 Fonts Function Auto matic font setting Manual font setting No of points Switch lamp T
388. ts to be copied 2 While holding down the SHIFT key click the last part of the parts to be copied 3 Check that all the desired parts numbers are highlighted Drag one of them to a box in the target file window 7 36 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques v Copy of Parts by Selecting them Individually AS 1 While holding down the CTRL key click parts to be copied one by one 2 Check that all the desired parts numbers are highlighted Drag one ofthem to a box in the target file wndow The copied parts are displayed consecutively El 2M Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 File Manage Switch Copy Target File E Program Files 2M71S PARTS ZMTest 23P File Edit Display Window 05d ams ix lo B EE S er 2 7 Gei a Ge me TT Sc roi breif 1 1 File Manage Switch Copy arget File E Progrm Filesi2M71S51PARTS1ZMTest 3P 0 NL UY 2 ENL 4 a A P A n A 8 A 8 R2 rir ir il Ready D uow peue oi 1 37 Chapter7 Useful Techniques 7 38 joa File Menu for Parts File Management Before closing the copy target file window choose whether or not to save the copied data Clicking File brings up the following menu items Eile Edit Display Window Copy Target New Copy Target Open Copy Target Save Copy Target Save As Copy Source Open Quit File Managing Hut Application e Copy Target New Creates anew copy target file e Cop
389. tte for 3D parts The colors of the existing screen data cannot be secured OK Click Yes to start reading of the 3D parts pallet file Then the colors used in the already created screen data are changed to 3D parts colors while the basic 15 colors remain the same Both ordinary color pallet and 3D parts color pallet cannot be used in one file The pallet to be used is selected by checking unchecking M Use 3D Parts See this option setting to check which pallet is selected The basic 15 colors are The silver color on the 3D color used on both pallets pallet is slightly brighter than Silver color that on the ordinary color pallet Ordinary color palet 3D parts color pallet Appendix2 3D Parts Limitation on Parts Placement A maximum of 1 023 patterns of 3D parts can be used in one screen data file e Pattern Count When one part or multiple parts of the same type in the same size are placed Count the notch number of one part When parts of the same type in different sizes are placed Count the notch number of each part Ex The switch and lamp parts on the following screen use 58 patterns 2 notch x 26 pieces 3 notch x 2 pieces 58 Each bottom right value indicates the notch number of the part eee 2200 Y 2 Y 2 2 D gt um 0 0 0000 gt tr gt lt lt Only one part is the target to count because they are ofthe same type in the same size They are the same ype parts
390. tton lt e I O lt Y D O T Continue reading PLC memory when set to OFF IT Gupempose Parts Select Frame Ippe lie y Brame Erap Area Prop Foreground Background Tile o IT For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 2 Overlap in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function When the dialog setting is concluded click Place 3 A dotted line box as large as an overlap is displayed with a cross cursor 4 Click the mouse in the desired position The overlap is placed If necessary change the position or the size 4 21 Chapter4 Registration Items Editing in Overlap When placing items such as switch parts or graphics change over the editing layer from the base to an overlap The procedure is the same as that in screen editing 1 Place an overlap part in multi overlap editing Check that icons for drawing and parts except for Overlap are inactive Ei File Edit Display Draw Part ltem System Setting Tool Window D Me sn SK 0 S O e ooo CR 2 URS Pa wis OBE wh bMS SG athe RY Oo 2 Right click the mouse The menu is displayed Select Overlap 0 KY Undo Cr fal Gedo Entzg e Cut Cla Copy Ctrl C Ce Paste Lloyd Delete ON Grid Grid Display Grid Type e Base l t veep Hide overlaps with Base checked Change All On line Editing est Ondine Run The editing layer is now changed from the base to an overlap Icons
391. ual Function e CF card reader writer ZM senes CF card manager 5 7 0 O 3 D D 5 O D er D oi 5 OH L Chapter5 Transfer Data Transfer to Memory Card ZM 1REC A memory card SRAM FROM to which screen data has been transferred form the ZM 71SE software computer is connected to a ZM 300 and the data is transferred from the card to the ZM 300 Arrangements e Memory card SRAM FROM Use a memory card on the market e ZM 1REC plus accompanying ZM 1REC cable as well as AC adaptor AC adaptor Some ZM 42 to 82 series models are equipped with built in sockets for memory card insertion thus requiring no ZM 1REC Cable with the ZM 1REC N ZM series Memory card 5 8 Chapter 5 Transfer Data Transfer via Modem For more information see page 5 32 A A Se tr de Ee At rte A E E a ES et E E Err en a et At Se ee Ve an eet te ee ee E ee a ree e RS 232C cable straight ZM 80C cross cable RS 232C cable accompanying the modem Modem Pw ER OH CD DA O 0000 ZM series ye Modularcable accompanying the modem Telephone line modular socket Telephore line modular socket the modem Modem PW ER OH CD DA OOO Computer LINE S RS 232C cable straight accompanying the modem Modular cable o gg 9 9 CO O O D D UO D
392. unication 8 9 About SIM Files ocioso nres nere nren rere arne 8 12 A e toch wees O 8 17 Useful Operations o aonne nnno naase coco aorin nene senno cono cues canes rene 8 21 Menu and ICONS A a enno cues cues rerne rene 8 28 EOU Ae A 8 31 ZM MDD Transfer Unit Dr EE 8 32 CONT OS NNO BE 8 32 Operation Procedure s eee cece cece cece cece cess cono cues serre conos 8 33 ZM MDD Transfer Utility 00e oase nesne bene seene tese see seere ees 8 33 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71SE Editor Simulator Outline e Normally when a ZM series screen has been created perform an operation check connecting the ZM series to the PLC However when the Simulator is used it is possible to perform an operation check on a newly created screen without the PLC The Simulator runs on Windows and it is possible to set reset bit device as well as input data to word device It is not possible to use the Simulator for the ZM series of universal serial communication For the ZM series with Ethernet communication the simulation via Ethernet is not possible however it is possible with serial communication using the ZM 80C cable Joa e By starting up ZM 71SE and the simulator simultaneously on a computer either software can be operated independently by switching the active window The operations of the parts placed on the screen can be checked just between the computer and the ZM series Therefore
393. uploaded even with Font Data selected on the ZM 42 to 82 screen To allow the manual font setting data to be uploaded select Screen Data 2 Click the Capacity Calculation button The amounts of memory used by the checked options and available memory are indicated Memory for manual font setting data is limited to 4 MB for the ZM 300 or 6 MB if only manual font setting data is stored in a CF card and to 2 MB forthe ZM 42 43 52 62 72 82 even if available memory still remains Check the value specified for Remaining Font I0 APP1 12 IOoe 0 O Appendix 1 Fonts If data transfer to the ZM series is executed while a minus value is specified for Remaining Font or Remaining Screen the editor software gives the following alarm message CIO x A Tha mm a foo large ba COTA If the alarm occurs a size that cannot be displayed normally on the ZM series may be specified in the font data Check Remaining Font or Remaining Screen and correct the data as necessary 3 When the tab window setting is concluded click OK Data Transfer to the ZM Series When a ZM 42 43 52 62 72 82 is used transfer the ZM 42 43 52 62 72 82 system program to the ZM 42 43 52 62 72 82 to update the program before transferring screen data Transfer screen data including the HK font data to the ZM series In the Transfer dialog select Screen Data and click the PC gt button The screen data and the font data are transfe
394. urce file Z and the store target file Q 3 FanandnaZnamesza7 mee K ivi FAZM300DdataZm30DDtest 237 Divide Source alatZmoUlltes Refer D Store Target EM 300dataZm300test div Zeie z 3 1 44Mbyte Ee C 1 25Mbyte C 720Kbyte OK Cancel 6 Click OK The file is divided automatically The divided sections of the file are stored in the format of file name n div o Saveall the files to recombine them 1 41 Chapter7 Useful Techniques File Combine When the divided sections of a file are stored on different floppy disks copy them to one directory in advance pp 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Combine The Combine File dialog is displayed 3 Specify the desired file name for Combine Source Combine File x Specify each name of the combined source file and the store target file Combine Source Jet 3DOdata Zm3D0test 1 div Refer Store Target Jet 300data Zm3DDtest_1 237 Zele OK Cancel The divided sections of the file are stored in the format of file name n div o Specify one of the divided sections 4 Click Open At the same time the file name before division is entered for Store Target 5 Click OK The sections are combined automatically 1 42 Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management File Comparison Two screen data files are compared and the result is reported It is not possible to compare files of t
395. ver Msn ii 5 21 e re EE 5 17 online editing u esses neso ances ues teree sere sense reee meee 5 30 preliminary steps E nono rerne cono conos 5 1 system updating Nee nesse aaee serne sere sense reee reee 5 28 transfer data EKON ee Ee 5 27 AA se aene N 5 26 e EE 5 21 ladder COMM Dm conce cono serre rese coc 5 28 modbus COMM om 5 28 IROOM AM EEN 5 25 SRAM e E 5 27 station no tau tios 5 27 Eu o EE 5 27 Transien Eldo iii ee 5 10 transfer method CE CANO A soa ae E eenneees 5 7 AA A SE DP o AA suenitdes EZ Mode EE 5 9 preliminaries e conoo cono cesses cono conos 5 3 PNA GO egen eier see aes hs a ageless 5 5 transfervia modem 2 cece cee aonne cece cocoa cono cono reee reno 5 32 e SE 7 23 UC Lee A O 2 50 V VIEO EE 2 56 W Walpaper EE 2 9 SONNO Sorser E aie sed unease untae eds 29 Window Menu WEE 1 16 Ve EE 9 1 deleting placed parts A coco cesses cono coo 9 16 A aac EE A em eeeeeeece 9 1 usage example 00 0 cee cece e nooo conse cono cases anno anos 9 2 Dee EE 9 6 radio te LEE EES trend graph display ccc cece cess cono co 9 11 Z ZM MDD transfer Utility 8 32 OS e WEE 8 34 COMPOSITION econo traici n 8 32 Operation procedure ccc cece cecee cono narre cono cues 8 33 A E E E 8 32 STAUN eee gockt wine asunn thu eueacina studies atae 8 33 ZM MDD Transfer Utility dialog 8 33 SHARP SHARP MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS CORPORATIO
396. vious section Statistic Graph Bar Editing Procedure page APP 3 23 E The statistic graph pie has a size limit The inner radius must be 10 dots or more The difference between the inner and outer radii must be 16 dots or more EI Trend Graph Trend Sampling Editing Procedure The part registered in this section is used for trend graphs and also for display area parts for trend sampling mode Trend Graph Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed 4 Double click the part The Trend Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window loc 5 Select the trend graph part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon APP3 24 Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the trend graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size GEN ere HE 7 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part 8 Close the Modify Part window Attach scales to the outside ofthe graph part The frame automatically fits the graph with scales in si
397. x 2 notch switch part Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Switch Part Edit window 1 Check that the edit window indicating the selected registration number is opened Switch Part 0 Edit DA APP3 9 o 3 O H Si O el D Oo h O s a a O U w pa Appendix 3 Part Editing TD APP3 10 re OT notch notch E 4 notch 5 notch bnptch dpnotch Hnotch Ma notch 4 notch B notch b nokch Anotch Bnotch as desired 2 Click the New Part icon 2 notch to 8 notch can be chosen 3 Click 2 notch A dotted box and a mover tool appear Click the desired position depressed If not click the icon 4 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new switch part is placed in the window 5 Double click the placed part The Switch dialog is displayed Set the dialog The dialog for each part cannot be set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window 6 Create the OFF display of the switch Check that the OFF icon is Appendix 3 Part Editing 7 Select the switch part Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 8 The Modify Part window for the switch part is opened Edit the part or change its size M Modify Part Part O L Switch Area Setting SW A switch part contains a
398. x emergency stop No 7 l EMERGENCY STOP buton is No g EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed on the operation box N i 9 pressed on the operation box Reset the button Reset the button No 10 No 11 A maximum of 1 024 blocks can be re gistere d Calling a Page Block Select Page Block from the Item menu The Page Block Edit window is displayed ltem System Setting E ZM Editor for Windows Yersion 2 00 untitled 237 ZM 37 T 640 480 32K Color Page Block Edit Green File Edit Display Item System Setting Tool Window a LACIE IAEA AA E m mee he bHe a De MO o Be amorosa ulti O verlap SE Ee KEN D if Ee el 44 Ce LA e bg EA e hos Ki Cu a A CT 0 PEC P GC A A 3 gt CR Data Block Message KH B lockNofsPoup SERE en Macro Block LH No Setting Page Block Direct Block Screen Block Tile Ex Char 16 Ex Char 32 Data Sheet Screen Library Po 2 No Setting t y O Meee No Setting Gil No Setting 3 No Setting it l No Setting Ltr No Setting i O PF e No Setting LI PO No Setting t Pp 10 No Setting of 11 No Setting i _____ G i No Setting i Pods No Setting LI A No Setting LI Gil No Setting LI 16 No Setting Ltr 17 No Setting LI 18 Ma Gatti na i D e No Setting Ir Multilanguage Animation 4 61 Chapter4 Registration Items Page Block Editing The Page Block Edit window consists
399. xl Main Char Prop Division No m Display Mode Calender Display z M Use System Calendar en Doo 00 SABER Calendar Condition Date and Time DI Zero Suppress Date Display 1171 y 7 Year 4 digit Display Time Display 13 30 Process Cycle Low Speed y IA For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 11 Time Display Calendar in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button Calendar Display Clicking the Calendar Display icon brings up the Calendar dialog OE Calendar 3 x Main Year Month Day Hour Minute Second week Customize Division No Vw MM DL Parts Select IA For the description of setting the dialog see Chapter 11 Time Display Calendar in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function Clicking the Parts Select button brings up the parts list Select the desired part and click Select The previous dialog is displayed When placing the selected part on the screen click the Place button 2 52 IOoe KN Chapter2 Screens Note on selecting parts Calendar parts consist of parts like hour minute and second year month and day and also parts with punctuation marks like and If you check M Save Setting in the calendar parts list wndow and then proceed to select parts there are instances of the selected parts
400. xt Faint Dot 2 Select the desired options for Foreground and Line Type For sectors select the desired options for O Paint O Frame Background Frame Color and Tile 3 Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point 4 When the mouse is released the arc or sector is displayed 5 Clicking the mouse to the desired position draws the arc or sector X O Start point End point 3 14 Chapter 3 Drawing Tools Ellipse 1 Click the Ellipse icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie Graph Scale Trend Graph Scale Mun T ext Line Box Circle Text Paint Dot ojojefo alc E ai Foreground D fa M Behan FP Paint Frame Ealar e Frame We ine pe SESE EEE Select the draw type O o 5 O lt OD Fe gt O o 0 Drag from the start point to the Drag from the center for 0 end point of the box where an GG the majorradius inscribed ellipse is drawn O O Start point End point Select the desired options for ICT Paint O Frame Foreground Background Frame Color Tile and Line Type 2 Drag from the start point to the end point An ellipse is drawn Elliptical Arc and Elliptical Sector Click the Elliptical Arc or Elliptical Sector icon in the Screen Drawing dialog The following dialog is displayed Screen Drawing Bar Graph Scale Fie
401. y Pattern This option is used to check the displays of the OFF ON and P3 to P8 patterns Color Select This option is used to select a color from eight Select the desired part and color and click Select APP2 5 Appendix2 3D Parts 6 The selected part is previewed in the Switch dialog WOTBUL Geet OF F ON P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 OFF ON P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 Color Clicking each tab shows the preview of the corresponding pattern Color change 8 colors is possible while the preview is displayed APP2 6 Appendix2 3D Parts Image A part selected from the parts list has different ON OFF and P3 to P8 patterns as per Image setting No below When making the ON and OFF patterns the same or interchanging the ON and OFF patterns as per Image setting Yes below use this button 1 When changing a pattern show the preview of the desired part and click the Image button The Image Setting dialog is displayed Image Setting X Noga oo U U o d Color Select L v 2 Select a pattern A setting example is provided below Colors are changeable E The above step completes a part selection IT For other settings such as memory see the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function APP2 7 Appendix2 3D Parts Flash Function When 3D parts in the file 3DStd z3p or BDnow_p O z3p are used the OFF pattern and a pattern of ON and P3 to P8 can be displa
402. y Target Open Opens a copy target file e Copy Target Save Overwrites the currently opened copy target file e Copy Target Save As Click this option to give a different name to the currently opened copy target file for saving e Copy Source Open Opens a copy source file e Quit File Managing Quits File Managing e Quit Application Quits the ZM 71SE editor Chapter 7 Useful Techniques File Management File Copy 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Copy 3 The File Copy dialog is displayed Specify the desired files for Copy Source and Copy Target File Copy EX Specify each name of the source file and the target file Copy Source Pei Copy Target Pei k Copy the environment file Cancel 4 When M Copy the Environment File is checked the environment file for the copy source file with extensions ENV is also copied The environment file is not copied when unchecked l 5 Click OK Copying is executed uow peue oi 1 39 Chapter7 Useful Techniques File Management File Deletion 1 Select File Managing from the File menu 2 Select File Delete 3 The File to Delete dialog is displayed Specify the file to be deleted Look in 3 ZM300data e 6 ES El aaa Z37 laa check 237 la Show_2_For_sharp 237 a 2m3715a 237 al Show_2 for_sharp1 237 a 2m381sa 237 PP Test 237 a
403. y clicking Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Modify Part window 6 The Modify Part window for the numerical data display part is displayed Edit the part or change its size 1234 gt For anumerical data display part wth a painted box it is recommended that the box color be specified for Background in the Char Prop tab windowof the Num Display dialog and that Transparent be unchecked With Transparent checked a flickering will occur on the LCD Control Terminal screen when the data on the display part is changed and the data display speed will be slow Background color Foreground color 1254 Painted box Appendix 3 Part Editing 7 After editing the part click the Frame Auto Fit icon The frame automatically fits the part Ce Paste Ctrl Melete ON Grid Grid Display Grid Type d Frame Auto Fitting Switch Area Setting FantRosition setting Hlb es tante 8 Close the Modify Part window Num Display Part Edit window 9 The former edit window is displayed The modified numerical data display part appears in the window Editing a Keypad The keypad for inputting numerals or characters consists of numerous individual switch parts but is registered in the patt file as a single part Therefore to create and register a keypad part each individual part should be created following the procedure explained in Editing Switch Lamp Parts and should be grouped int
404. y displayed 8 26 Chapter 8 Applications for ZM 71 SE Editor Read Procedure 1 Go to the File menu and click on Read CSV File The Select CSV File dialog is displayed Select CSY File ES My Pictures Files of type csv File cv Cancel Buffer Ho jo IT Make from M CARD SFTE 2 Select the file name to read 3 Set the buffer number for the stored data For the setting example on the previous page this setting would be 0 4 Ifthe CSV file that is read is one that was created with ZM CARD Software click on the O Make from M CARD SFTE box Note ZM CARD SFTE is memory card editor This is an application software separate from the ZM 71SE editor When writing sampling data stored inthe memory card as a CSV file using ZM CARD Software time data appears at the far left of each line When you check Make from M CARD SFTE the time data is not recognized as sampling data and thus is not read 5 Click the Read button e For Sampling Method Constant Sample the data read is immediately shown on the ZM series graph e For Sampling Method Bit Synchronize the data read will be shown on the ZM series depending on whether the sample control memory trigger sets or resets the bit For details on the sampling method or sample control memory see Chapter 10 Sampling in the ZM 71SE Instruction Manual Function 8 27 Hi 3 CG a O Q Chapter8 Applications for Z
405. yed alternately like they are flashing The following explains the lamp flashing setting procedure Also follow the same procedure in the case of switches Setting Procedure 1 Openthe Lamp dialog Open the Customize tab window The OFF pattern is previewed T Custom Bitmap OFF Jon le In FsLight 00 Note For O Custom Bitmap see page APP2 23 in this chapter APP2 8 Appendix2 3D Parts 2 Select the tab of a pattern for flashing The pattern is previewed Ex ON pattern selected for flashing display A 2 sped dE Display APP2 9 Appendix2 3D Parts L A flashing time interval corresponds to the Blink Flash tab window settings in the Unit Setting dialog selected from the System Setting menu Switch Lamp ZM 42 to 82 Compatible This section explains the procedure for setting ZM 42 to 82 compatible 3D switch parts Also follow the same procedure when placing lamps 1 Click the Switch icon 2 The Switch dialog is displayed Click the Parts Select button Switch Main Character Detail Customize Color OFF on Division No T Output Memory T Lamp Memory Cas J Draw Mode GG xOR C REP Function No Function Change APP2 10 Appendix2 3D Parts 3 The Switch List window is displayed When the desired 3D parts file is already displayed go to step 5 Click the Parts File button
406. ze o 3 O H Si O el D h O s a a O U w 3 Trend Graph Part Edit window 9 The former edit window is displayed The modified trend bar graph part appears in the window APP3 25 Appendix 3 Part Editing Lee APP3 26 Closed Area Graph Editing Procedure Procedure to edit and register a new part is explained below Closed Area Graph Part Edit window 1 The edit wndow indicating the selected registration number is opened New Part icon 2 Click the New Part icon A dotted box and a mover tool appear 3 Click the mover tool in the desired position A new graph part is placed 4 Double click the part The Closed Area Graph dialog is displayed Set the dialog as desired The dialog for each part cannotbe set after the Modify Part window is opened Set the dialog before opening or after closing the window Select the closed area graph part by clicking Click the Change the Setting of a Part Placed icon Appendix 3 Part Editing Modify Part window 5 The Modify Part window for the closed area graph part is displayed Edit the part or change its size en E e e Editing Procedure 1 Draw a closed area graphic using Line Box or Circle in the Draw menu The max size of a closed area graphic is W x H 65 536 bytes ZM 42 43 32 768 bytes L Useful tools h Point Search Enlarge items including circles in the opposi
407. zing the Item List Tile the item list and the edit window When the desired item is clicked on the item list handles are shown around the item indicating that the item is selected Selected onthe screen Screen 5 Edit DATA DISPLAY ww DARDS GJ erie AA 5 Item List Screen 5 Registration Order 1 1 Box Paint 15 1119 170 122 Box Paint 15 113I 11 70 122 Box Paint 15 1149 170 119 Box Paint 15 115 41 70 116 Click here Grouping End lt lt lt lt Box Paint 25 100 160 135 2 Num Display 0001 00 27 102 155 133 Function No Grouping Start gt gt gt gt H an item cannot be found visually on the screen when you would like to change the setting use this method This is useful in selecting a hard to find item L A maximum of 512 items can be displayed on one window When an item is selected the AS total numberofthe items placed on the screen and the line number ofthe selected item are displayed on the status bar When the number exceeds 512 click Next in the Display menu or the right click menu The hidden itemscome into view The current page numberis indicated on the title bar of the window Item List Screen 5 Registration Order Screen Lib 0 0 No 2 Screen Lib 0 0 No 1 Char 15 90 DEC Char 15 165 BCD Char 205 165 BCD W SIGN Char 205 90 DEC Wy SIGN Char 205 240 OCT Char 15 240 HEX Char 55

ZM-71SE instruction Manual (Operation Version)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents